SECTION B - Derry City Council
SECTION B - Derry City Council
SECTION B - Derry City Council
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
<strong>SECTION</strong> B<br />
WORKS INFORMATION<br />
Part 1 – Preambles to the Specification<br />
Part 2 – Specification
Section B<br />
Part 1<br />
Preambles to the Specification
1.0 PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION<br />
1. The Specification referred to in the Tender shall be the ‘Specification for Highway Works’, published<br />
by the Stationery Office (formerly HMSO) as Volume 1 of the Manual of Contract Documents for<br />
Highway Works, as modified and extended by the following:<br />
(i) Appendix 0/1: Contract-specific Additional, Substitute and Cancelled Clauses, Tables and<br />
Figures;<br />
(ii) Appendix 0/2: Contract-specific minor alterations to existing Clauses, Tables and Figures;<br />
(iii) The Numbered Appendices listed in Appendix 0/3;<br />
(iv) Appendix 0/5: Special national alterations of the Overseeing Organisation of Scotland,<br />
Wales or Northern Ireland.<br />
Appendix 0/4 contains a list of the Drawings.<br />
2. The relevant publication date of each page of the Specification for Highway Works is given in the<br />
Schedule of Pages and Relevant Publication Dates.<br />
3. An Additional Clause as indicated by a suffix ‘A’ in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from<br />
the Overseeing Organisation of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. An Additional Clause as<br />
indicated by a suffix ‘AR’ in Appendix 0/1 is a Contract-specific alteration.<br />
4. A Substitute Clause, as indicated by the suffix ‘S’ in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from<br />
the Overseeing Organisation of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. A Substitute Clause as<br />
indicated by a suffix ‘SR’ in Appendix 0/1 is a Contract-specific alteration.<br />
5. A Cancelled Clause as indicated by a suffix ‘C’ in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from the<br />
Overseeing Organisation of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. A Cancelled Clause indicated by<br />
a suffix ‘CR’ in Appendix 0/1 is a Contract-specific alteration.<br />
6. Insofar as any of the Numbered Appendices may conflict or be inconsistent with any provision of<br />
the Specification for Highway Works the Numbered Appendices shall always prevail. Additionally,<br />
Numbered Appendices 0/1 and 0/2 shall take precedence over Numbered Appendix 0/5.<br />
7. Any reference in the Contract to a Clause number or Appendix shall be deemed to refer to the<br />
corresponding Substitute Clause number or Appendix listed in Appendix 0/1, 0/2 or 0/5.<br />
8. Where a Clause is altered any original Table/Figure referred to in the Clause shall apply unless<br />
the Table/ Figure is also altered. Where a Table/Figure is altered any reference in a Clause to the<br />
original Table/Figure shall apply to the altered Table/Figure.<br />
9. Where a Clause in the Specification relates to work goods or materials which are not required for<br />
the Works it shall be deemed not to apply.<br />
1
10. Any Appendix referred to in the Specification which is not used shall be deemed not to apply.<br />
11. Where a Clause in the Specification is prefixed by an # this indicates that this particular Clause<br />
has a substitute National Alteration for one or more of the Overseeing Organisations of Scotland,<br />
Wales or Northern Ireland. Substitute or additional National Clauses shall be used within<br />
countries to which they specifically apply and they are deemed to replace corresponding Clauses<br />
in the main text of the Specification as appropriate. The substitute National Clauses are located at<br />
the end of the relevant Series together with the additional National Clauses of the Overseeing<br />
Organisations.<br />
12. Other than where references to the Overseeing Organisation are made in the context of the<br />
Overseeing Organisation granting statutory type approvals, the roles and functions of the<br />
Overseeing Organisation shall be undertaken by the Project Manager.<br />
Where the Specification requires the provision of documentation to the Overseeing Organisation<br />
for statutory or type approval such documentation shall be provided to the Project Manager.<br />
13. If the Specification is used in conjunction with a Contract under which the Contractor is<br />
responsible for the design of any part of the Permanent Works, the delegation of the roles and<br />
functions of the Overseeing Organisation as stated in paragraph 12 above shall be further<br />
amended as follows:<br />
(i)<br />
(ii)<br />
If any agreement, consent or approval required to be obtained from the Overseeing<br />
Organisation impacts on the health and safety of the general public, the environment or<br />
any property or equipment not owned or operated by the Contractor, such agreement,<br />
consent, approval shall be obtained from the Project Manager<br />
Where the Specification provides for the Overseeing Organisation to require a test,<br />
waive the requirement for a test or alter testing frequency, the party to whom the<br />
Overseeing Organisation’s roles and functions have been ascribed by paragraph 12 above<br />
shall exercise such decisions in accordance with the Employer’s requirements.<br />
2
Specification for Highway Works<br />
Schedule of Pages and Relevant Publication Dates<br />
Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date<br />
000<br />
000<br />
000<br />
1<br />
3F<br />
2<br />
March 1998<br />
May 2005<br />
November 2006<br />
100<br />
100<br />
100<br />
100<br />
100<br />
2<br />
W1F<br />
12 to 14, 20F<br />
1, 3 to 7, N1, N<br />
8 to 9, 11, 15 to 19, N2, N4<br />
10, N5 to N6F<br />
May 2001<br />
May 2005<br />
November 2005<br />
May 2006<br />
November 2006<br />
November 2008<br />
200<br />
200<br />
1, 3F<br />
2<br />
May 2001<br />
May 2004<br />
300<br />
300<br />
300<br />
1<br />
4<br />
2 to 3, 5 to 6F<br />
May 2001<br />
November 2002<br />
May 2008<br />
400<br />
400<br />
1 to 6, 8, 10 to 13F<br />
7, 9<br />
November 2007<br />
November 2008<br />
500<br />
500<br />
500<br />
500<br />
500<br />
500<br />
23 to 24, 26<br />
28F<br />
3, 22, N1F<br />
2, 5, 27<br />
6, 25<br />
1, 4, 7 to 21<br />
November 2004<br />
May 2005<br />
May 2006<br />
November 2006<br />
November 2007<br />
November 2009<br />
600<br />
600<br />
600<br />
600<br />
600<br />
600<br />
33<br />
2, 27 to 28, 30 to 32, 34 to 36, N1<br />
25 to 26<br />
42 to 49, 52 to 68F<br />
37, 50<br />
1, 3 to 24, 29, 38 to 41, S1 to S3F, N2 to N4F<br />
November 2003<br />
November 2005<br />
November 2006<br />
November 2008<br />
November 2007<br />
November 2009<br />
700<br />
700<br />
700<br />
2 to 3, 5 to 6, N1, N3 to N5F<br />
4, N2<br />
1, 7 to 32F<br />
November 2006<br />
August 2008<br />
November 2009<br />
800 1 to 25F November 2009<br />
900<br />
900<br />
900<br />
1000<br />
1000<br />
1000<br />
2 to 5, 9 to 22, 24 to 26, 28 to 67F<br />
1, 6 to 8, S1F<br />
23, 27<br />
3, 5 to 6<br />
1 to 2, 4, 7 to 15, 19 to 33F<br />
16 to 18<br />
August 2008<br />
November 2008<br />
May 2009<br />
November 2005<br />
May 2006<br />
November 2006<br />
3
Specification for Highway Works<br />
Schedule of Pages and Relevant Publication Dates<br />
Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date<br />
1100<br />
1100<br />
1100<br />
1, 4F<br />
2, N1F<br />
3<br />
August 2008<br />
November 2006<br />
November 2004<br />
1200<br />
1200<br />
1200<br />
1200<br />
1200<br />
1200<br />
1200<br />
5<br />
2 to 3, W1F<br />
1, 14 to 16F<br />
4, 9 to 11, 13<br />
12<br />
6 to 7, N1 to N4F<br />
8<br />
May 2001<br />
August 2003<br />
May 2004<br />
May 200<br />
November 2006<br />
November 2007<br />
May 2008<br />
1300<br />
1300<br />
1300<br />
1300<br />
N2F<br />
3 to 4<br />
1, 5 to 10, 12F<br />
2, 11 and N1<br />
November 2003<br />
November 2004<br />
November 2005<br />
May 2006<br />
1400<br />
1400<br />
1, 3 to 9F<br />
2, N1F<br />
May 2001<br />
May 2006<br />
1500<br />
1500<br />
1500<br />
1500<br />
1, 5 to 6, 12, 14 to 17F<br />
3 to 4, 8 to 11, 13<br />
2<br />
7<br />
November 2006<br />
November 2004<br />
February 2003<br />
May 2001<br />
1600<br />
1600<br />
3, 20 to 23, 43<br />
2, 6 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 19, 27 to 28, 32 to<br />
34, 36 to 37, 39 to 42, 44 to 48<br />
November 2005<br />
November 2003<br />
March 1998<br />
1600<br />
1, 4 to 5, 9, 15, 17 to 18, 24 to 26, 29 to 31,<br />
35, 38, 49F<br />
1700<br />
1700<br />
1700<br />
2 to 7, 10 to 15<br />
8 to 9<br />
1, 16 to 22F<br />
May 2004<br />
May 2005<br />
May 2006<br />
1800<br />
1800<br />
1, 4, 6, 8 to 9<br />
2 to 3, 5, 7, 10 to 12F<br />
May 2004<br />
November 2005<br />
1900<br />
1900<br />
1900<br />
1900<br />
2 to 4<br />
6 to 7, 15<br />
1, 5, 8 to 14, 16, 18 to 30F, S1 to S2F<br />
17<br />
May 2003<br />
May 2005<br />
May 2008<br />
November 2008<br />
2000<br />
2000<br />
1, 3 to 4F<br />
2<br />
May 2001<br />
November 2004<br />
2100<br />
2100<br />
2100<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1, 4F<br />
March 1998<br />
November 2003<br />
November 2005<br />
4
Specification for Highway Works<br />
Schedule of Pages and Relevant Publication Dates<br />
Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date<br />
2300<br />
2300<br />
1<br />
2 to 3F<br />
March 1998<br />
May 2001<br />
2400<br />
2400<br />
2400<br />
1, 4, 7F<br />
2<br />
3, 5 to 6<br />
May 2005<br />
May 2006<br />
May 2008<br />
2500<br />
2500<br />
2500<br />
2500<br />
2500<br />
2500<br />
1<br />
2, 8, 11F<br />
10<br />
6 to 7, 9<br />
5<br />
3 to 4<br />
May 2001<br />
November 2003<br />
November 2004<br />
May 2005<br />
May 2006<br />
November 2006<br />
2600<br />
2600<br />
2600<br />
2600<br />
2600<br />
1<br />
2 to 4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7F<br />
March 1998<br />
November 2003<br />
May 2005<br />
November 2004<br />
November 2006<br />
3000<br />
3000<br />
3000<br />
3000<br />
1, 4 to 7, 10, 12 to 17, 19, 22 to 27F<br />
20<br />
2 to 3<br />
8 to 9, 11, 18, 21<br />
November 2004<br />
May 2001<br />
May 2006<br />
May 2008<br />
5000<br />
5000<br />
1, 4 to 19F, S1F<br />
2 to 3<br />
May 2005<br />
November 2008<br />
Appendix A 1 to 32F May 2008<br />
Appendix B<br />
Appendix B<br />
1<br />
2 to 7F<br />
May 2006<br />
November 2006<br />
Appendix C<br />
Appendix C<br />
1<br />
2F<br />
May 2005<br />
November 2006<br />
#Appendix D<br />
Appendix D (NI)<br />
1F<br />
N1F<br />
May 2005<br />
March 1998<br />
Appendix E (NI)<br />
#Appendix E<br />
N1F<br />
1F<br />
May 2005<br />
May 2005<br />
Appendix F 1 to 55F May 2009<br />
Appendix G 1F May 2004<br />
Appendix H<br />
Appendix H<br />
Appendix H<br />
1<br />
2, 6 to 8F<br />
3 to 5<br />
November 2006<br />
November 2005<br />
May 2004<br />
5
Section A<br />
Part 2<br />
Specification<br />
6
2.0 SPECIFICATION<br />
APPENDIX 0/1: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE AND CANCELLED CLAUSES<br />
AND TABLES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT<br />
Part A: Volume 1 Specification<br />
List of Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />
Clause No<br />
Title<br />
171 AR DAMAGE TO STRUCTURES, ROADS AND ADJACENT PROPERTY<br />
OR BUILDINGS<br />
172 AR ROADS TO BE KEPT CLEAN<br />
173 AR COMMUNICATIONS<br />
175 AR OTHER WORKS ON THE CONTRACT AREA<br />
176 AR COMPLETION OF CONTRACT<br />
177AR<br />
REMOVAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL<br />
178 AR FAILURE TO DISAPPROVE<br />
179AR<br />
570AR<br />
WAYLEAVES AND ACCESS RIGHTS<br />
TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF PIPELINES<br />
670 AR EXCAVATION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT /<br />
FOOTWAY SURFACES<br />
770 AR SURFACE CONDITION<br />
771 AR SURFACING REINSTATEMENTS<br />
772 AR CONCRETE REINSTATEMENTS<br />
List of Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />
Clause<br />
3070AR<br />
Title<br />
LANDSCAPING<br />
C20 DEMOLITION<br />
120 EXTENT OF DECONSTRUCTION/ DEMOLITION<br />
130 GROUNDWORKS<br />
140 BENCH MARKS<br />
120 STRIPPING TOPSOIL<br />
121 TREATING TOPSOIL<br />
125 HANDLING TOPSOIL<br />
168 GENERAL SITE CLEARANCE<br />
7
170 POTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION<br />
171 TREE ROOT BARRIERS (Reroot 2000 – 1mm thick by<br />
2000mm deep)<br />
172 TREE ROOT BARRIERS (Reroot 2000 – 2mm thick by<br />
1500mm deep)<br />
173 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS<br />
410 TOPSOIL:<br />
430 SURPLUS EXCAVATED TOPSOIL:<br />
440 SURPLUS SUBSOIL:<br />
FILLING<br />
510 HAZARDOUS, AGGRESSIVE OR UNSTABLE MATERIALS:<br />
530 PLACING FILL GENERALLY:<br />
610 COMPACTED LANDSCAPE FILLING:<br />
626 COMPACTED GENERAL FILLING:<br />
730 IMPORTED LAKELAND BROWN GRAVEL (75MM DEEP)<br />
TO GRAVEL AREAS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS IN<br />
<strong>SECTION</strong>S 1 AND 2<br />
740 IMPORTED BLUE GREY SLATE MULCH (75MM DEEP) TO<br />
BOULDER AND GRAVEL PLANTING AREAS IN <strong>SECTION</strong><br />
2<br />
750 IMPORTED BOULDERS (DONEGAL GREY/BROWN<br />
GRANITE) IN <strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />
F20 NATURAL STONE RUBBLE WALLING/PILLARS –<br />
<strong>SECTION</strong>S 1 AND 2<br />
110 PILLAR TYPE 1<br />
130 PILLAR TYPE 3<br />
140 STONE PLINTH FOR THE HORSE SCULPTURE<br />
RELOCATION<br />
Q10<br />
KERBS/ EDGINGS/ CHANNELS/ PAVING ACCESSORIES<br />
TYPES OF KERBS/ EDGINGS AND CHANNELS<br />
100 PRECAST CONCRETE COUNTRY KERBS LAID FLUSH<br />
FOR VEHICULAR OVERIDE – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
105 PRECAST CONCRETE COUNTRY KERBS LAID 125mm<br />
SHOW – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
8
110 5mm STEEL EDGING<br />
120 5mm STEEL EDGING TREE RINGS<br />
130 SUPEREDGE PLASTIC EDGING<br />
Q20<br />
GRANULAR SUB-BASES TO ROADS/PAVINGS<br />
130 HERBICIDE:<br />
140 EXCAVATION OF SUBGRADES<br />
145 PREPARATION AND COMPACTION OF SUBGRADES<br />
150 SUBGRADE FOR VEHICULAR AREAS:<br />
160 SUBGRADE FOR PEDESTRIAN AREAS:<br />
170 GEOTEXTILE FILTER:<br />
Q23<br />
RESIN BOUND GRAVEL/ VEHICULAR / PEDESTRIAN<br />
TYPES OF SURFACING<br />
200 RESIN BOUND GRAVEL FOR PEDESTRIAN AREAS (NEW<br />
FOOTPATHS) – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
210 RESIN BOUND GRAVEL (FOR NEW VEHICULAR<br />
SURFACE) – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
230 LAYING GENERALLY<br />
240 COLD WEATHER WORKING<br />
250 DRAINAGE FALLS<br />
260 LAYING GRANULAR SURFACES IN VEHICULAR AREAS<br />
280 LAYING GRANULAR SURFACES IN PEDESTRIAN AREAS<br />
290 PROTECTION FROM TRAFFIC AND PLANT<br />
Q28<br />
TOPSOIL AND GROWING MEDIA<br />
200 GRADING SUBSOIL<br />
250 SUBSOIL SURFACE PREPARATION<br />
330 SURPLUS TOPSOIL TO BE RETAINED<br />
335 SURPLUS TOPSOIL TO BE REMOVED<br />
9
670 CONTAMINATION<br />
680 TOPSOIL STORAGE HEAPS<br />
-<br />
690 HANDLING TOPSOIL<br />
700 SPREADING TOPSOIL<br />
910 FINISHED LEVELS OF TOPSOIL AFTER SETTLEMENT<br />
Q30 SEEDING/TURFING<br />
GENERAL INFORMATION/REQUIREMENTS<br />
115 SEEDED AND TURFED AREAS<br />
120 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS<br />
145 WATERING<br />
150 WATER RESTRICTIONS<br />
160 NOTICE<br />
210 HERBICIDE<br />
250 CULTIVATION<br />
260 GRADING<br />
275 FERTILIZER FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />
280 FINAL CULTIVATION<br />
310 GRASS SEED FOR GENERAL GRASS AREAS – MAIN<br />
CEMETERY – <strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />
319 QUALITY OF SEED FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />
330 SOWING<br />
335 GRASS SOWING SEASON<br />
340 PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE FOR ALL GRASSING AREAS<br />
352 EDGES TO SEEDED AREAS<br />
TURFING<br />
400 CULTIVATED TURF (TO CHAPEL GARDEN) – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
420 DELIVERY AND STORAGE<br />
430 TURFING GENERALLY TO CHAPEL GARDEN – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
450 TRIMMING TURF TO CHAPEL GARDEN – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
CUTTING / MAINTENANCE<br />
10
530 FIRST CUT OF ALL GRASSED AND TURFED AREAS<br />
531 FIRST CUT OF ALL TURFED AREAS<br />
605 MAINTENANCE<br />
606 MAINTENANCE OF TURFED AREAS – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2 at the<br />
Chapel<br />
607 MAINTENANCE OF GRASSED AREAS – <strong>SECTION</strong> 1 at the<br />
Cemetery<br />
610 FAILURES OF SEEDING/TURFING<br />
620 MAINTAINING GRASS AREAS<br />
680 MAINTENANCE FERTILIZER FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />
Q31<br />
EXTERNAL PLANTING AND ACCESSORIES<br />
110 PLANTING WORKS<br />
GENERAL INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS<br />
112 SITE CLEARANCE GENERALLY<br />
118 SOIL CONDITIONS<br />
120 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS<br />
125 TIMES OF YEAR FOR PLANTING<br />
130 MECHANICAL TOOLS<br />
145 WATERING<br />
150 WATER RESTRICTIONS<br />
160 NOTICE<br />
200 PLANTS/ TREES - GENERAL<br />
215 PLANTS/ TREES - SPECIFICATION CRITERIA<br />
216 PLANTS/ TREES - SPECIFICATION CRITERIA<br />
217 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES<br />
218 PLEACHED TREES<br />
219 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES<br />
220 STANDARD TREES<br />
221 SPECIMEN ROOTBALLED YEWS<br />
222 CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS/ TREES<br />
225 BULBS/ CORMS/ TUBERS<br />
230 BEDDING PLANTS<br />
245 LABELLING AND INFORMATION<br />
11
246 LABELLING AND INFORMATION<br />
250 SUPPLY OF PLANTS/ TREES<br />
260 PLANT/ TREE SUBSTITUTION<br />
265 PLANT/ TREE HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT<br />
270 PLANTING GENERALLY<br />
280 TREATMENT OF TREE WOUNDS<br />
285 PROTECTION OF EXISTING GRASS<br />
290 SURPLUS MATERIAL<br />
300 HERBICIDE<br />
335 GENERAL FERTILIZER<br />
375 CULTIVATION<br />
385 MULCH MATTING/GEOTEXTILE FABRIC<br />
405 SHRUB/ CONTAINER PLANTING<br />
420 CLIMBING PLANTS<br />
435 CLIMBING PLANTS USED AS GROUND COVER<br />
445 PLANTING BULBS/ CORMS/ TUBERS<br />
470 SHRUB AND TREE PLANTING TO GRAVEL AREAS<br />
471 NATURALIZED HEDGES / INSTANT HEDGE BETWEEN<br />
<strong>SECTION</strong> 1& 2 AT END OF CHAPEL GARDEN<br />
472 FORMAL HEDGES TO CHAPEL GARDENS AND OAK LEAF<br />
HEDGE MOTIFS ON UPPER RETAINING WALL IN <strong>SECTION</strong><br />
1<br />
475 BACKFILLING MATERIAL<br />
480 AFTER PLANTING<br />
485 MULCHING PLANTING BEDS<br />
PLANTING TREES<br />
500 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES (WITHOUT<br />
BORDERLINE STEEL EDGING)<br />
501 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES (WITH BORDERLINE<br />
STEEL EDGING)<br />
502 PLEACHED TREES<br />
503 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES WITH DOUBLE STAKES<br />
504 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES WITH UNDERGROUND<br />
GUYING SYSTEM<br />
505 STANDARD TREES<br />
507 SPECIMEN ROOTBALLED YEWS<br />
535 STAKING GENERALLY<br />
12
540 UNDERGROUND GUYING OF SPECIMEN TREES<br />
550 TREE STAKES (FEATHERED TREES ONLY)<br />
560 TREE TIES<br />
585 BACKFILLING MATERIAL<br />
710 MAINTENANCE<br />
720 FAILURES OF PLANTING<br />
740 CLEANLINESS<br />
750 PLANTING MAINTENANCE GENERALLY<br />
760 PLANTING MAINTENANCE - PRUNING<br />
765 PLANTING MAINTENANCE - WATERING<br />
770 WOODLAND PLANTING MAINTENANCE<br />
790 FINAL MULCHING<br />
Q40<br />
FENCING<br />
125 1100 MM HIGH MILD STEEL ESTATE RAILING<br />
250 1450 MM HIGH MILD STEEL SAFETY ESTATE RAILING<br />
300 OAK LEAFED DOUBLE GATES<br />
610 INSTALLATION<br />
620 SETTING POSTS IN CONCRETE<br />
630 EXPOSED CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS<br />
680 DAMAGE TO GALVANIZED SURFACES<br />
Q50<br />
SITE/ STREET FURNITURE/ EQUIPMENT<br />
200 SEATS (HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL – POLYESTER<br />
POWDER COAT FINISHED)<br />
210 LITTER BINS (HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL –<br />
POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISHED)<br />
220 WASTE BASKETS FOR SETING AROUND CEMETERY –<br />
<strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />
260 PLANTERS TO CHAPEL GARDEN<br />
270 CAST STONE STATUES – SUMMER – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />
13
280 CAST STONE STATUES – SPRING – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />
290 CAST STONE STATUES – WINTER – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />
300 CAST STONE STATUES – AUTUMN – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />
310 OBELISK – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />
400 PLEACHED TREE POST AND WIRE FRAME – DRAWING<br />
NR 83473- 04<br />
List of Substitute Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />
Clause No<br />
Title<br />
1800 SR STRUCTURAL STEELWORK<br />
1802 SR PROTECTION OF STEELWORK AGAINST CORROSION<br />
List of Cancelled Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />
Clause No<br />
Series 1800<br />
Series 1900<br />
Title<br />
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK<br />
PROTECTION OF STEELWORK AGAINST CORROSION<br />
14
Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />
Clause No<br />
Title and written Text<br />
171 AR DAMAGE TO STRUCTURES, ROADS AND ADJACENT PROPERTY OR<br />
BUILDINGS<br />
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the condition of structures, roads, walls,<br />
fences and adjacent property before commencing work on each part of the site and<br />
shall report any defects to the Project Manager in writing. The Contractor shall be<br />
responsible for any damage to structures, roads, footways or entrances (public or<br />
private) and adjoining property, walls or buildings which may be caused by his<br />
workmen or sub-contractors in the carrying out of the Works and shall make good any<br />
such damage to the satisfaction of the <strong>Council</strong>, Project Manager and those<br />
concerned.<br />
172 AR ROADS TO BE KEPT CLEAN<br />
1. The Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent dirt and other deleterious<br />
material being dropped or spread by traffic from or associated with the Works on<br />
roads in public use or on roads being part of the Works which are made<br />
available for use by the Contractor. Any dirt or other deleterious matter<br />
adhering to the tyres or chassis of any vehicle shall be thoroughly cleaned off<br />
before the vehicle is permitted to leave the Site. The Contractor shall be equally<br />
responsible for the vehicles of his sub contractors and suppliers.<br />
2. While the intent of this Clause is to prevent the spilling and spreading of dirt and<br />
other deleterious matter on roadways, nevertheless the Contractor shall also<br />
clean roadways of any such dirt and other deleterious matter as may be spilled<br />
or spread by traffic travelling to or from the site in connection with the Works<br />
whether such traffic is the Contractor's or his sub contractor's or his suppliers.<br />
The Contractor shall carry out any cleaning work during hours, which will reduce<br />
interference with public traffic to a minimum. Such cleaning operation shall be<br />
carried out notwithstanding road cleaning work being carried out by the<br />
Employer or other Contractor(s) to the Employer.<br />
15
Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures (Cont.)<br />
Clause No<br />
Title and written text<br />
173 AR COMMUNICATIONS<br />
Within 7 days of award of the Contract the Contractor shall inform the <strong>Council</strong> in<br />
writing of a contact telephone number for the periods as detailed below:<br />
8.00 am to 6.00 pm on weekdays<br />
6.00 pm to 8.00 am on weekdays<br />
Saturdays, Sundays and Bank Holidays<br />
The Contractor shall ensure that he can be contacted at all times during the period of<br />
the Contract.<br />
In the event of emergency call-out or other reason the <strong>Council</strong>’s representative shall<br />
instruct the Contractor by telephone and the Contractor shall be required to deploy<br />
appropriate operative(s) and equipment to immediately respond to the call-out.<br />
175 AR OTHER WORKS ON THE CONTRACT AREA<br />
The Contractor shall take into account the presence from time to time of other<br />
authorised Contractors, <strong>Council</strong> Staff and other bodies executing work which could<br />
have or may have an impact on the Works.<br />
176AR<br />
COMPLETION OF CONTRACT<br />
At the completion of the works to the site, the Contractor shall, at his expense, inspect<br />
and sweep up and remove all surplus materials and plant and make good any<br />
damage to grass verges, planting, footpath and fences. This shall be undertaken to<br />
the all areas affected by the works.<br />
177AR<br />
REMOVAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL<br />
1. The Contractor shall not allow rubbish and surplus material of any description to<br />
accumulate but shall clear away all such material on the same day as it is<br />
generated to approved licensed tip.<br />
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to prevent any material entering any<br />
drainage system. Any materials entering a drainage system shall be removed<br />
immediately.<br />
16
Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures (Cont.)<br />
Clause No<br />
Title and written text<br />
178 AR FAILURE TO DISAPPROVE<br />
179AR<br />
Failure by the <strong>Council</strong> or any person acting under them to disapprove any work or<br />
materials shall not prejudice the power of the <strong>Council</strong> or any of their representatives<br />
to subsequently disapprove such work or materials.<br />
WAYLEAVES AND RIGHTS OF ACCESS<br />
In general the Contractor shall allow for gaining access to boundary fences and<br />
adjacent areas from the Contract Area. If in the opinion of the <strong>Council</strong> access from<br />
the Contract Area is impractical then the <strong>Council</strong> shall notify the Contractor of any<br />
wayleaves or rights of access that have been arranged to enable the work to be<br />
undertaken.<br />
570AR<br />
TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF PIPELINES<br />
In addition to testing requirement in Appendix 1/5 and Clause 509 of the Specification<br />
for Highway Work.<br />
1. All Testing and cleaning of pressure pipelines and non pressured pipelines<br />
should be tested to the requirements of the Civil engineering specification for<br />
the water industry 6 th Edition Section 7<br />
2. Testing of polyethylene pressure pipelines shall be carried out in accordance<br />
with the procedures in “”Pressure Testing of Water Supply Pipelines and<br />
Sewers Rising Mains” by WRc<br />
3. Swabbing and disinfection of watermains should be carried out to<br />
requirements in Civil engineering specification for the water industry 6 th<br />
Edition Section 7<br />
670AR<br />
EXCAVATION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT / FOOTWAY<br />
SURFACES<br />
1. Where directed, existing asphalt, macadam, concrete, flagged or paved<br />
/footway surfaces shall be broken up to the specified depth.<br />
2. Where directed, stone, concrete flags, paviors etc shall be carefully taken up<br />
and set aside for reuse. Any sound materials damaged in the foregoing<br />
operation shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.<br />
All surplus material shall be excavated and removed to an approved tip / recycling<br />
area provided by the Contractor. The Contractor may be instructed to deposit<br />
excavated material in areas of fill as directed by the <strong>Council</strong>.<br />
17
Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures (Cont.)<br />
Clause<br />
(etc)<br />
770AR<br />
No<br />
Title and written text<br />
SURFACE CONDITION<br />
1. The contractor shall thoroughly clean the existing or prepared surface of all<br />
loose materials or foreign matter prior to laying macadam or asphalt, to the<br />
satisfaction of the Project Manager.<br />
2. If the Project Manager considers the surface too damp for laying the Contractor<br />
shall dry the surface by the application of limestone dust or hydrated lime to<br />
absorb any surface water and sweeping the whole surface to remove all traces<br />
of the material. No laying of bituminous material shall take place until the<br />
surface is dry to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.<br />
771AR<br />
SURFACING REINSTATEMENTS<br />
1. All areas of excavated bitumen and asphalt surfacing, removed to allow<br />
inspection and testing works to be undertaken, shall be reinstated<br />
permanently using the original construction materials. Associated cutting<br />
back and joint sealing will also be required. All materials shall be laid by<br />
hand.<br />
2. Sides of all excavations in bitumen or asphalt surfacing shall be broken out<br />
so as to provide a cut-out with straight vertical sides.<br />
3. Joint edges shall be formed by diamond saw cutting or cold milling in<br />
accordance with Clause 709 and materials removed to the required depth.<br />
The vertical faces of wearing course joints shall be painted with grade 160 /<br />
220 pen bitumen or a cold applied thixotrophic bitumen.<br />
4. All loose material shall be removed from the Works to an approved licensed<br />
tip/ recycling area.<br />
5. Replacement material shall match the existing removed materials.<br />
6. A bitumen emulsion tack coat shall be sprayed at the rate specified in<br />
Appendix 7/4 to any underlying exposed bituminous layer.<br />
All construction layers shall be laid and compacted such that on completion each<br />
layer shall be at the same level as the adjacent course within the tolerances indicated<br />
in Table 7/1.<br />
18
Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures (Cont.)<br />
Clause No<br />
Title and written text<br />
772AR<br />
CONCRETE REINSTATEMENTS<br />
1. Concrete reinstatements shall be carried out using proprietary repair mortar.<br />
2. Proprietary repair materials and systems shall have a British Board of Agrément<br />
Roads and Bridges Certificate registered with the Overseeing Organisation and<br />
Transport for the Regions/Highway’s Agency.<br />
Clause No<br />
Title and written text<br />
3070AR<br />
C20 LANDSCAPING AND ECOLOGY<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Scope: Before starting deconstruction/ demolition work, examine available<br />
information, and<br />
carry out a survey of:<br />
- the structure or structures to be deconstructed/ demolished,<br />
- the site on which the structure or structures stand, and<br />
- the surrounding area.<br />
Check Type, location and condition of adjoining Chapel that might be adversely<br />
affected by removal of the structures, by vibration and/ or dust generated<br />
during deconstruction/ demolition.<br />
Identity and location of services above and below ground, including those<br />
required for the Contractor's use, and arrangements for their disconnection<br />
and removal.<br />
Form and location of materials identified for reuse or recycling, and proposed<br />
methods for removal and temporary storage.<br />
Propose programme of work, including sequence and methods of<br />
deconstruction/ demolition.<br />
Arrangements for protection of personnel and the general public, including<br />
exclusion of<br />
unauthorized persons.<br />
Arrangements for control of site transport and traffic.<br />
120 EXTENT OF DECONSTRUCTION/ DEMOLITION<br />
o<br />
General: Subject to retention requirements specified elsewhere, deconstruct/<br />
demolish<br />
19
structures down to subbase<br />
130 GROUNDWORKS<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Old foundations, slabs and the like: Break out in locations and to the extents<br />
stated.<br />
Contaminated material: Remove, and carry out remediation required by the<br />
Enforcing<br />
Authority.<br />
140 BENCH MARKS<br />
o<br />
Unrecorded bench marks and other survey information: Give notice when found.<br />
Do not<br />
remove marks or destroy the fabric on which they are found.<br />
120 STRIPPING TOPSOIL<br />
• General: Before beginning general excavation or filling, strip topsoil from areas<br />
where there<br />
drawings.<br />
will be regrading, buildings, pavings/ roads and other areas shown on<br />
• Depth:<br />
- Remove to an average depth of 250mm<br />
- Give notice where the depth of topsoil is difficult to determine.<br />
• Handling: Handle topsoil for reuse or sale in accordance with clause 155<br />
• Around trees: Do not remove topsoil from below the spread of trees to be<br />
retained.<br />
121 TREATING TOPSOIL<br />
• Treatment: Apply a suitable translocated non residual herbicide.<br />
• Timing: Not less than two weeks before excavating topsoil.<br />
125 HANDLING TOPSOIL<br />
• Standard: To BS 3882.<br />
• Aggressive weeds:<br />
- Species: Included in the Weeds Act, section 2 or the Wildlife and<br />
Countryside Act,<br />
Schedule 9, part II.<br />
- Give notice: Obtain instructions before moving topsoil.<br />
20
• Contamination: Do not mix topsoil with:<br />
- Subsoil, stone, hardcore, rubbish or material from demolition work.<br />
- Other soil or material containing aggressive weeds, sharps, plastics<br />
and non soil forming<br />
materials and notifiable animal or plant diseases.<br />
- Oil, fuel, cement or other substances harmful to plant growth.<br />
- Other classifications of topsoil.<br />
• Multiple handling: Keep to a minimum. Use topsoil immediately after stripping.<br />
168 GENERAL SITE CLEARANCE<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
General: Clear site of all rubbish, debris and vegetation. Do not compact topsoil,<br />
leaving site ready for planting works<br />
Treatment: translocated herbicide<br />
Works to be undertaken during reasonable dry weather to avoid compaction<br />
Taken off site or suitable material to be used as fill material in the Chapel Garden<br />
Keep all roads clean and tidy during the works<br />
174 POTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION<br />
Protect all Vegetation and Trees to be retained with appropriate fencing during<br />
the works as per BS 5837: 2005 Trees in relation to Construction<br />
175 TREE ROOT BARRIERS (Reroot 2000 – 1mm thick by 2000mm deep)<br />
o Root barrier: Reroot 2000 linear root barrier or equal and approved<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Product reference: RER 210 - Reroot 2000 – 1mm thick by 2000mm deep, 100lm<br />
rolls<br />
Supplier: Greenleaf Ireland, Ivy House, 24a Church Road, L'<strong>Derry</strong> BT47 3QQ<br />
Tel: +44 (0)28 7134 5620<br />
Location: to be fitted tightly to the base of retaining walls to protect base of<br />
retaining walls and concrete foundations – see Engineers details<br />
Installation: as per manufacturer’s instructions. Join all ends by overlapping and<br />
tape both sides with Greenleaf Reroot jointing tape where required<br />
Backfill material: Good quality topsoil 700-900mm deep, on 400-600mm<br />
subsoil, left in preparation for the landscape Contractor to plant Trees and<br />
Shrubs<br />
Backfilling: Lay and compact lightly in layers not more that 300mm thick.<br />
176 TREE ROOT BARRIERS (Reroot 2000 – 2mm thick by 1500mm deep)<br />
o Root barrier: Reroot 2000 linear root barrier or equal and approved<br />
o Product reference: RER 220 - Reroot 2000 – 2mm thick by 1500mm deep, 100m<br />
rolls<br />
o Supplier: Greenleaf Ireland, as above<br />
21
o Location: to back of headstone foundations to protect foundations and graves –<br />
see Engineers details<br />
o Installation as above<br />
o Backfill material: as above<br />
o Backfilling: as above.<br />
DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS<br />
410 TOPSOIL:<br />
Sufficient of the excavated preserved topsoil to carry out subsequent<br />
topsoiling operations to be stockpiled in temporary spoil heaps not higher than<br />
2.5m.<br />
430 SURPLUS EXCAVATED TOPSOIL:<br />
To be retained on site or removed off site only after approval has been given<br />
by the C.A.<br />
440 SURPLUS SUBSOIL:<br />
To be retained on site or removed off site only after approval has been given<br />
by the C.A.<br />
FILLING<br />
510 HAZARDOUS, AGGRESSIVE OR UNSTABLE MATERIALS:<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Do not import or use fill materials which would, either in themselves or in<br />
combination with other materials or ground water, give rise to a health hazard,<br />
damage to building structures or instability in the filling.<br />
Soluble sulphate content (SO3) of materials for filling under concrete slabs or<br />
within 1 m of substructures must not exceed 1g/litre when tested to BS<br />
1377:Part 3, clause 5 using a 2:1 water-soil extract. Submit test reports from a<br />
UKAS/NAMAS accredited laboratory demonstrating compliance of the<br />
proposed material(s).<br />
530 PLACING FILL GENERALLY:<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Ensure that excavations and areas to be filled are free from loose soil, rubbish<br />
and standing water.<br />
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice. Do not place fill on<br />
frozen surfaces.<br />
Take all necessary precautions to avoid overloading of adjacent structures and<br />
to ensure stability. Place and compact fill against structures, membranes or<br />
buried services in a sequence and manner, which will ensure stability and<br />
avoid damage.<br />
22
o<br />
o<br />
Plant employed for transporting, laying and compacting must be suited to the<br />
type of material.<br />
Lay differing materials separately so that only one type of material occurs in<br />
each layer.<br />
610 COMPACTED LANDSCAPE FILLING:<br />
o Materials arising from the excavations or imported, capable of compaction by<br />
light earthmoving plant, and excluding the following:<br />
o - Material from marshes or bogs<br />
o - Peat, logs, stumps, slurry, mud and perishable material<br />
o - Material susceptible to spontaneous combustion<br />
o - Material in a frozen condition<br />
o - Clay of liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index exceeding 55<br />
o - Material with excessive moisture content<br />
o - Material likely to erode or decay and cause voids<br />
o - Unacceptable material class U2 as defined in clause 601 of the Highways<br />
Agency 'Specification for highway works'.<br />
o Lay in layers not more than 200 mm thick and lights compact each layer with the<br />
earthmoving plant to produce a stable soil structure.<br />
626 COMPACTED GENERAL FILLING:<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Materials arising from the excavations or imported: as agreed with CA.<br />
If both suitable and unsuitable material is excavated, select and keep separate<br />
sufficient suitable material. If there is insufficient suitable excavated material<br />
provide CA with details (and quantities) of proposed imported material.<br />
Spread and level material in layers and as soon as possible thereafter compact<br />
each layer using plant and methods suitable to the type of material.<br />
Well in advance of starting work submit details of proposed:<br />
Materials to be used<br />
ype of plant<br />
Maximum depth of each compacted layer<br />
Minimum number of passes per layer. Obtain instructions before proceeding.<br />
730 IMPORTED LAKELAND BROWN GRAVEL (75MM DEEP) TO GRAVEL<br />
AREAS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS IN <strong>SECTION</strong>S 1 AND 2<br />
o Material: Lakeland Brown gravel 20-35mm diameter or similar supplied by:<br />
Norman Emmerson and Sons Ltd<br />
1 Annaloist Road<br />
Lurgan, Co. Armagh BT66 6NJ<br />
23
Tel: 028 38344440. Contact: Michael Blake<br />
o Sample: A sample load of 1M3 is to be provided for inspection prior to any<br />
Lakeland Brown gravel being used. This sample is to remain until all gravel<br />
operations have been completed.<br />
o Filling: All Lakeland Brown gravel filling is to be carefully positioned and laid<br />
smoothly to avoid damage to adjacent surfaces. The Lakeland Brown gravel filling<br />
required (75mm deep minimum) must be checked prior to completion. Topping may<br />
be required due to settlement.<br />
o Base: Gravel to be laid on top of black polythene builders liner, on 50mm deep<br />
sand on 350mm deep good quality topsoil.<br />
Permissible deviations on surface level +/-5mm.<br />
Borderline Edging, 3mm thick Q10/120 between Gravel areas as separator,<br />
Borderline Edging, 5mm thick Q10/110 as gravel edge or Superedge plastic<br />
edging Q10/130 to Oak leaf shape as shown on the drawing<br />
740 IMPORTED BLUE GREY SLATE MULCH (75MM DEEP) TO BOULDER<br />
AND GRAVEL PLANTING AREAS IN <strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />
Material: Blue Grey Slate Mulch or similar supplied by :<br />
Norman Emmerson and Sons Ltd<br />
1 Annaloist Road<br />
Lurgan, Co. Armagh BT66 6NJ<br />
Tel: 028 38344440. Contact: Michael Blake<br />
- Sample: A sample load of 1M3 is to be provided for inspection prior to any<br />
Blue Grey Slate Mulch being used. This sample is to remain until all gravel<br />
operations have been completed.<br />
- Filling: All Blue Grey Slate Mulch filling is to be carefully positioned and laid<br />
smoothly to avoid damage to adjacent surfaces. The Blue Grey Slate Mulch<br />
filling<br />
required (75mm deep minimum) must be checked prior to completion. Topping<br />
may be required due to settlement.<br />
- Base: Mulch to be laid on a black builders polythene liner on a 50mm deep<br />
layer of sand on 350mm minimum depth of good quality topsoil<br />
Permissible deviations on surface level +/-5mm.<br />
- Plastic Edging, Q10/130 between Gravel areas as separator or Borderline<br />
Edging, 5mm thick Q10/110 as gravel edge to grassed area as shown on the<br />
drawing<br />
24
750 IMPORTED BOULDERS (DONEGAL GREY/BROWN GRANITE) IN<br />
<strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />
o To be provided in Gravel Area 1 at the main Entrance into the Cemetery<br />
o Material: Donegal Grey/Brown granite rectangular to round in shape, originally<br />
sourced from McMonagle Stone in Mountcharles, Co. Donegal Tel: 00353-<br />
749735061 but available from Norman Emmerson, or similar.<br />
- Sample: A sample load of 1M3 of boulders is to be provided for<br />
inspection prior to any boulders being used. This sample is to remain until all<br />
gravel and boulder operations have been completed.<br />
- Filling: All boulders are to be carefully positioned in groups of 3-<br />
5Number on gravel areas, or stacked on top of one another to form the rockery<br />
feature, and laid smoothly to avoid damage to adjacent surfaces.<br />
- Base: Boulders to be set on top of the Gravel Areas<br />
- Boulders to be nominal size 350-500mm diameter, random sizes.<br />
- Boulders to be supplied in 20/22 tonne loads.<br />
Allow for all onsite lifting machinery and storage, protection etc. and site<br />
supervision<br />
F20 NATURAL STONE RUBBLE WALLING/PILLARS – <strong>SECTION</strong>S 1 AND 2<br />
All work in this section must be carried out by an approved Stone Mason<br />
TYPES OF WALLING/PILLARS<br />
110 PILLAR TYPE 1<br />
COURSED GLENTOWN STONE PILLAR TO INTERMEDIATE BETWEEN 1450<br />
AND 1100mm HIGH ESTATE RAILINGS<br />
PILLAR TYPE 1<br />
o Drawing References: 83473 – 05<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Height: 2400mm overall<br />
Pillars<br />
- Stone: Glentown – Blue/Black Slate, angular and rectangular in shape<br />
- Colour: Black and variants of black, blue and brown ochres.<br />
- Supplier: McMonagle Stone, Mountcharles, Co. Donegal or other equal and<br />
approved.<br />
- Size of Stone: Random sizes150 - 300 mm deep, 150 - 300mm long x 100 -<br />
150 mm wide. Quality: Seasoned and free from vents, cracks, fissures or<br />
other defects deleterious to strength, durability or appearance.<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Stone to be split and shaped as required to form regular coursed stonework,<br />
with C40 concrete mix infill as stonework is built up<br />
Coping: Sandstone<br />
top of stone pillar flat and level to receive coping stone and ornamental Acorn shaped<br />
25
sandstone Finial<br />
o Acorn shaped sandstone finial as supplied by McMonagle stone or similar fixed<br />
onto coping with 20mm thick solid steel rod, 600mm long min; set in recessed<br />
mould in coping with epoxy resin<br />
o Sandstone pillar coping stone to be 800 x 800 x 100mm natural sandstone<br />
coping dowelled (4nr.) to pillars with 10mm dia x 400mm long m.s. bar recessed<br />
75mm in coping stone and fixed with an epoxy resin.<br />
o Mortar: As section Z21.<br />
- Mix: 1:2:9: cement: lime: sand.<br />
- Sand: N/a.<br />
o<br />
Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />
120 PILLAR TYPE 2<br />
COURSED GLENTOWN STONE PILLAR TO 1100MM HIGH ESTATE RAILINGS<br />
o PILLAR TYPE 2<br />
o Drawing References: 83473 – 05<br />
o Height 2060mm overall<br />
o Build up - as for Pillar Type 1<br />
o Coping and Acorn top - as for Pillar Type 1<br />
o Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />
130 PILLAR TYPE 3<br />
COURSED GLENTOWN STONE PILLAR TO M.S OAK LEAF GATES TO<br />
CHAPEL GARDENS<br />
o PILLAR TYPE 3<br />
o Drawing References: 83473 – 05<br />
o Height 2770mm overall<br />
o Pillar to be build around Gate post - 2620 x 200 x 200 x 8mm thick rhs post with<br />
welded metal bracket/cleats to gates<br />
o Build up - as for Pillar Type 1<br />
o Coping and Acorn top- as for Pillar Type 1<br />
o Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />
140 STONE PLINTH FOR THE HORSE SCULPTURE RELOCATION<br />
o Drawing References: 83473 – 05<br />
o Plinth Height 800mm<br />
o Stone: Glentown – Blue/Black Slate, angular and rectangular in shape<br />
- Colour: Black and variants of black, blue and brown ochres.<br />
- Supplier: McMonagle Stone, Mountcharles, Co. Donegal or other equal and<br />
26
approved.<br />
o Size of Stone: Random sizes150 - 300 mm deep, 150 - 300mm long x 100 -150<br />
mm wide. Stone to be split and shaped as required to form regular coursed<br />
stonework, with C40 concrete mix infill as stonework is built up<br />
- Quality: Seasoned and free from vents, cracks, fissures or other defects<br />
deleterious to strength, durability or appearance.<br />
o Coping: Relocated Horse statue with trowelled mortar edging<br />
o fixed with an epoxy resin.<br />
o Mortar: As section Z21.<br />
- Mix: 1:2:9: cement: lime: sand.<br />
- Sand: N/a.<br />
o<br />
Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />
Q10 KERBS/ EDGINGS/ CHANNELS/ PAVING ACCESSORIES<br />
TYPES OF KERBS/ EDGINGS AND CHANNELS<br />
100 PRECAST CONCRETE COUNTRY KERBS LAID FLUSH FOR VEHICULAR<br />
OVERIDE – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
• Manufacturer: Tobermore Concrete Products Ltd, 2 Lisnamuck Road,<br />
Tobermore, County L'<strong>Derry</strong><br />
BT45 5QF. Tel: 028 7964 2411, Fax: 028 7964 4145. Email:<br />
sales@tobermore.co.uk<br />
Web: www.tobermore.co.uk<br />
• Product reference: Country Kerbs<br />
• Type: 250 x 125 x 915mm Country Kerb<br />
• Finish/ colour: Standard Aggregate Textured<br />
o<br />
Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />
Drawing Nr 83473-05<br />
105 PRECAST CONCRETE COUNTRY KERBS LAID 125mm SHOW – <strong>SECTION</strong><br />
2<br />
• Manufacturer: Tobermore Concrete Products Ltd, 2 Lisnamuck Road,<br />
Tobermore, County L'<strong>Derry</strong><br />
BT45 5QF. Tel: 028 7964 2411, Fax: 028 7964 4145. Email:<br />
sales@tobermore.co.uk<br />
27
Web: www.tobermore.co.uk<br />
• Product reference: Country Kerbs<br />
• Type: 250 x 125 x 915mm Country Kerb<br />
• Finish/ colour: Standard Aggregate Textured<br />
o<br />
Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />
Drawing Nr 83473-05<br />
110 5mm STEEL EDGING<br />
o Borderline steel lawn edging as supplied by Greenleaf Ireland (Ivy House, 24a<br />
Church Road, Londonderry, BT47 3QQ, T: +44 (0)28 7134 56820,<br />
E: sales@greenleafireland.com) or similar approved. Fitted in accordance with<br />
manufacturer’s instructions.<br />
o Product Reference: BL 150 JS; Borderline Steel lawn edging, 2m long units,<br />
150mm deep x<br />
5mm thick, including 3 Nr staked per length, Colour brown polyester powder<br />
coated.<br />
o Excavations and builders work as shown on the detail Drawing Nr 83473-05<br />
and fitted as per manufacturer’s recommendations<br />
120 5mm STEEL EDGING TREE RINGS<br />
o Borderline steel edging as supplied by Greenleaf Ireland (Address as previously<br />
stated, Tel: 028 7134 5620) or similar approved.<br />
Product Reference: Special order, Borderline steel edging, 150mm deep x 5mm<br />
thick, 1800mm Diameter, including 8 Nr stakes per ring, colour brown polyester<br />
powder coated fitted as per manufacturer’s recommendations<br />
130 SUPEREDGE PLASTIC EDGING<br />
o Plastic edging as supplied by Greenleaf Ireland (Address as previously stated,<br />
Tel: 028 7134 5620) or similar approved.<br />
o Product Reference: SELE; 30m rolls, 150mm Deep, Colour Black; 3mm thick<br />
To include 40Nr Stakes per 30m roll and 4Nr H-clips per roll fitted as per<br />
manufacturer’s recommendations<br />
Q20<br />
GRANULAR SUB-BASES TO ROADS/PAVINGS<br />
To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.<br />
130 HERBICIDE:<br />
Apply an approved type of herbicide in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
recommendations to subgrade of roads, footpaths and courtyards.<br />
28
140 EXCAVATION OF SUBGRADES<br />
• Final excavation to formation/ sub-formation level: Carry out immediately<br />
before compaction of subgrade.<br />
• Soft spots and voids: Give notice.<br />
• Wet conditions: Do not excavate or compact when the subgrade may be<br />
damaged or destabilized.<br />
145 PREPARATION AND COMPACTION OF SUBGRADES<br />
• Timing: Immediately before placing sub-base.<br />
• Compaction: Thoroughly, by roller or other suitable means, adequate to resist<br />
subsidence or deformation of the subgrade during construction and of the<br />
completed roads/ pavings when in use. Take particular care to compact fully at<br />
intrusions, perimeters and where local excavation and backfilling has taken<br />
place.<br />
150 SUBGRADE FOR VEHICULAR AREAS:<br />
Sub-base to be placed within 12 hours of formation level being exposed and<br />
compacted. Immediately before placing sub-base prepare and compact<br />
subgrade in accordance with Highways Agency Specification for highway works,<br />
clauses 616 and 617.<br />
160 SUBGRADE FOR PEDESTRIAN AREAS:<br />
Sub-base to be placed within 12 hours of formation level being exposed and<br />
compacted. Immediately before placing sub-base thoroughly compact subgrade<br />
with a roller weighing not less than 2.5 tonnes or equivalent other plant.<br />
170 GEOTEXTILE FILTER:<br />
• Lay an approved type in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to<br />
compacted subgrade of vehicular areas.<br />
• Do not allow construction or other vehicles over the geotextile until it is fully<br />
covered by the granular sub-base.<br />
Q23<br />
RESIN BOUND GRAVEL/ VEHICULAR / PEDESTRIAN<br />
To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.<br />
29
TYPES OF SURFACING<br />
200 RESIN BOUND GRAVEL FOR PEDESTRIAN AREAS (NEW FOOTPATHS)<br />
– <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
o<br />
Subgrade improvement layer (Capping): as section Q20 if required,<br />
- Compacted thickness: 0-600 mm<br />
o Granular sub-base: as section Q20, 110 mm Crusher run stone, lay geotextile<br />
Terram 1000 below as Q20.<br />
- Compacted thickness: 150 mm<br />
o Base course: 20 mmDBM B/C toBS 4987/ 6.5 - Thickness: 50 mm<br />
o Wearing course: 10mm aggregate bitmac<br />
- Binder: Cold bitumen emulsion to BS 434-1, class K1 60.<br />
- Chippings: To BS EN 13043, nominal size 6 mm.<br />
clean chippings.<br />
- Application: Uniformly spray binder at a rate of 2 L/m². Cover with<br />
compact.<br />
Provide 100-105% shoulder to shoulder coverage to BS 598-108 and<br />
Thickness: 20 mm<br />
o Surface treatment: 18 mm deep layer of resin bound gravel ‘Sure Set 6mm<br />
‘Barley Beach’, where shown on the drawing,<br />
o Product Ref: L1403/10, as supplied by SureSet UK Ltd, 32 Deverill Road, Trading<br />
Estate, Sutton Veny, Warminster, England BA12 7BZ, Tel 01985 841180. A<br />
sample of resin bound gravel is to be provided prior to commencing this item, +<br />
provision of warranty of min 10years<br />
o Compaction to all layers: By heavy roller or other appropriate means, adequate to<br />
resist<br />
subsidence or deformation of the completed roads/ pavings when in use. Do<br />
not crush<br />
chippings.<br />
o Completion: Before trafficking, remove excess chippings<br />
o Laid in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and to the detail<br />
shown on Drawing Nr 83473 - 05, and to include for all related builders work in<br />
association, and all materials.<br />
o To be laid to long falls and cross falls as shown on Drawing Nr 83473-03, allow<br />
for all soft spots and compacted build up on fill materal under new paving areas.<br />
o Pathways to be suitable for a ride on grass cutting machine laid flush with turfed<br />
lawns<br />
30
210 RESIN BOUND GRAVEL (FOR NEW VEHICULAR SURFACE) – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
o Subgrade improvement layer (Capping): as section Q20 clause 200 if required,<br />
- Compacted thickness: 0-600 mm<br />
o Granular sub-base: as section Q20, 110 mm Crusher run stone, lay geotextile<br />
o Terram 1000 below as Q20<br />
o Compacted thickness: 225 mm<br />
o Granular road-base: as section Q20, 65 mm Crusher run stone,Thickness: 190<br />
mm<br />
o Base course: 25 mmDBM B/C toBS 4987/ 6.5,Thickness: 60mm<br />
o Wearing course: 10 mm aggregate bitmac<br />
- Binder: Cold bitumen emulsion to BS 434-1, class K1 60.<br />
- Chippings: To BS EN 13043, nominal size 10 mm.<br />
- Application: Uniformly spray binder at a rate of 2 L/m². Cover with<br />
clean chippings.<br />
- Provide 100-105% shoulder to shoulder coverage to BS 598-108 and<br />
compact.<br />
- Thickness: 30 mm<br />
o Surface treatment: 18 mm deep layer of resin bound gravel ‘Sure Set 6mm<br />
‘Barley Beach’, where shown on the Drawing Nr 83473 - 05, as supplied by<br />
SureSet UK Ltd, 32 Deverill Road, Trading Estate, Sutton Veny, Warminster,<br />
England BA12 7BZ, Tel 01985 841180. A sample of resin bound gravel is to be<br />
provided prior to commencing this item, + provision of warranty of min 10years<br />
o Compaction to all layers: By heavy roller or other appropriate means, adequate to<br />
resist<br />
- subsidence or deformation of the completed roads/ pavings when in<br />
use. Do not crush<br />
- chippings.<br />
o Completion: Before trafficking, remove excess chippings. Laid to falls as agreed<br />
on site.<br />
230 LAYING GENERALLY<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Finished surfaces:<br />
Lines and levels: To prevent ponding.<br />
Overall texture: Even.<br />
State at completion: Clean.<br />
240 COLD WEATHER WORKING<br />
• Frozen materials: Do not use.<br />
• Freezing conditions: Do not lay pavings.<br />
• Cold bituminous surface dressings: Do not apply when ambient temperature is<br />
31
elow 10°C.<br />
250 DRAINAGE FALLS<br />
• Sealed surfaces:<br />
- Falls and cross falls (minimum): 1:40<br />
- Camber (minimum): 1:50<br />
• Unsealed surfaces (minimum): 1:30<br />
260 LAYING GRANULAR SURFACES IN VEHICULAR AREAS<br />
• Permissible deviation from required levels, falls and cambers (maximum):<br />
±20mm.<br />
• General: Spread and level in 150 mm maximum layers. As soon as possible<br />
compact each<br />
layer.<br />
• Dry weather: Lightly water layers during compaction.<br />
280 LAYING GRANULAR SURFACES IN PEDESTRIAN AREAS<br />
mm.<br />
• Permissible deviation from required levels, falls and cambers (maximum): ±12<br />
• General: Spread and level in 100 mm maximum layers. As soon as possible,<br />
compact<br />
each layer.<br />
• Dry weather: Lightly water layers during compaction.<br />
290 PROTECTION FROM TRAFFIC AND PLANT<br />
• Paved areas: Restrict access to prevent damage.<br />
Q28<br />
TOPSOIL AND GROWING MEDIA<br />
200 GRADING SUBSOIL<br />
o General: Grade to smooth flowing contours to achieve specified finished levels<br />
o of topsoil to desired levels shown of the drawings to the Chapel Garden –<br />
Section 2.<br />
o Areas of thicker topsoil: Excavate locally.<br />
250 SUBSOIL SURFACE PREPARATION<br />
o<br />
General: Excavate and/ or place fill to required profiles and levels, as shown on<br />
sections shown on drawings to the Chapel Garden – Section 2.<br />
32
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Loosening:<br />
- Light and noncohesive subsoils: When ground conditions are<br />
reasonably<br />
- dry, loosen thoroughly to a depth of 300 mm.<br />
- Stiff clay and cohesive subsoils: When ground conditions are<br />
reasonably dry, loosen thoroughly to a depth of 450 mm.<br />
- Rock and chalk subgrades: Lightly scarify to promote free<br />
drainage.<br />
Stones: Immediately before spreading topsoil, remove stones larger than 75mm<br />
in any dimension.<br />
Other items: Remove any debris and foreign matter.<br />
330 SURPLUS TOPSOIL TO BE RETAINED<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Generally: Spread and level on site:<br />
Locations: to be agreed with C.A.<br />
Protected areas: Do not raise soil level within root spread of trees that are to be<br />
retained.<br />
335 SURPLUS TOPSOIL TO BE REMOVED<br />
o<br />
Generally: Remove from site to a licensed landfill site – if required surplus<br />
topsoil may be deposited elsewhere on site with the Clients permission.<br />
670 CONTAMINATION<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Protected areas: Do not raise soil level within root spread of trees that are to be<br />
retained.<br />
General: Do not use topsoil contaminated with subsoil, rubbish or other<br />
materials that are:<br />
- Corrosive, explosive or flammable.<br />
Hazardous to human or animal life.<br />
- Detrimental to healthy plant growth- contain noxious weeds e.g. Japanese<br />
Knotweed<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Subsoil: In areas to receive topsoil, do not use subsoil contaminated with the<br />
above materials.<br />
Give notice: If any evidence or symptoms of soil contamination are discovered<br />
on the site, or in topsoil to be imported.<br />
680 TOPSOIL STORAGE HEAPS<br />
33
o Location: to be agreed with C.A.<br />
o Height (maximum): 1 m.<br />
o Width (maximum): 5 m.<br />
o Protection:<br />
- Do not place any other material on top of storage heaps.<br />
- Do not allow construction plant to pass over storage heaps.<br />
- Prevent compaction and contamination, by fencing and covering as<br />
- appropriate.<br />
-<br />
690 HANDLING TOPSOIL<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Aggressive weeds: Give notice and obtain instructions before moving topsoil.<br />
Plant: Select and use plant to minimize disturbance, trafficking and compaction.<br />
Contamination: Do not mix topsoil with: Subsoil, stone, hardcore, rubbish or<br />
material from demolition work.<br />
Other grades of topsoil.<br />
Multiple handling: Keep to a minimum. Use topsoil immediately after stripping.<br />
Wet conditions: Handle topsoil in the driest condition possible. Do not handle<br />
during or after heavy rainfall or when it is wetter than the plastic limit less 3%,<br />
to BS 1377-2.<br />
700 SPREADING TOPSOIL<br />
Layers: Depth (maximum): 150 mm.<br />
o Gently firm each layer before spreading the next.<br />
o Depths after firming and settlement (minimum)<br />
- grass areas: 150mm; planted areas: 350mm.<br />
o<br />
Crumb structure: Do not compact topsoil. Preserve a friable texture of separate<br />
visible crumbs wherever possible.<br />
910 FINISHED LEVELS OF TOPSOIL AFTER SETTLEMENT<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Above adjoining paving or kerbs: 30 mm.<br />
Below dpc of adjoining buildings: Not less than 150 mm.<br />
Shrub areas: Higher than adjoining grass areas by 30 mm.<br />
Within root spread of existing trees: Unchanged.<br />
Adjoining soil areas: Marry in where levels permit.<br />
Thickness of turf or mulch: Included.<br />
34
Q30<br />
SEEDING/TURFING<br />
The Contractor should note that all grassing and Turfing Works are to be carried<br />
out by an approved Landscape sub-Contractor who is a member of the<br />
Association of Landscape Contractors Ireland (ALCI) and aRegistered member of<br />
Constructionline<br />
GENERAL INFORMATION/REQUIREMENTS<br />
115 SEEDED AND TURFED AREAS<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Growth and development: Healthy, vigorous grass sward, free from the visible<br />
effects of pests, weeds and disease.<br />
Appearance: A closely knit, continuous ground cover of even density, height<br />
and colour.<br />
120 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS<br />
o<br />
General: Carry out the work while soil and weather conditions are suitable.<br />
145 WATERING<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Quantity: Wet full depth of topsoil.<br />
Application: Even and without displacing seed, seedlings or soil.<br />
Frequency: As necessary to ensure the establishment and continued thriving of<br />
all seeding/turfing, particularly during periods of exceptionally dry weather.<br />
150 WATER RESTRICTIONS<br />
o<br />
Timing: If water supply is or is likely to be restricted by emergency legislation<br />
do not carry out seeding/turfing until instructed. If seeding/ turfing has been<br />
carried out, obtain instructions on watering.<br />
160 NOTICE<br />
o<br />
Give notice before:<br />
- Setting out.<br />
- Applying herbicide.<br />
35
- Applying fertilizer.<br />
- Preparing seed bed.<br />
- Seeding or turfing.<br />
- Visiting site during maintenance period.<br />
o<br />
Period of notice: 3 working days.<br />
PREPARATION<br />
210 HERBICIDE<br />
o<br />
Operations: apply a suitable translocated herbicide to perennial weeds and<br />
allow a sufficient<br />
period of time to elapse for these weeds to die as recommended by the<br />
Manufacture before commencing cultivation<br />
250 CULTIVATION<br />
o Compacted topsoil: Break up to full depth.<br />
o Soil ameliorant/ Conditioner/ Fertilizer: Fully incorporate into topsoil to 150mm<br />
deep.<br />
o Tilth: Reduce top 100 mm of topsoil to a tilth suitable for blade grading, particle<br />
size 10 mm (maximum).<br />
o Material brought to the surface: Remove stones and clay balls larger than 50<br />
mm in any dimension, roots, tufts of grass, rubbish and debris.<br />
260 GRADING<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Topsoil condition: Reasonably dry and workable.<br />
Contours: Smooth and flowing, with falls for adequate drainage. Remove minor<br />
hollows and ridges.<br />
Finished levels after settlement: 25 mm above adjoining paving, kerbs, manholes or<br />
garden edging<br />
Blade grading: May be used to adjust topsoil levels provided depth of topsoil is<br />
nowhere less than 150mm .<br />
Give notice: If required levels cannot be achieved by movement of existing soil.<br />
275 FERTILIZER FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />
36
o<br />
Type: 'Floranid Master' slow release fertliiser (16:5:10), (or other equal and<br />
approved) as supplied by U.A.P, The Crossways, Alconbury Hill, Alconbury<br />
Weston, Hunting PE28 4JH; Tel (08456) 073322; Contact: Craig Brisley.<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Application: Before final cultivation and three to five days before seeding/turfing.<br />
Coverage: Spread evenly at 40g/m2.<br />
280 FINAL CULTIVATION<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Timing: After grading and fertilizing.<br />
Seed bed: Reduce to fine, firm tilth with good crumb structure.<br />
- Depth: 25 mm.<br />
- Surface preparation: Rake to a true, even surface, friable and lightly firmed<br />
but not over compacted.<br />
- Remove surface stones/earth clods exceeding:<br />
General areas: 50mm – (to the Cemetery extension works – Section 1)<br />
Fine lawn areas: 25 mm – (to the Chapel Garden – Section 2)<br />
o<br />
Adjacent levels: Extend cultivation into existing adjacent grassed areas<br />
sufficient to ensure full marrying in of levels.<br />
SEEDING<br />
310 GRASS SEED FOR GENERAL GRASS AREAS – MAIN CEMETERY –<br />
<strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />
o<br />
Mixture: Seed mixture shall be as follows:<br />
40% 'Premo' perennial ryegrass<br />
30% 'Royal' perennial ryegrass<br />
25% 'Moncorde' creeping red fescue<br />
5% 'Highland' browntop<br />
Seed to be supplied from an approved source.<br />
Rate of application: 40g/m2.<br />
- See Drawing Nrs 83473 – 01 and 02<br />
37
319 QUALITY OF SEED FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Freshness: Produced for the current growing season.<br />
Certification: Blue label certified varieties to EC purity and germination<br />
regulations. When requested, submit an Official Seed Testing Station<br />
certificate of germination, purity and composition.<br />
o<br />
Samples of mixtures: Submit when requested.<br />
330 SOWING<br />
o<br />
o<br />
General: Establish good seed contact with the root zone to promote healthy,<br />
consistent growth.<br />
Method: To suit soil type, proposed usage of grassed area, location and<br />
weather conditions during and after sowing.<br />
335 GRASS SOWING SEASON<br />
o<br />
Grass seed generally: beginning of June to end of September.<br />
340 PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE FOR ALL GRASSING AREAS<br />
o<br />
General: Where soil has not been allowed to lie fallow apply a suitable preemergent<br />
herbicide immediately after sowing.<br />
352 EDGES TO SEEDED AREAS<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Location: Planting beds and around newly planted trees.<br />
Timing: After seeded areas are well established.<br />
Edges: Cut to clean straight lines or smooth curves. Soil drawn back to permit<br />
edging.<br />
Arisings: Remove.<br />
TURFING<br />
400 CULTIVATED TURF (TO CHAPEL GARDEN) – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
o See Drawing Nr. 83473 - 03<br />
o Supplier: “Emerald Lawns” or other equal and approved supplier who must be a<br />
Turfgrass<br />
o Growers Association (TGA) member, to TGA quality standards.<br />
o Seed mixture as per Emerald Premium Lawn Turf, free from broad leaved<br />
weeds available from Emerald Lawns, 45 Point Road, Limavady, BT49 0LP, Tel:<br />
38
o<br />
028 7775 0297<br />
Properties of soil used for turf production: high sand content<br />
420 DELIVERY AND STORAGE<br />
o Timing: Lay turf with minimum possible delay after lifting. If delay occurs, lay turf<br />
out on topsoil and keep moist.<br />
o Frosty weather or waterlogged ground: Do not lift turf.<br />
o Delivery: Arrange to avoid need for excessive stacking.<br />
o Stacking height (maximum): 1 m.<br />
o Dried out or deteriorated turf: Do not use.<br />
430 TURFING GENERALLY TO CHAPEL GARDEN – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Time of year: in appropriate weather conditions.<br />
Timing of laying:<br />
Spring and summer: within 18 hours of delivery.<br />
Autumn and winter: within 24 hours of delivery.<br />
Weather conditions: Do not lay turf when persistent cold or drying winds are<br />
likely to occur or soil is frost bound, waterlogged or excessively dry.<br />
Working access: Planks laid on previously laid turf. Do not walk on prepared<br />
bed or newly laid turf.<br />
Jointing: Laid with broken joints, well butted up. Do not stretch turf.<br />
Edges: Whole turfs, trimmed to a true line.<br />
Adjusting levels: Remove high spots and fill hollows with fine soil.<br />
Consolidating: Lightly and evenly firm as laying proceeds to ensure full contact<br />
with substrate. Do not use rollers.<br />
Dressing, brushed well in to completely fill all joints.<br />
Watering: Thoroughly water completed turf immediately after laying. Check that<br />
water has penetrated to the soil below.<br />
450 TRIMMING TURF TO CHAPEL GARDEN – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />
o<br />
Newly planted tree pits: Neatly cut away around individual trees.<br />
- Diameter: 800mm to Trees against instant hedge on turfed bank.<br />
- Tree pit surface: Leave soil exposed and apply screened topsoil as detailed<br />
in the Bill of Quantities<br />
- trim turf to paths and beds<br />
CUTTING / MAINTENANCE<br />
530 FIRST CUT OF ALL GRASSED AND TURFED AREAS<br />
o<br />
Timing: When grass is reasonably dry.<br />
39
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Height of initial growth: 50mm for grassed areas and 30mm for turfed areas.<br />
Preparation: clear areas to be cut of all extraneous matter and foreign debris<br />
Debris and litter: Remove.<br />
Stones and earth clods larger than 25 mm in any dimension: Remove<br />
Height of first cut: 25mm.<br />
Mower type: Cylinder.<br />
Arisings: to be removed and boxed at turf areas<br />
531 FIRST CUT OF ALL TURFED AREAS<br />
o Cut with cylindrical hand mower and roller 2 weeks after laying and rolling –<br />
remove<br />
all arisings. Heel back any loose turf.<br />
605 MAINTENANCE<br />
o<br />
Duration: Carry out the following operations from completion of seeding/ turfing<br />
for an initial period of 1 month to achieve establishment (Practical Completion)<br />
and then maintain for a 12 month period of maintenance (running concurrently<br />
with Defects Liability Period).<br />
606 MAINTENANCE OF TURFED AREAS – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2 at the Chapel<br />
o<br />
Duration - After initial cut, undertake to keep turfed areas less than 15 - 30mm in<br />
height with a minimum of 25 Nr further cuts – total 26 cuts during the<br />
1 years establishment maintenance, all clippings to be boxed and removed off<br />
site<br />
607 MAINTENANCE OF GRASSED AREAS – <strong>SECTION</strong> 1 at the Cemetery<br />
o<br />
Duration - After initial cut, undertake to keep grassed areas less than 30-50mm<br />
in height with a minimum of 21 Nr further cuts – total 22 cuts during the<br />
1 years establishment maintenance, all clippings to be left.<br />
610 FAILURES OF SEEDING/TURFING<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Defective materials or workmanship: Areas that have failed to thrive.<br />
Exclusions: Theft or malicious damage.<br />
Method of making good: Recultivation and reseeding/ returfing.<br />
Timing of making good: Submit proposals.<br />
620 MAINTAINING GRASS AREAS<br />
o<br />
Maximum height of growth at any time :30-50mm for general grassed areas to<br />
40
Section 1 in the Cemetery and 15-30mm for the turfed areas at Chapel Garden<br />
o Preparation: Before each cut remove all litter and debris.<br />
o Cutting: As and when necessary to a height of 30-50mm for general areas<br />
o around the Cemetery and 15-30mm for the turfed areas at the Chapel Garden.<br />
o Cylinder mowers ONLY to be used for all areas that have been turfed.<br />
- Arisings: To be removed off site at the Chapel but not for the Cemetery<br />
o Bulb planting areas: Do not cut until bulb foliage has died down.<br />
o Trimming: All edges.<br />
- Arisings: Remove.<br />
o Weed control: All turfed and sown areas are to be maintained substantially free<br />
o of broad leaved weeds, using suitable and approved selective herbicides.<br />
o Method: Application of a suitable selective herbicide.<br />
o Stones brought to the surface: Remove regularly.<br />
o Size: Exceeding 25 mm in any dimension.<br />
o Areas of settlement: Make good.<br />
o Watering: As clause Q30 / 145<br />
680 MAINTENANCE FERTILIZER FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
March application: 15:10:10 Spring turf fertilizer at 35 g/m².<br />
September application: 5:10:10 Autumn turf fertilizer at 50 g/m².<br />
Fertiliser application: all Fertiliser is to be applied using suitable machinery to<br />
insure even distribution. Any scorching of grass is to be made good at<br />
Contractor’s expense.<br />
Q31<br />
EXTERNAL PLANTING AND ACCESSORIES<br />
To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.<br />
GENERAL INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS<br />
110 PLANTING WORKS<br />
All planting works under Clause Q31 External Planting are to be carried as a<br />
Domestic Sub-Contract by an approved specialist Landscape Contractor and<br />
must be a member of (ALCI) The Association of Landscape Contractors<br />
Ireland and a registered member of Constructionline.<br />
GENERAL INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS<br />
112 SITE CLEARANCE GENERALLY<br />
o General: Remove rubbish, concrete, metal, glass, decayed vegetation and<br />
contaminated topsoil.<br />
41
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Stones: Remove those with largest dimension exceeding 75mm.<br />
Contamination: Substances injurious to plant growth including subsoil, rubble,<br />
fuel, and lubricants.<br />
Vegetation: Clear all including briars and hogweed.<br />
Large roots: Grub up and dispose of without undue disturbance of soil and<br />
adjacent areas.<br />
Additional requirements: Apply a suitable nonresidual herbicide to all.<br />
118 SOIL CONDITIONS<br />
o Soil for cultivating and planting: Moist, friable and (excepting aquatic/ marginal<br />
planting) not waterlogged.<br />
o Frozen or snow covered soil: Give notice before planting. Provide additional root<br />
protection. Prevent planting pit sides and bases and backfill materials from<br />
freezing.<br />
120 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS<br />
o General: Carry out the work while soil and weather conditions are suitable. Do<br />
not plant during periods of frost or strong winds.<br />
125 TIMES OF YEAR FOR PLANTING<br />
o All plant material has been specified as container grown or rootballed and can<br />
be planted at any reasonable time of the year subject to suitable climatic<br />
conditions<br />
o Dried bulbs, corms and tubers: September/ October.<br />
o Colchicum (crocus): July/ August.<br />
o Green bulbs: After flowering in spring.<br />
o Wildflower plugs: Late August to mid November or March/ April.<br />
o Aquatic and marginal plants: May/ June or September/ October.<br />
130 MECHANICAL TOOLS<br />
o<br />
Restrictions: Do not use within 100 mm of tree and plant stems.<br />
145 WATERING<br />
o Quantity: Wet full depth of topsoil.<br />
o Application: Even and without damaging or displacing plants or soil.<br />
o Frequency: As necessary to ensure establishment and continued thriving of<br />
planting.<br />
150 WATER RESTRICTIONS<br />
o General: If water supply is or is likely to be restricted by emergency legislation,<br />
do not carry out planting until instructed. If planting has been carried out,<br />
obtain instructions on watering.<br />
160 NOTICE<br />
42
Give notice before:<br />
o Setting out.<br />
o Applying herbicide.<br />
o Applying fertilizer.<br />
o Delivery of plants/ trees.<br />
o Planting shrubs.<br />
o Planting trees into previously dug pits.<br />
o Watering.<br />
o Visiting site during maintenance period.<br />
o Period of notice: 7 days.<br />
200 PLANTS/ TREES - GENERAL<br />
o Condition: Materially undamaged, sturdy, healthy and vigorous.<br />
o Appearance: Of good shape and without elongated shoots.<br />
o Hardiness: Grown in a suitable environment and hardened off.<br />
o Health: Free from pests, diseases, discoloration, weeds and physiological<br />
disorders.<br />
o Budded or grafted plants: Bottom worked.<br />
o Root system and condition: To requirements of the National Plant Specification<br />
and balanced with branch system.<br />
o Species: True to name.<br />
o Origin/ Provenance: UK/Ireland where possible and feasible.<br />
o Origin and Provenance have the meaning given in the National Plant<br />
Specification.<br />
215 PLANTS/ TREES - SPECIFICATION CRITERIA<br />
o Name, forms, dimensions, provenance and other criteria: As scheduled and<br />
defined in the National Plant Specification.<br />
216 PLANTS/ TREES - SPECIFICATION CRITERIA<br />
o Name, forms, dimensions and other criteria: To the relevant part of BS 3936.<br />
217 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES<br />
o They shall comprise: Semi Mature Trees, root balled or container grown,<br />
Overall height 6m+ (except for 1Nr Monkey Puzzle Tree to be 8m+)<br />
o They shall have a well developed and balanced head. All shall have a good<br />
fibrous root system and shall have been regularly transplanted to build up the<br />
main roots with well developed laterals and fibrous root system.<br />
o All trees shall have an upright central leader and shall have min. five main<br />
branches with lateral shoots. Unless they are feathered stock, they shall have a<br />
clear stem to 1.8m to 2.1m A.G.L.<br />
o All Multi-stem Trees shall have a minimum of five branches rising from the stool.<br />
218 PLEACHED TREES<br />
o To be rootballed or container grown, 2.0m high clear stem<br />
o Minimum 4Nr tier layer of horizontal branches with 40 cms between each tier<br />
43
o With well developed and equally balanced growth, complete with bamboo cane<br />
frame to maintain shape.<br />
o Overall height 4.0m plus<br />
219 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES<br />
o To be container grown (bare rooted plant material will not be acceptable by the<br />
client) with 1.8 – 2.5 m clear stemmed, girth at 1.0m a.g.l. 18 - 20cms<br />
o All trees shall be well grown, healthy, well established nursery transplants of<br />
good form, free from defects, furnished with a fibrous root system exactly true to<br />
name as specified and open ground grown unless otherwise detailed.<br />
o Transplants shall have been transplanted or undercut at least once and shall<br />
have a minimum number of brakes in the lower third of the main stem<br />
o To be pruned back where necessary (depending on species) to achieve a<br />
sturdy, well balanced, bushy plant.<br />
o Overall height 4.5 – 5.0m plus<br />
220 STANDARD TREES<br />
o To be container grown standard trees (bare rooted plant material will not be<br />
acceptable by the client) with 1.8m clear stemmed, girth at 1.0m a.g.l. 8-10cms;<br />
overall height 2.75 -3.0m, planted with double stake and timber cross brace<br />
o All trees shall be well grown, healthy, well established nursery transplants of<br />
good form, free from defects, furnished with a fibrous root system exactly true to<br />
name as specified and open ground grown unless otherwise detailed.<br />
o Transplants shall have been transplanted or undercut at least once and shall<br />
have a minimum number of brakes in the lower third of the main stem<br />
221 SPECIMEN ROOTBALLED YEWS<br />
o To be rootballed or container grown if 2.5 -3.0 m in height min 5 times<br />
transplanted with well developed and even branch system all around the plant<br />
o All trees shall be well grown, healthy, well established nursery transplants of<br />
good form, free from defects, furnished with a fibrous root system exactly true to<br />
name as specified and open ground grown unless otherwise detailed.<br />
222 CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS/ TREES<br />
o Growing medium: With adequate nutrients for plants to thrive until permanently<br />
planted.<br />
o Plants: Centred in containers, firmed and well watered.<br />
o Root growth: Substantially filling containers, but not root bound, and in a<br />
condition conducive to successful transplanting.<br />
o Hardiness: Grown in the open for at least two months before being supplied.<br />
o Containers: With holes adequate for drainage when placed on any substrate<br />
commonly used under irrigation systems.<br />
o All whips, conifers, shrubs and climbers shall be well grown, bushy, healthy, well<br />
established nursery transplants of good from hardy, free from defects, furnished<br />
44
o<br />
o<br />
with a fibrous root system exactly true to name as specified and open ground<br />
grown unless otherwise detailed.<br />
Transplants shall have been transplanted or undercut at least once and shall<br />
have a minimum number of brakes in the lower third of the main stem, as<br />
specified in the plant schedule. They shall be pruned back where necessary<br />
(depending on species) to achieve a sturdy, well balanced, bushy plant.<br />
Feathered Whips shall have no clear stem, shall have a well balanced head with<br />
an upright central leader and evenly branched laterals from the nursery soil<br />
mark upwards.<br />
225 BULBS/ CORMS/ TUBERS<br />
o Condition: Firm, entire, not dried out or shrivelled.<br />
o Health: Free from pests, diseases and fungus.<br />
o Handling: Remove from packaging immediately.<br />
o Storage: Permitted only when necessary.<br />
-Location: Well ventilated, dark, covered, rodent proof container, away from<br />
exhausts and fruit.<br />
-Duration: Minimum period.<br />
-Temperature: 18-21°C.<br />
230 BEDDING PLANTS<br />
o CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS/ TREES<br />
o Growing medium: With adequate nutrients for plants to thrive until permanently<br />
planted.<br />
o Plants: Centred in containers, firmed and well watered.<br />
o Root growth: Substantially filling containers, but not root bound, and in a condition<br />
conducive to successful transplanting.<br />
o Hardiness: Grown in the open for at least two months before being supplied.<br />
o Containers: With holes adequate for drainage when placed on any substrate<br />
commonly used under irrigation systems.<br />
245 LABELLING AND INFORMATION<br />
o General: Provide each plant/ tree or group of plants/ trees of a single species or<br />
cultivar with supplier's labelling for delivery to site, showing:<br />
o Full botanical name.<br />
o Total number.<br />
o Number of bundles.<br />
o Part bundles.<br />
o Supplier's name.<br />
o Employer's name and project reference.<br />
o Plant specification, in accordance with scheduled National Plant Specification<br />
categories.<br />
45
246 LABELLING AND INFORMATION<br />
o Standard: To BS 3936.<br />
250 SUPPLY OF PLANTS/ TREES<br />
o Suppliers: Members of the Horticultural Trades Association Nursery Certification<br />
Scheme.<br />
260 PLANT/ TREE SUBSTITUTION<br />
o Plants/ trees unobtainable or known to be likely to be unobtainable at time of<br />
ordering: Submit alternatives, stating:<br />
o Price.<br />
o Difference from specified plants/ trees.<br />
o Further alternatives: Proposed substitutions may not be acceptable and<br />
submission of further alternatives may be required.<br />
o Approval: Obtain before making any substitution.<br />
265 PLANT/ TREE HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT<br />
o Standard: To HTA ‘Handling and establishing landscape plants’ (obtainable from<br />
the Horticultural Trades Association) Part I, Part II and Part III, paragraphs 1.3.3<br />
to 1.3.6, 3.0, and 4.0.<br />
o Frost: Protect plants/ trees from frost.<br />
o Handling: Handle plants/ trees with care. Protect from mechanical damage and<br />
do not subject to shock, e.g. by dropping from a vehicle.<br />
o Plant packaging: Coextruded polyethylene bags with black interior and white<br />
exterior.<br />
o Packaging of bulk quantities: The supplier may alternatively use pallets or bin<br />
sealed with coextruded polyethylene as above.<br />
270 PLANTING GENERALLY<br />
o Standard: To HTA ‘Handling and establishing landscape plants’ (obtainable from<br />
the Horticultural Trades Association) Part III, paragraphs 6.2 to 6.6.<br />
o Appearance: Plant upright or well balanced with best side to front.<br />
280 TREATMENT OF TREE WOUNDS<br />
o Cutting: Keep wounds as small as possible.<br />
o Cut cleanly back to sound wood using sharp, clean tools.<br />
o Leave branch collars. Do not cut flush with stem or trunk.<br />
o Set cuts so that water will not collect on cut area.<br />
o Fungicide/ Sealant: Do not apply unless instructed.<br />
285 PROTECTION OF EXISTING GRASS<br />
o General: Protect areas affected by planting operations using boards/ tarpaulins.<br />
Do not place excavated or imported materials directly on grass.<br />
46
290 SURPLUS MATERIAL<br />
o General: Remove subsoil, stones, debris, wrapping material, canes, ties,<br />
temporary labelling, prunings and other arisings/ rubbish.<br />
PREPARATION OF PLANTING BEDS/ PLANTING MATERIALS<br />
300 HERBICIDE<br />
o Locations: All planted areas.<br />
o Type: Suitable for suppressing perennial weed<br />
o Timing: Allow fallow period before cultivation.<br />
o Duration: (minimum): As manufacturers recommendations.<br />
335 GENERAL FERTILIZER<br />
o Locations: All areas to be planted.<br />
o Manufacturer: As approved by CA.<br />
o Product reference: As approved by CA.<br />
o Application: Spread evenly.<br />
o Timing: Immediately before cultivation.<br />
o Coverage: Evenly over all areas to be planted at 30g/sq m.<br />
375 CULTIVATION<br />
o Compacted topsoil: Break up to full depth.<br />
o Cultivation: Loosen, aerate and break up soil into particles of 2-8 mm.<br />
o Depth: Top 350mm of planting beds.<br />
o Timing: Within a few days before planting.<br />
o Weather and ground conditions: Suitably dry.<br />
o Surface: Leave regular and even.<br />
o As required in sections D20 and Q28.<br />
o Levels: Within 50mm of levels specified on drawings.<br />
o Undesirable material brought to the surface: Remove, including weeds, roots,<br />
stones and clods larger than 20 mm in any dimension, tufts of grass and foreign<br />
matter.<br />
o Soil within root spread of trees and shrubs to be retained: Do not dig or<br />
cultivate.<br />
o<br />
385 MULCH MATTING/GEOTEXTILE FABRIC<br />
o Manufacturer: Mypex. Product reference – Mypex Ground Cover – or similar<br />
approved<br />
o Timing: Lay after cultivating and before planting<br />
o Watering: Water soil thoroughly before laying.<br />
o Laying: In close contact with soil surface. Lap or butt joints as recommended<br />
by Manufacturer, with no gaps<br />
47
o Fixing: Laid to slopes overlapping and retained flush with ground level with<br />
suitable galvanised ‘U@ shaped pegs/pins as per manufacturer’s<br />
recommendations.<br />
o Planting: Cut neat slits or flaps. Refit closely around plant stems. Laid on Bed<br />
Nr.19 and Bed Nr.21<br />
o Overlay: Bark mulch as Q31/485<br />
PLANTING SHRUBS/ HERBACEOUS PLANTS/ BULBS<br />
405 SHRUB/ CONTAINER PLANTING<br />
o Preparation: Remove coarse weeds, debris, etc.<br />
o Planting sites: Form level, stepped or gently sloping areas as scheduled and/ or<br />
appropriate to container sizes and shapes.<br />
o Planting: Lower containers/ bags/ bunches gently into place, keeping plants<br />
upright.<br />
o Planting Pits:<br />
Shrubs generally in pre-pared bed sufficient to fit rootball 250 x 250 x 250mm<br />
deep<br />
Feathered whips 400 x 400 x 350mm deep<br />
Specimen conifers 750mm dia x 500mm deep with a special sized extra over pit<br />
for the specimen Monkey puzzle Tree<br />
Woodland whips 350 x 350 x 350mm pit<br />
Specimen shrubs – pit to adequately suit rootball size<br />
Woodland Whips – 250 x 250 x 250mm pit – complete with spiral rabbit guard<br />
o Sloping ground: Maintain horizontal bases and vertical sides with no less than<br />
minimum depth throughout.<br />
o Pit bottoms: With slightly raised centre. Break up to a depth of 150mm.<br />
o Pit sides: Scarify.<br />
o Backfilling material: Selected topsoil.<br />
o Timing: Excavate not more than 1 day (maximum) before planting.<br />
420 CLIMBING PLANTS<br />
o Planting: 150 mm clear of supporting structure (e.g. wall/ fence) with roots<br />
spread outward.<br />
- Branches: Lightly secured to supports.<br />
o Climber supports: all climbers to be complete with bamboo cane securely set in<br />
ground at 90º fixed and screwed securely to retaining wall.<br />
- Centres: 1.5 c/s or as stated on the drawings<br />
48
- Distance from wall: 300mm approx<br />
435 CLIMBING PLANTS USED AS GROUND COVER<br />
o Planting: Canes or other supports: Remove<br />
o Arrangement: Spread Stems<br />
o Fixing: Pinned to ground to ensure good contact<br />
445 PLANTING BULBS/ CORMS/ TUBERS<br />
o Depth: Top of bulb/ corm/ tuber at a depth of approximately twice its height, base<br />
in contact<br />
with bottom of hole.<br />
o Backfilling: Finely broken soil. Lightly firm to existing ground level.<br />
o Naturalized planting in existing grassed areas:<br />
-Scattering: Random. Plant bulbs/ corms/ tubers where they fall.<br />
- Planting: Neatly remove a plug of turf and replace after planting.<br />
470 SHRUB AND TREE PLANTING TO GRAVEL AREAS<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Rake back gravel and puncture liner<br />
Plant shrubs and reform liner around stem of plant<br />
Rake back gravel neatly around plant, firm and heel back gravel<br />
471 NATURALIZED HEDGES / INSTANT HEDGE BETWEEN <strong>SECTION</strong> 1& 2 AT<br />
END OF CHAPEL GARDEN<br />
o Shrubs for hedges: Consistent in species, cultivar and clone to ensure a uniform<br />
hedge.<br />
o Planting: In trenches large enough to take full spread of roots. Set out plants<br />
evenly as per planting plan. Allow for 3 cuts per year to promote good<br />
shape, or as stated in the BOQ. Remove clippings.<br />
472 FORMAL HEDGES TO CHAPEL GARDENS AND OAK LEAF HEDGE<br />
MOTIFS ON UPPER RETAINING WALL IN <strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />
o Shrubs for hedges: Consistent in species, cultivar and clone to ensure a uniform<br />
hedge.<br />
o Planting: In trenches large enough to take full spread of roots. Set out plants<br />
evenly as per planting plan. Allow for 6 cuts per year to promote good<br />
shape, or as stated in the BOQ. Remove clippings.<br />
475 BACKFILLING MATERIAL<br />
o Composition: Previously prepared mixture of topsoil excavated from pit and<br />
additional topsoil as required.<br />
49
480 AFTER PLANTING<br />
o Watering: Immediately after planting, thoroughly and without damaging or<br />
displacing plants or soil.<br />
o Firming: Lightly firm soil around plants and fork and/ or rake soil, without<br />
damaging roots, to a fine tilth with gentle cambers and no hollows.<br />
o Top dressing: Apply top dressing of ‘Osmocote’ slow release fertilizer evenly<br />
over all shrub areas at 60g/sq m. .<br />
485 MULCHING PLANTING BEDS<br />
o Material: Bark Mulch.<br />
o Purity: Free of pests, disease, fungus and weeds.<br />
o Coverage: To all shrub beds shown on the drawings<br />
o Finished level of mulch: 75mm deep min.<br />
PLANTING TREES<br />
500 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES (WITHOUT BORDERLINE STEEL<br />
EDGING)<br />
o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised specimen Trees: At least 500m<br />
wider and deeper than the diameter of the rootball (approx.1.8m diameter by<br />
1.4m deep ). Allow for all excavations<br />
o Planted as per detail Drawing Nr.83473-04 to include 0.8m² prime quality<br />
Topsoil<br />
o Accessories: Arborguy strapped large anchor system (Q31/ 540) and Rainroot<br />
Urban Irrigation system (Product Reference: RRURB2A); Roof Rain Urban,<br />
pipe diameter 1530mm, length 5m; 60mm diameter irrigation system with 80mm<br />
diameter fixed plastic grid inlet.<br />
o To be fitted 300mm below final ground level as per manufacturers recommended<br />
installation instructions. As supplied by Greenleaf Ireland (Ivy House, 24a<br />
Church Road, Londonderry, BT47 3QQ, Tel: 028 7134 5620) or similar<br />
approved.<br />
501 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES (WITH BORDERLINE STEEL EDGING)<br />
o Trees planted in Pits with irrigation system and underground guying system as<br />
above Q31/500<br />
o Planted as per detail Drawing Nr.83473-04 to include 0.8m² prime quality<br />
Topsoil<br />
o Accessories: Accessories: Borderline Steel edge ring (Q10/120); As supplied<br />
by Greenleaf Ireland (Ivy House, 24a Church Road, Londonderry, BT47 3QQ,<br />
Tel: 028 7134 5620) or similar approved. Include screened Topsoil 0.3m³<br />
approx to be spread in conical form, from the steel edge up to the tree, tamped<br />
and firmed down, left suitable for planting with bedding plants<br />
50
502 PLEACHED TREES<br />
o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised Trees: At least 500m wider and<br />
deeper than the diameter of the rootball (approx.1.8m diameter by 1.4m deep ).<br />
Planted in Pits with irrigation system as previously described Q31/500<br />
o Allow for all excavations<br />
o Planted with sawn treated softwood stake, 2Nr 75mm dia, 1800mm long and<br />
38mm d-rail cross member, including ties, straps and spacers to good<br />
horticultural standard<br />
o Planted with crown arranged through supporting straining wires on site.<br />
o Fix branches with elasticated ties to support wires<br />
o Complete with post and wire frame as shown on Drawing 83473-04<br />
o Species as per BOQ<br />
o<br />
503 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES WITH DOUBLE STAKES<br />
o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised Trees: At least 500m wider and<br />
deeper than the diameter of the rootball (approx.1.8m diameter by 1.4m deep).<br />
Allow for all excavations<br />
o Planted with 2Nr 75mm dia, 1800mm long, double stake and 38mm d-rail cross<br />
member, including ties, straps and spacers to good horticultural standard.<br />
o Pit bottoms: With slightly raised centre. Break up to a depth of 150mm.<br />
o<br />
504 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES WITH UNDERGROUND GUYING<br />
SYSTEM<br />
o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised Trees: At least 500m wider and<br />
deeper than the diameter of the rootball (approx.1.8m diameter by 1.4m deep ).<br />
Planted in Pits with irrigation system as previously described Q31/500<br />
o Allow for all excavations<br />
o planted with underground guying system Q31/ 540<br />
o Pit bottoms: With slightly raised centre. Break up to a depth of 150mm.<br />
o<br />
505 STANDARD TREES<br />
o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised Trees: At least 500m wider and<br />
deeper than the diameter of the rootball. Allow for all excavations<br />
o Planted with 2Nr 75mm dia, 1800mm long, double stake and 38mm d-rail cross<br />
member, including ties, straps and spacers to good horticultural standard.<br />
o Pit bottoms: With slightly raised centre. Break up to a depth of 150mm.<br />
o<br />
507 SPECIMEN ROOTBALLED YEWS<br />
o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised Trees: At least 500m wider and<br />
deeper than the diameter of the rootball. Allow for all excavations<br />
o Pit bottoms: With slightly raised centre. Break up to a depth of 150mm.<br />
To be planted with 45º angled stake, 1800mm x75mm dia laid @ 45° to the<br />
51
horizontal<br />
535 STAKING GENERALLY<br />
o Stakes: Softwood, peeled chestnut, larch or oak, straight, free from projections<br />
and large or edge knots and with pointed lower end.<br />
o Preservative treatment: To be approved.<br />
o Nails: To BS 1202-1, galvanized, minimum 25 mm long and with 10 mm<br />
diameter heads.<br />
o Minimum stake sizes:<br />
Tree Overall length Cross section<br />
size/type: of stake: of stake:<br />
All Trees 1800mm 75mm dia (2 Nr. per tree+<br />
38mm d-rail cross brace)<br />
Feathered whips 900mm 50 x 50mm<br />
Specimen conifers 1800mm 75mm dia laid @ 45° to<br />
the horizontal<br />
o including ties, straps and spacers to good horticultural standard.<br />
540 UNDERGROUND GUYING OF SPECIMEN TREES<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Secure trees with Arborguy anchorage system or similar approved, as supplied<br />
by Greenleaf Ireland (Ivy House, 24a Church Road, Londonderry, BT47 3QQ, T:<br />
+44 (0)28 7134 56820, E: sales@greenleafireland.com) in accordance with<br />
manufacturer’s instructions.<br />
Product Code SASLP - Strapped large anchor system with drive in heavy-duty<br />
composite anchors. Includes webbing strap and ratchet tensioner. Suitable for<br />
trees up to 40cm girth.<br />
550 TREE STAKES (FEATHERED TREES ONLY)<br />
o<br />
Shall be straight poles of sweet chestnut, oak or peeled larch. They shall be fully<br />
tanalised and shall be to the following length and minimum butt diameter:<br />
feathered trees 1250 mm long X 75mm diameter<br />
560 Tree Ties<br />
o<br />
Shall be ‘nail on type’, with rubber block consisting of a rubber-based strap,<br />
3mm wide for advanced Nursery Stock Trees and conifers, and 25 mm wide for<br />
52
Feathered Trees.<br />
585 BACKFILLING MATERIAL<br />
o Composition: Previously prepared mixture of topsoil excavated from pit and<br />
additional topsoil as required.<br />
PROTECTING/ MAINTAINING/ MAKING GOOD DEFECTS<br />
710 MAINTENANCE<br />
o Duration: Carry out the operations in the following clauses from completion of<br />
planting for a period of 12 months after practical completion has been achieved<br />
or as instructed by the CA. This period will run concurrently with the Defects<br />
Liability Period for the planting works.<br />
o Frequency of maintenance visits: Monthly during growing season.<br />
720 FAILURES OF PLANTING<br />
o General: Plants/ trees/ shrubs that have failed to thrive (unless due to theft or<br />
malicious damage after completion) during period stated in clause 710, will be<br />
regarded as defects due to materials or workmanship not in accordance with the<br />
Contract. Replace with equivalent plants/ trees/ shrubs.<br />
o Replacements: To match size of adjacent or nearby plants of same species or<br />
match original specification, whichever is the greater.<br />
o Timing of making good: Within 12 months of practical completion.<br />
740 CLEANLINESS<br />
o Soil and arisings: Remove from hard surfaces and grassed areas.<br />
o General: Leave the works in a clean tidy condition at Completion and after any<br />
maintenance operations.<br />
750 750 PLANTING MAINTENANCE GENERALLY (Shrubs, Trees and<br />
Pleached Trees)<br />
o Weed control: Maintain weed free area around each tree and shrub, minimum<br />
diameter the larger of 1 m or the surface of original planting pit.<br />
o Keep planting beds clear of weeds, by use of suitable and approved herbicides.<br />
o Planted areas: Fork over beds as necessary to keep soil loose, with gentle<br />
cambers and no hollows. Take care not to reduce depth or effect of mulch.<br />
o Precautions: Ensure that trees and shrubs are not damaged by use of mowers,<br />
nylon filament rotary cutters and similar powered tools.<br />
o Staking: Check condition of stakes, ties, guys and guards. Replace broken or<br />
53
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
missing items. Adjust if necessary to allow for growth and prevent rubbing of<br />
bark. Cut back any damaged bark. Tie loose climbers back to support.<br />
Frequency of checks: Monthly.<br />
Firming up: Gently firm loosened soil around trees/ shrubs. Straighten leaning<br />
trees/ shrubs.<br />
Trees: Spray crown when in leaf during warm weather. Carry out in the evening.<br />
Check elasticated tie-fixings of pleached Trees<br />
760 PLANTING MAINTENANCE – PRUNING<br />
o<br />
o<br />
General: Prune at appropriate times, to remove dead or dying and diseased<br />
wood and suckers, to promote healthy growth and natural shape.<br />
Prune trees to favour a single central leading shoot.<br />
765 PLANTING MAINTENANCE – WATERING<br />
o<br />
General: As clauses 145 and 150, using a fine rose pr sprinkler until full depth of<br />
topsoil is saturated.<br />
770 WOODLAND PLANTING MAINTENANCE<br />
Watering: Only as necessary to prevent plants wilting.<br />
Loose plants: Refirm surrounding soil, without compacting.<br />
diameter area<br />
Weed control: Cut down and remove weeds prior to setting seed in a 1 m<br />
around each tree.<br />
Vegetation except trees and coppice shoots to be retained: Cut within the<br />
plantation area.<br />
- Arisings: Leave<br />
proposals.<br />
Mechanical, chemical or mulching methods of vegetation control: Submit<br />
790 FINAL MULCHING<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Timing: At end of maintenance period<br />
Watering: Ensure that soil is thoroughly moistened prior to remulching,<br />
applying water where necessary.<br />
All planting beds including Mypex matting: Remulch. Depth (Min.) 50mm<br />
54
Q40<br />
FENCING<br />
125 1100 MM HIGH MILD STEEL ESTATE RAILING<br />
o Manufacturer: To be confirmed/manufactured by Main Contractor<br />
o Drawing References: 83473 - 01, 02, 03, 04 & 05<br />
o Railing Height above ground level:1100mm<br />
o Material: Galvanised Mild Steel. All materials to be polyester powder coated<br />
Colour Black RAL 9005.<br />
o Posts: 50 x10mm thick x 1530mm long solid galvanised mild steel posts<br />
complete with rounded top and welded base plate 50 x 100 x 10mm thick. Posts<br />
pre-drilled to accommodate 5 Nr. 20mm diameter solid horizontal bars. Posts<br />
set in 300 x 300 x 560mm deep mass concrete surround. Posts at 1.0m centres.<br />
o Straining posts: Posts as above, but complete with a 5 Nr double sets of<br />
circular receiving lugs welded to each post to receive 5 Nr 20mm diameter<br />
horizontals each side. Posts set in an additional concrete foundation of 450 x<br />
450 x 560mm deep mass concrete surround. Posts at 4.0m centres.<br />
o End Posts: As above with only 5 Nr single circular receiving lugs as shown on<br />
the drawings<br />
o Horizontal Rails: 5 Nr 20 mm diameter solid galvanised mild steel rails.<br />
o Method of setting posts: In concrete as described above and as shown on the<br />
drawings<br />
o Other requirements: No sharp edges on either posts or rails. Rails to be parallel<br />
to ground level and not stepped. Allow for all radii and curves on site.<br />
o Special – top rail and fixing to Pillar Type 3 to balance Oak Leaf gates at Chapel<br />
Garden – See Detail Sheet 2 83473 – 05<br />
o Special – special Section of 1100mm high estate railing to corner of<br />
Chapel – See Detail on Drawing Nr 83473 – 03.<br />
o Allow for all site measurements and forming rake with rising ground, and all<br />
excavations and foundations and supports as shoen on the drawings<br />
250 1450 MM HIGH MILD STEEL SAFETY ESTATE RAILING<br />
o Manufacturer: To be confirmed/manufactured by Main Contractor<br />
o Drawing References: 83473 - 01, 02, 03, 04 & 05<br />
o Railing Height above ground level: 1400 mm (although with a 50mm curved top<br />
to each post makes the overall height 1450mm)<br />
o Material: Galvanised Mild Steel. All materials to be polyester powder coated<br />
Colour Black RAL 9005.<br />
o Posts: 60 x10mm thick at top reaching 125 x 10mm thick at the base 1900mm<br />
long approximately – as shown on the drawings, solid galvanised mild steel<br />
posts complete with rounded top and welded base plate 50 x 200 x 10mm thick<br />
to key into concrete foundation. Posts pre-drilled to accommodate 6 Nr. 20mm<br />
diameter solid horizontal bars. Posts set in 450 x 450 x 610mm deep mass<br />
concrete surround (although there will be an element of Contractor Designed<br />
55
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
solution for the foundations of posts linked to the Contractor Designed Retaining<br />
Walls. Posts at 1.0m centres.<br />
Straining posts: Posts as above, but complete with a 6 Nr double sets of<br />
circular receiving lugs welded to each post to receive 6 Nr 20mm diameter<br />
horizontals each side. Straining Posts set in an additional concrete foundation of<br />
550 x 550 x 610 mm deep mass concrete surround. Posts at 4.0m centres.<br />
End Posts: As above with only 6 Nr single circular receiving lugs as shown on<br />
the drawings<br />
Horizontal Rails: 6 Nr 20 mm diameter solid galvanised mild steel rails.<br />
Method of setting posts: In concrete as described above and as shown on the<br />
drawings or as Contractor Designed i.e. set in concrete pipe work set in<br />
concrete as the retaining wall is constructed to accommodate posts after site<br />
measurements.<br />
Other requirements: No sharp edges on either posts or rails. Rails to be parallel<br />
to ground level and not stepped. Allow for all radii and curves on site.<br />
300 OAK LEAFED DOUBLE GATES<br />
o 2.05m high x 3.2m wide mild steel Double Gates<br />
o Manufacturer: To be approved<br />
o Drawing Reference: 83473-05<br />
o Size: 2.05m high x 3.0m wide clear opening.<br />
o Vertical Bars: 16 x 16mm square vertical bars at 100mm spacing (116mm<br />
centres); bottom section of gate to have intermediate vertical bars at100mm<br />
spacing (116mm centres); all vertical bars to be welded to horizontal members<br />
at all points.<br />
o Gate Frame: 50 x 50mm solid bars adjacent to gate posts with rounded profile<br />
at hinge point and at bottom to bear down on 50mm diameter stainless steel ball<br />
bearing; 50 x 12mm flat bar framing top, bottom and opening side. Top member<br />
to be bowed as indicated. Two horizontal members, each 25mm diameter,<br />
spaced 100mm apart as indicated. Hinge point and gate pivot arrangements to<br />
be as indicated.<br />
o Posts: 100 x 100 x 4 x 2750mm long RHS mild steel gate post c/w capping<br />
piece and 200 x 200 x 6mm base plate; posts to have a 150 x 75 x 10mm thick<br />
m.s. plate welded to accommodate strap hinge arrangement and detail as<br />
indicated.<br />
o Method of setting posts: Base plate bolted to pier foundation using M8<br />
expanding bolts in 4 Nr. positions.<br />
o Finish: Galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461:1999 and polyester powder coated to<br />
BS6497. Colour Black RAL: 9005.<br />
o Special Oak leaf motifs to top of each folding gate to be Oak Leaf shaped solid<br />
6mm galvanised plate welded to frame at each Oak Leaf touching frame. To be<br />
primed and painted with haemarite exterior paint 2Nr finished coats ‘Gold’.<br />
Colour to be agreed with colour chart to CA prior to painting<br />
56
o Other requirements: Gates to be provided with hot forged mild steel finials at top<br />
and mid point as indicated; 1 Nr. slam plate at top of 1 Nr. leaf; 1 Nr. lockable<br />
barrel bolt - 200mm long, 12mm diameter, 2 Nr. M.S. 450mm long x 16mm<br />
diameter drop bolts; 4 Nr. drop bolt holders, 2 Nr. for closed position and 2 Nr.<br />
for open position; Gate to be supplied complete with an approved Heavy Duty<br />
“Abus” padlock and three keys [all gate padlocks to be operated with the same<br />
key]. All mild steel – gates, fixings and fittings to be hot dipped galvanised and<br />
polyester powder coated, Colour Black RAL: 9005.<br />
o Conformity: Submit manufacturer's and installer's certificates, to BS 1722-12,<br />
clause 9.<br />
610 INSTALLATION<br />
o<br />
Set out and erect:<br />
- In straight lines or smoothly flowing curves as shown on drawings.<br />
- With tops of posts following profile of the ground.<br />
- With posts set rigid, plumb and to specified depth, or greater where<br />
necessary to ensure adequate support.<br />
- With correct fasteners and all components securely fixed.<br />
620 SETTING POSTS IN CONCRETE<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Mix: To BS 8500-1 and -2 and BS EN 206-1, Designated mix not less than<br />
GEN1 or Standard mix not less than ST2.<br />
Alternative mix for small quantities: 50 kg Portland cement to 150 kg fine<br />
aggregate to 250 kg 20 mm nominal maximum size coarse aggregate, medium<br />
workability.<br />
Admixtures: Do not use.<br />
Holes: Excavate neatly and with vertical sides.<br />
Filling: Position post/ strut and fill hole with concrete to not less than the<br />
specified depth, well rammed as filling proceeds and consolidated.<br />
Backfilling of holes not completely filled with concrete: Excavated material, well<br />
rammed and consolidated.<br />
Foundations and builders work all to be included as shown on drawing Nrs<br />
83473-04 + 05<br />
630 EXPOSED CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
No concrete to be exposed on surface of ground.<br />
Filling: Compact until air bubbles cease to appear on the upper surface.<br />
Finishing: Weathered to shed water and trowelled smooth.<br />
680 DAMAGE TO GALVANIZED SURFACES<br />
57
o<br />
Treatment of minor damage (including on fasteners and fittings): Low melting<br />
point zinc alloy repair rods or powders made for this purpose, or at least two<br />
coats of zinc-rich paint to BS 4652.<br />
o<br />
Thickness: Apply sufficient material to provide a zinc coating at least equal in<br />
thickness to the original layer.<br />
Q50<br />
SITE/ STREET FURNITURE/ EQUIPMENT<br />
200 SEATS (HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL – POLYESTER POWDER COAT<br />
FINISHED)<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Manufacturer: Ollerton (Supplied by Marshalls Street Furniture)<br />
Product reference: Festival Straight Seat with Steel Slats and Armrests each<br />
end<br />
or other equal and approved<br />
As supplied by MB Civils, 4 Balmoral Road, Belfast, BT12 6QA;<br />
Tel: 028 90551390 Contact: Justin Reid – justin.reid@mbcivils.com<br />
Material: mild steel galvanised and polyester powder coated Black<br />
Finish: ’Polyester powder coated. Coated parts are to be fully cured to coating<br />
manufacturer’s specifications. The thickness of the finish coat is to average 8-10<br />
mils (200-250 microns).<br />
Colour: RAL 9005 Black<br />
Size: 1800mm long.<br />
Seat Height: 480mm<br />
Fixing Method: Ground fixed ( below ground level set seat root fixings in 450 x<br />
450 x 500mm deep Mix C30 Concrete surround prior to paving over strictly in<br />
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations<br />
Accessories: 1 pair of armrests, one each either end of seat, material and finish<br />
to match seat body.<br />
210 LITTER BINS (HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL – POLYESTER POWDER<br />
COAT FINISHED)<br />
o Manufacturer: Ollerton (Supplied by Marshalls Street Furniture)<br />
o Product reference: Festival Flared Top 110 Litre Capacity or other equal and<br />
approved Complete with galvanised mild steel liner.<br />
o As supplied by MB Civils, 4 Balmoral Road, Belfast, BT12 6QA; Tel: 028<br />
90551390 Contact: Justin Reid – justin.reid@mbcivils.com<br />
o Material: mild steel galvanised and polyester powder coated Black<br />
o Finish: ’Polyester powder coated. Coated parts are to be fully cured to coating<br />
58
manufacturer’s specifications. The thickness of the finish coat is to average 8-10<br />
mils (200-250 microns).<br />
o Colour: RAL 9005 Black<br />
o Size: 610 mm diameter<br />
o Bin Height (without lid): 850mm<br />
o Fixing Method: Surface Mounted in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />
recommendations<br />
o Accessories: side Loading Lockable Lid, colour Black RAL 9005<br />
220 WASTE BASKETS FOR SETING AROUND CEMETERY – <strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Wire Bin/Baskets for placing of dead flowers etc by members of the public<br />
Wire compost bin made from galvanised mild steel, powder coated colour Black<br />
RAL 9005<br />
Size: 75cm x 75cm x 100cm high with 3mm dia. Galv MS welded mesh.<br />
To include mesh bottom ( no lid required) and 2 folding handles for lifting at<br />
short ends<br />
Mesh to be min 30 x 30mm<br />
No sharp edges after the galvanising process<br />
260 PLANTERS TO CHAPEL GARDEN<br />
o Manufacturer: Ollerton (Supplied by Marshalls Street Furniture)<br />
o Product reference: Festival Planter, circular flared top, Circular Rolled Top<br />
620mm high x 650mm o/d Part No. PL106<br />
o As supplied by MB Civils, 4 Balmoral Road, Belfast, BT12 6QA; Tel: 028<br />
90551390 Contact: Justin Reid – justin.reid@mbcivils.com<br />
o Material: mild steel, galvanised and polyester powder coated Black<br />
o Finish: ’Polyester powder coated. Coated parts are to be fully cured to coating<br />
manufacturer’s specifications. The thickness of the finish coat is to average 8-10<br />
mils (200-250 microns).<br />
o Colour: RAL 9005 Black<br />
o Size: 650mm diameter<br />
o Height: 620mm high<br />
o Fixing Method: Surface Mounted in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />
recommendations<br />
270 CAST STONE STATUES – SUMMER – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Manufacturer: Haddonstone (as supplied by Haddonstone Limited, The Forge<br />
House, East Haddon, Northampton, NN6 8DB, England;Telephone: 01604<br />
770711 Fax: 01604 770027 e-mail:info@haddonstone.co.uk)<br />
Product Reference: THE FOUR SEASONS/ Statue SUMMER - HE755<br />
59
o The Summer Statue of the “Four Seasons” set of cast stone statues is to be<br />
fitted in central circle in chapel garden as shown on the drawings. Summer is to<br />
be related to the west position. The colour of the statue of Summer is to be<br />
Portland/ Sandstone<br />
o To be fitted on 910cm high pedestal on Concrete Base.<br />
o Height: 1430mm<br />
o Weight: 140 kg<br />
o Max. base width:360mm<br />
o Pedestal: 485 x 485 x 915mm high (B265 36" QUEEN ANNE<br />
PEDESTAL)<br />
o Erection:<br />
The cast stone statue should be erected on a suitable foundation - Mass concrete<br />
Foundation, C30mix, with steel A393 reinforcement mesh to be designed to suit loadings<br />
and ground conditions (min 670 x670 x450mm deep, set 70mm below finished Ground<br />
Level). To include a suitable steel starter bar set into a concrete foundation. The statue<br />
pedestal is then bedded on 1:1:6 cement/lime/sand mortar. All joints would normally be<br />
6mm (1/4”) with the mortar slightly recessed from the surface of the stonework to allow<br />
for pointing after the cast stone statue is erected. It is important that polystyrene (or<br />
similar) is used to act as an isolating medium between the stonework and infill concrete.<br />
This is inserted into the core of the statue pedestal. Care should be taken to ensure<br />
sufficient overlap at both vertical and horizontal joints with continuous contact between<br />
the isolating material and the inner stonework core.<br />
All subsequent concrete pours should only take place after the concrete in the preceding<br />
section has reached its initial set. The core is then partly in filled with concrete (C30mix)<br />
before the isolating material is trimmed flush. Continue concrete infill until level with top of<br />
pedestal.<br />
The joint around the structural core between the pedestal and the statue above should be<br />
formed using compressible filler or a weak mortar mix, to form a 6mm (1/4”) soft joint.<br />
This ensures that any loading is carried by the central structural core and not by the<br />
stonework.<br />
The isolating/expansion material is trimmed and the concrete toweled so that both are<br />
flush. Insert 10mm stainless steel dowel 150mm long minimum into top of concrete, to<br />
protrude by 50mm. Only proceed once concrete has reached its initial set. Bed the statue<br />
on a continuous mortar bed onto the pedestal with the dowels resin fixed.<br />
Allow for sufficient amount of concrete infill during set up (0.1m³approx).<br />
280 CAST STONE STATUES – SPRING – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />
60
o Manufacturer: Haddonstone (as supplied by Haddonstone Limited, The Forge<br />
House, East Haddon, Northampton, NN6 8DB, England;Telephone: 01604<br />
770711 Fax: 01604 770027 e-mail:info@haddonstone.co.uk)<br />
o Product Reference: THE FOUR SEASONS/ Statue Spring - HE750<br />
o The Spring Statue of the “Four Seasons” set of cast stone statues is to be fitted<br />
in central circle in chapel garden as shown on the drawings. Spring is to be<br />
related to the east position. The colour of the statue of Spring is to be Portland/<br />
Sandstone<br />
o To be fitted on 910cm high pedestal on Concrete Base.<br />
o Height: 1430mm<br />
o Weight: 140 kg<br />
o Max. base width:360mm<br />
o Pedestal: 485 x 485 x 915mm high (B265 36" QUEEN ANNE<br />
PEDESTAL)<br />
o Erection as previously described<br />
290 CAST STONE STATUES – WINTER – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />
o Manufacturer: Haddonstone (as supplied by Haddonstone Limited, The Forge<br />
House, East Haddon, Northampton, NN6 8DB, England;Telephone: 01604<br />
770711 Fax: 01604 770027 e-mail:info@haddonstone.co.uk)<br />
o Product Reference: THE FOUR SEASONS/ Statue Winter - HE765<br />
o The Winter Statue of the “Four Seasons” set of cast stone statues is to be fitted<br />
in central circle in chapel garden as shown on the drawings. Winter is to be<br />
related to the north position. The colour of the statue of Spring is to be Portland/<br />
Sandstone .<br />
o To be fitted on 685cm high pedestal on Concrete Base.<br />
o Height: 1430mm<br />
o Weight: 140 kg<br />
o Max. base width: 360mm<br />
o Pedestal: 485 x 485 x 685mm high (B255 27" QUEEN ANNE<br />
PEDESTAL)<br />
o Erection as previously described<br />
300 CAST STONE STATUES – AUTUMN – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Manufacturer: Haddonstone (as supplied by Haddonstone Limited, The Forge<br />
House, East Haddon, Northampton, NN6 8DB, England;Telephone: 01604<br />
770711 Fax: 01604 770027 e-mail:info@haddonstone.co.uk)<br />
Product Reference: THE FOUR SEASONS/ Statue Autumn - HE760<br />
The Autumn Statue of the “Four Seasons” set of cast stone statues is to be<br />
fitted in central circle in chapel garden as shown on the drawings. Autumn is to<br />
be related to the south position. The colour of the statue of Spring is to be<br />
Portland/ Sandstone .<br />
61
o To be fitted on 685cm high pedestal on Concrete Base.<br />
o Height: 1430mm<br />
o Weight: 140 kg<br />
o Max. base width:360mm<br />
o Pedestal: 485 x 485 x 685mm high (B255 27" QUEEN ANNE<br />
PEDESTAL)<br />
o Erection as previously described<br />
310 OBELISK – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />
o Manufacturer: Haddonstone (as supplied by Haddonstone Limited, The Forge<br />
House, East Haddon, Northampton, NN6 8DB, England;Telephone: 01604<br />
770711 Fax: 01604 770027 e-mail:info@haddonstone.co.uk)<br />
o Product Reference: Obelisk E550<br />
o The Obelisk will be used as a focal point at the end of path in Chapel garden as<br />
shown on the drawing. The colour of the Georgian style Obelisk is to be<br />
Portland/ Sandstone.<br />
o To be fitted on Concrete Base.<br />
o Weight: 656 kg<br />
o Width of base: 700mm<br />
o Height overall: 2672mm<br />
o Erection as previously described. The Obelisk should be erected on a suitable<br />
foundation - Mass concrete Foundation, C30mix with steel A393 reinforcement<br />
mesh to be designed to suit loadings and ground conditions (min<br />
1200x1200x500mm deep, set 70mm below finished Ground Level). To include a<br />
suitable steel bar set into a concrete foundation.<br />
400 PLEACHED TREE POST AND WIRE FRAME – DRAWING NR 83473- 04<br />
Standard: To BS 1722-2<br />
Wire: 5 Nr 3.15mm diameter galvanised high tensile line wires<br />
Posts and struts: see drawing Nr 83473-04 Overall length 8.5m long approx<br />
Straining posts: in straight runs and at all ends, corners, changes of direction and acute<br />
variations in level.<br />
Intermediate posts: 3.5 m.<br />
Method of setting posts and struts:<br />
Intermediate posts: 2Nr<br />
62
Setting posts in concrete Standard: To BS 8500-2.<br />
Mix: C30<br />
Alternative mix for small quantities: 50 kg Portland cement to 150 kg fine aggregate to<br />
250<br />
kg 20 mm nominal maximum size coarse aggregate, medium workability.<br />
Admixtures: Do not use.<br />
Holes: Excavate neatly and with vertical sides.<br />
Filling: Position post/ strut and fill hole with concrete to not less than the specified depth,<br />
well rammed as filling proceeds and consolidated.<br />
Backfilling of holes not completely filled with concrete: Excavated material, well rammed<br />
and consolidated.<br />
Substitute Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />
Clause No<br />
Title and rewritten text<br />
63
1800SR<br />
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK<br />
1 DEFINITION OF TERMS IN THIS CLAUSE<br />
The ‘Engineer’ shall mean the Project Manager<br />
The ‘Steelwork Sub-Contractor’ shall mean the Firm appointed by<br />
the Main Contractor on a domestic sub-contract basis to supply,<br />
fabricate, deliver and erect the Structural Steelwork as indicatively<br />
shown on the Contract Drawings and as described in this<br />
Specification. Firm must be a member of the British<br />
Constructional Steelwork Association, or an equal and<br />
approved quality scheme.<br />
The ‘Main Contractor’ shall mean the firm appointed to by the<br />
Employer to carry out the building work under the Main Contract.<br />
The ‘Employer’ shall mean <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong><br />
The ‘Architect’ will be <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong><br />
The Quantity Surveyor will be Doran Consulting<br />
2 DESCRIPTION OF THE STEELWORK<br />
The Steelwork Domestic Sub-contract includes the supply,<br />
fabrication, delivery to the site and erection complete of the<br />
structural framework as indicatively shown on the Contract<br />
Drawings and described in this Specification. The Steelwork is to be<br />
erected on concrete foundations prepared by the Main Contractor.<br />
3 ADVICE NOTES<br />
Immediately on the despatch of any steelwork to the site, advice<br />
notes shall be sent to the Engineer.<br />
4 BRITISH AND EUROPEAN STANDARDS<br />
Where British and European Standards are referred to in the<br />
Specification the references shall be taken as referring to the latest<br />
editions of any such British or European Standards including all<br />
amendments and additions issued up to 42 days prior to the date of<br />
the Specification. The initials BS shall be taken to mean British<br />
64
Standard, EN shall be taken to mean European Standard, and the<br />
initials BS EN shall be taken to mean European Standard adopted<br />
as a British Standard.<br />
5 STEELWORK DESIGN, DRAWINGS & PROGRAMME<br />
The Structural Steelwork has been designed by the Engineer in<br />
accordance with BS 5950: Part 1, Specification for "The use of<br />
steelwork in building".<br />
The Engineer will supply to the Steelwork Sub-Contractor drawings<br />
giving sizes of the principal members and showing member forces<br />
and reactions in kilonewtons as well as any bending moments<br />
which have to be taken up in the "fixed joints" of the structure<br />
expressed in kilonewton metres. From this information the<br />
Steelwork Sub-Contractor will be required to prepare his own shop<br />
details in accordance with BS 5950: Part 2 and Appendix 2 of this<br />
Specification. These drawings are to be supplied in duplicate to the<br />
Engineer, Architect and Quantity Surveyor for comment before<br />
fabrication. Should these shop details in the opinion of the Engineer<br />
or Architect be insufficient, or unsatisfactory, the Engineer or<br />
Architect will require fresh details to be submitted as below.<br />
(The shop drawings shall indicate the location and type of<br />
temporary guys and bracings proposed for use during erection of<br />
the steelwork).<br />
On receiving Engineer or Architect comments in writing on such<br />
detail drawings, a further copy of the revised drawings are to be<br />
submitted to the Engineer and Architect. One further copy shall be<br />
sent to the Clerk of Works on the Site.<br />
On his appointment the Main Contractor and his Steelwork Sub-<br />
Contractor shall produce a programme for the production of<br />
workshop and erection drawings and drawings of temporary and<br />
other works. The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall, after consultation<br />
with the Engineer and Architect, be required to agree a programme<br />
and a final date for the submission and checking of drawings. No<br />
work is to be put in hand until the Engineer or Architect’s comments<br />
have been obtained and the Main Contractor's and Steelwork Sub-<br />
Contractor’s programme shall make suitable allowance for checking<br />
procedures including the re-submission of amended drawings<br />
following comments by the Engineer.<br />
65
6 DIMENSIONS<br />
The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor will be required<br />
to take all working dimensions and other necessary particulars from<br />
drawings, site measurements and information supplied by the<br />
Engineer, or Architect.<br />
7 CORRECTNESS OF DIMENSIONS etc<br />
The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor will be held<br />
responsible for the correctness of dimensions and details, fitting and<br />
workmanship and for the strength of all connections,<br />
notwithstanding the checks carried out by the Engineer on the<br />
detailed drawings, and for all parts of the various structures coming<br />
together correctly for assembling in position.<br />
In the event of any connection being found unsatisfactory before or<br />
after erection, or errors arising in fabrication, the Main Contractor<br />
and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall submit to the Engineer their<br />
proposals as to the method to be adopted in making good. The<br />
Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall abide by the<br />
Engineer's decision and in the event of replacements or site<br />
modification of steelwork being required the Main Contractor shall<br />
be responsible for all costs and testing charges involved.<br />
Sufficient tolerance shall be provided in connections or parts of the<br />
structure to ensure that the steelwork can be erected, within the<br />
limits specified, to the overall building dimensions.<br />
8 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT FOR ERECTION<br />
The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall provide all<br />
plant, tools, tackle, scaffolding, shoring, service bolts and other<br />
accessories, steel packing and wedges which are required for the<br />
satisfactory erection and completion of the steelwork.<br />
9 ERECTION<br />
The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall obtain the<br />
permission of the Engineer to start erecting steel on site. Before<br />
starting however the Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor<br />
shall check the foundations for line and level, and the holding-down<br />
bolts for position, protruding length, condition and slackness.<br />
66
The steel is to be supplied to the site by the Steelwork Sub-<br />
Contractor and he is to erect and hoist it into position and bolt up all<br />
members.<br />
The erection of the steelwork for the structural frame shall be<br />
planned and carried out by the Steelwork Sub-Contractor so as to<br />
ensure safe working conditions at all times. The recommendations<br />
of BS 5531 : "Code of practice for safety in erecting structural<br />
frames" shall be followed.<br />
Thermal cutting equipment shall not be allowed on site except with<br />
the prior written approval of the Contract Engineer.<br />
Welding equipment shall not be used on site unless approved in<br />
writing by the Engineer.<br />
Tolerances for erected steelwork shall be to BS 5950: Part 2.<br />
10 ERECTION PRECAUTIONS<br />
The method of transport, handling and erection of materials shall be<br />
to the satisfaction of the Engineer and in accordance with the<br />
drawings, or as directed. These operations shall be carried out in<br />
such a manner as will not injure, overstress or disfigure any part of<br />
the structure. Any member injured, overstressed or disfigured shall<br />
be replaced or rectified as directed by the Engineer. Site joints and<br />
connections shall not be finally bolted up until sufficient of the<br />
structure is properly plumbed levelled and aligned, and no straining<br />
into position will be allowed subsequently.<br />
All High Strength Friction Grip Bolts including "Tension Control<br />
Bolts" shall be in accordance with BS 4395 and shall be handled<br />
and fitted in accordance with BS 4604 "Specification for the Use of<br />
High Strength Friction Grip Bolts in Structural Steelwork".<br />
On receipt of written approval from the Engineer a calibrated<br />
tightening device may be used for tightening bolts, in conformity<br />
with the "torque control" method for normal HSFG bolts, and in<br />
conformity with the manufacturers recommended method for TC<br />
Bolts. The equipment shall be calibrated regularly while in use and<br />
adjusted to maintain a shank tension 10% higher than the minimum<br />
values tabulated in Table 3 of BS 4604 : Part 1.Load indicating<br />
washers shall be used on all HSFG Bolts. The position of the load<br />
67
indicating washer on the bolt, and the method of tightening and<br />
measurement, shall be strictly in accordance with the<br />
manufacturer's recommendations. A plain hardened steel washer<br />
shall be used under the part of the bolt being turned during<br />
tightening operations.<br />
Irrespective of the tightening procedure, the Steelwork Sub-<br />
Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a Schedule of all HSFG<br />
bolts to be used on the Contract. This schedule should indicate the<br />
location of each bolt and the type of fabrication into which it is fitted.<br />
After final tightening of bolts the schedule must be signed by the<br />
Steelwork Sub-Contractor's erection supervisor. A copy of the<br />
completed bolt schedule must be forwarded to the Engineer for<br />
record purposes. If after final tightening, a nut or bolt is slackened<br />
off for any reason, the bolt, nut and washer or washers shall be<br />
discarded and not used again.<br />
The Steelwork Sub-Contractor is to take all necessary precautions<br />
to ensure the stability and safety of the steelwork structure during<br />
erection and shall maintain any special temporary guying or other<br />
supports until the structure is completed, and the Steelwork Sub-<br />
Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any accidents which may<br />
arise from lack of suitable precautions.<br />
Extra care shall be exercised by the Steelwork Sub-Contractor<br />
when handling steelwork which is metal sprayed, galvanised or<br />
coated with anti-corrosive paint treatment. In order to avoid<br />
damage to these coatings padded slings should be used for lifting<br />
the steelwork. Temporary timber packers and spacing members<br />
shall be used extensively during transport, storage and erection, in<br />
an effort to reduce the possibility of damage to the treated surfaces<br />
of the steel.<br />
Zinc or Cadmium plated bolts, nuts and washers shall be used in<br />
the assembly and erection of all galvanised or specially treated<br />
steelwork.<br />
11 SETTING OF STEELWORK<br />
Unless otherwise specified stanchion bases are to be set on the<br />
concrete on steel wedges leaving a nominal gap of 40 mm and<br />
when the steelwork has been accurately levelled and aligned the<br />
space beneath will be filled by the Main Contractor with fluid<br />
Portland Cement mortar.<br />
68
The mortar shall be mixed as thickly as possible consistent with<br />
fluidity and shall be poured under a suitable head and tamped until<br />
the space is completely filled. The mortar shall be not leaner than<br />
1:2 cement to sand and should be regarded as a "sanded grout" for<br />
the assessment of working stresses, in bearing, on the material.<br />
The size of holding-down bolts and foundation anchorages shall be<br />
determined by the Steelwork Sub-Contractor considering the<br />
combination of maximum overturning moment with minimum<br />
column load, as specified on the contract drawings. The foundation<br />
bolt anchorages and column base thickness shall be designed to<br />
suit the bolt tension and the strength of the concrete. Holding down<br />
bolts shall be cast-in with a nominal play of 25 mm all round to<br />
accommodate alignment of the steelwork. The projection of<br />
holding-down bolts above the concrete shall be determined by the<br />
Steelwork Sub-Contractor to suit the base fabrication. A minimum<br />
allowance of 40 mm of bolt projection beyond the nut shall be<br />
provided to compensate for tolerances in the levels of foundations.<br />
Stanchion base plates should not be raised more than 25 mm nor<br />
lowered more than 15 mm, from the designed level, without the<br />
approval of the Engineer.<br />
Holding down bolts shall be not less than 20 mm diameter and 375<br />
mm long. The anchorage plate shall be not less than half the bolt<br />
diameter in thickness. All holding-down bolts, nuts, washers and<br />
anchorages shall be galvanised after fabrication.<br />
12 STEEL<br />
The Steel for this Contract shall be in accordance with the<br />
requirements of<br />
EN 10025:2004 for rolled steel sections and plates, and EN 10210<br />
for hot finished structural hollow sections. The grades of steel to be<br />
employed in the structure are to be noted on the Design Engineer’s<br />
Drawings.<br />
Care should be taken to protect mill identification marks on all steel<br />
sections during storage and fabrication.<br />
It is expected that steel of grade S355, in addition to ring marking,<br />
shall have a continuous pale blue paint line on the plate or section,<br />
in accordance with BS EN 10025:2004, applied after rolling.<br />
69
The steel sections used in the structure shall be in accordance with<br />
the requirements of the following British Standard Specifications:-<br />
BS 4 Part 1:2005 "Hot rolled steel sections".<br />
BS EN 10210-2:1997 "Hot rolled structural<br />
hollow sections".<br />
BS EN 10056-1:1999 "Hot rolled equal and unequal<br />
angles".<br />
BS EN 10162:2003 "Cold formed steel sections" made from<br />
galvanised steel sheet to BS EN<br />
10143, with a minimum yield<br />
strength of 280 N/mm 2 .<br />
13 FABRICATION<br />
The steelwork generally shall be fabricated in accordance with the<br />
requirements of BS 5950 : Part 2 unless otherwise specified.<br />
The ends of all sections unless specified otherwise on the contract<br />
drawings shall be accurately sawn, square to the axis of the<br />
member, and all burrs removed. Where loads are required to be<br />
transmitted by direct bearing, as in stanchion shafts with slab<br />
bases, the matching steel faces shall be machined "dead square"<br />
and the faces protected with grease during fabrication.<br />
Generally all bolts and nuts shall be I.S.O. metric black hexagon<br />
and conform to the requirements of BS 4190:2001. Higher grade<br />
bolts and nuts, except friction grip bolts, shall be ISO metric<br />
precision bolts and nuts in accordance with the requirements of BS<br />
3692:2001.<br />
All threads shall be clean and the nuts shall closely fit the bolts so<br />
that they can only just be turned by hand. Bolts shall be fitted in the<br />
fabrications with flat washers under all nuts. Tapered washers shall<br />
be used on tapering sections and flanges to ensure true bearing of<br />
the bolt head or nut. Two clear threads shall show beyond the nut<br />
on a fully tightened bolt.<br />
The faying surfaces of HSFG bolted joints in steel 25 mm thick or<br />
more should be checked for deformities such as bowing, twist or<br />
rippling which would reduce the safe load capacity of the joint.<br />
Zinc or Cadmium plated bolts, nuts and washers shall be used in<br />
the assembly of all steelwork which has been galvanised or treated<br />
70
with anti-corrosive treatments.<br />
Light angle sections may be cut by cropping providing the ends are<br />
dressed flush and burrs removed.<br />
Flame cutting (thermal cutting) of steel will be permitted only for the<br />
wall ends of beams, filler joists, or the like.<br />
Flame cutting of plates is permitted provided that properly prepared<br />
templates or guides are used and all gas cuts are dressed up free<br />
from oxidised metal to a bright metal finish.<br />
All holes generally shall be drilled with a maximum of 2 mm<br />
clearance for black bolts up to 24 mm diameter and 3 mm maximum<br />
clearance for bolts over 24 mm diameter.<br />
Punching of holes is acceptable only for secondary structural<br />
members such as sheeting rails and light bracing angles and all<br />
arises or burrs shall be removed prior to final assembly. Holes for<br />
high strength friction grip bolts shall not be punched.<br />
Unless adequate weld metal is provided to transmit forces, bearing<br />
stiffeners shall be accurately ground over their full bearing faces to<br />
fit tightly the angle or section stiffened.<br />
For fabrication in Structural Hollow Sections, the ends of members<br />
may be prepared for welding by sawing, machining, or by hand<br />
flame cutting using properly prepared templates or by automatic<br />
flame cutting or other approved methods.<br />
The correct fusion bevel for the welding of sections or plates may<br />
be achieved by flame cutting and/or grinding or machining. A<br />
smooth contour, free from irregularities is essential. Surfaces<br />
should also be free of any deleterious matter likely to affect the<br />
ease of welding and the efficiency of the connection.<br />
The edges of all plates etc cut by flame, which will be subject to<br />
dynamic or fatigue loading or liable to brittle fracture, shall be further<br />
machined to remove excessive face hardness. The amount of<br />
metal to be removed shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.<br />
Vent holes must be provided in Structural Hollow Section<br />
fabrications which are subsequently to be hot-dip galvanised. After<br />
71
galvanising, these vent holes must be plugged effectively to seal the<br />
tube and to ensure that there is no ingress of moisture. The method<br />
of sealing shall be approved by the Engineer. Location of any such<br />
venting holes shall be agreed with Engineer and Architect and be so<br />
located that they will be hidden from view in the finished building<br />
14 WELDING<br />
Welding of all structural sections shall be by electric arc process.<br />
The procedures to be followed, plant and equipment to be used and<br />
the testing and inspection to be applied shall be to the satisfaction<br />
of the Engineer and shall conform generally with the relevant British<br />
Standards and with the requirements contained in this Specification.<br />
All welding shall be carried out in workshops unless specifically<br />
shown otherwise on the Contract Drawings.<br />
Mild steel, Grade S275 may be welded in thicknesses up to 20 mm<br />
without preheat. Grade S355 steel plate and sections may be<br />
welded in thicknesses up to 16 mm without preheat. Material over<br />
this thickness requires some degree of preheat which shall be<br />
determined in consultation with the Engineer.<br />
When the surfaces to be welded are wet the sections or plates<br />
should be heated until they are warm to the touch for a distance of<br />
not less than 75 mm on each side of the joint.<br />
The minimum size of weld and electrode size shall be proportioned<br />
by careful consideration of the combined thickness of the parts to<br />
be welded and the ambient temperature at which welding will be<br />
carried out.<br />
Tack welds shall be deposited by a qualified welder. The length of<br />
tack welds shall not be less than 50 mm or 4 times the thickness of<br />
the thinner part, whichever is the smaller.<br />
All Steel Sections and plates of grades S275 and S355 shall be<br />
welded in accordance with BS EN 1011:1998. "Specification for<br />
metal arc welding of carbon and carbon-manganese steels".<br />
The design of welds shall recognise the requirements of the<br />
aforementioned British Standard Specifications but in all instances<br />
the conditions laid down by BS 5950 : Part 2 shall be adhered to.<br />
72
Covered electrodes used shall give a weld deposit having<br />
mechanical properties not less than the minimum specified for the<br />
parent metal. All electrodes shall comply with the requirements of<br />
BS 639 "Specification for Covered Electrodes for the Manual<br />
Metal-Arc Welding of Carbon and Carbon Manganese Steels".<br />
Where welding is required between different grades of material the<br />
choice of electrode shall be that relating to the higher yield stress<br />
material.<br />
Electrodes shall be stored in their original cartons or bundles in dry<br />
conditions and adequately protected from adverse weather effects.<br />
The approval of the Engineer shall be sought where deep<br />
penetration electrodes are considered for the welding of butt joints<br />
with minimal edge preparation.<br />
In fillet welded connections where the angle between fusion faces is<br />
less than 30 o the Steelwork Sub-Contractor will be required to<br />
submit sample welds as evidence that adequate root fusion and<br />
throat thickness are obtainable by the welding procedure employed.<br />
All butt joints in Structural Hollow Sections shall be welded with the<br />
aid of specially fitted backing rings in order to ensure complete<br />
penetration at the root of the welds. In every case where a backing<br />
ring is employed, the location of the joint, preparation and fit-up<br />
shall be arranged in such a way as to ensure that complete fusion<br />
of the tubes to be joined is readily obtained.<br />
The weld metal deposited shall be substantially free from weld<br />
defects such as cracks, slag inclusions, gross porosity, cavities etc.<br />
The weld metal shall be properly fused with the parent metal without<br />
serious under-cutting or overlapping. The quality of welding<br />
generally shall be assessed according to the acceptance levels<br />
stated in BS EN 1011:1998. All full strength butt welds shall be<br />
category "A" and all other welds category "B" standard.<br />
Any serious undercut shall be made good by the deposition of<br />
additional weld metal.<br />
Evidence of qualification of welders will be required by the Engineer<br />
and in cases where recent test results, certificates or other<br />
acceptable proof of welder qualification is not available, the<br />
Engineer will require welder approval tests to be carried out.<br />
73
In the particular case of welders engaged on fillet welding only the<br />
welder tests may be in accordance with BS 4872 : Part 1:1982<br />
"Approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is<br />
not required". The tests shall be carried out under the supervision<br />
of the Engineer and to his satisfaction and the extent of qualification<br />
thereby attained shall be in conformity with the recommendations of<br />
BS EN 287 : Part 1:2004<br />
For certain critical welds and all full strength butt welds it will be<br />
necessary to carry out welding procedure tests and satisfy the<br />
requirements of BS EN 288 "Specification and Approval of welding<br />
procedures for metallic materials" In all such cases the welders to<br />
be employed on the work shall be tested additionally to BS EN 287 :<br />
Part 1:2004 "Qualification test of welders, fusion welding".<br />
Details of proposed weld sizes, weld preparations, welding positions<br />
and sequences for manual metal arc welding accompanied by<br />
diagrams showing the number and arrangement of runs in multi-run<br />
main welds together with the details of the manufacturer,<br />
classification code (as defined in BS EN ISO 2560:2005) and size of<br />
electrodes to be used, shall be submitted in advance to the<br />
Engineer for his approval. Similarly, for semi-automatic gas<br />
shielded and automatic welding processes on main welds, the<br />
welding procedure in detail shall be submitted in advance to the<br />
Engineer for his approval. The approval of the details submitted<br />
shall not relieve the Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor<br />
of their responsibility for producing sound welded joints nor of the<br />
requirement to undertake welding procedure tests.<br />
Unless agreed otherwise with the Engineer all steel components<br />
and structures which are externally exposed or subjected to<br />
condensation or corrosive vapours etc shall be fully seal welded<br />
during fabrication. Intermittent welding in such fabrications is not<br />
permitted.<br />
The Steelwork Sub-Contractor should note that changes may not be<br />
made to agreed welding procedures or material preparation without<br />
the consent of the Engineer.<br />
The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall bear the<br />
cost of all material and labour necessary in the production of test<br />
pieces for welding procedure tests and for the qualification of<br />
welding operatives. The Employer shall bear the cost of assessing<br />
the test pieces and the associated non-destructive testing.<br />
74
15 TESTS OF MATERIALS<br />
The Steelwork Sub-Contractor, when required, shall provide and<br />
send sample pieces carriage paid to such testing stations as may<br />
be directed. Sample pieces shall be 500 x 100 mm for plates or as<br />
near that as practicable and 500 mm long of full section for<br />
structural shapes, rods etc. The sample pieces shall be selected by<br />
the Engineer and despatched to the testing station where test<br />
pieces will be made and tested.<br />
The decision of the Engineer as to the acceptance or rejection of<br />
material on reports from the testing station shall be final. The<br />
Employer will pay all fees for tests that are accepted as satisfactory.<br />
The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall pay all<br />
fees involved in unsatisfactory tests.<br />
The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall when requested by the<br />
Engineer submit two copies of the test certificates for steel ex-stock<br />
or from rolling mills.<br />
Certain steel plates as defined by the Engineer shall be<br />
ultrasonically tested to detect laminations in the material. Welded<br />
plate girders and certain division plates in member connections<br />
which are stressed in tension in the "through plate" direction are<br />
examples of critical fabrications where the integrity of the material is<br />
of paramount importance.<br />
16 EXAMINATION AND TESTING OF WELDS<br />
The Engineer or his representative shall at all reasonable times be<br />
permitted access to the Steelwork Contractor's works for the<br />
purposes of examination and testing of welded structural<br />
components.<br />
Records (such as a marked up General Arrangement drawing) must<br />
be kept of all major welds, as required by the Engineer (e.g. tension<br />
member butt welds) to ensure non-destructive testing results and<br />
welding operators responsible for the work can be identified<br />
accordingly. Hard stamping of the finished work for this purpose will<br />
not be permitted.<br />
The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall provide facilities for the<br />
Engineer or his representatives to carry out non-destructive tests on<br />
75
welded joints in completed weldments. The extent of testing shall<br />
be at the discretion of the Engineer but it is anticipated that 25% of<br />
all butt welds and 10% of all fillet welded joints shall be tested by<br />
non-destructive means.<br />
If any sample fails a specified test the consignment which it<br />
represents may be rejected in part or whole at the discretion of the<br />
Engineer.<br />
Major welds, where catastrophic collapse would follow weld failure,<br />
shall be tested 100%.<br />
The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall pay all<br />
fees involved in testing unsatisfactory welds and repaired,<br />
previously failed welds. The Employer shall pay all fees for all first<br />
time tests that are accepted as satisfactory by the Engineer.<br />
All areas of defective welding shall be cut out and made good to the<br />
entire satisfaction of the Engineer and all costs for these remedial<br />
measures shall be borne by the Main Contractor and Steelwork<br />
Sub-Contractor. The remedial work shall be deemed to include<br />
radiographical or other suitable examination to verify the<br />
acceptability of the repair.<br />
All slag shall be removed from welds to facilitate inspection.<br />
The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall give at least three days notice<br />
of his intention to despatch any major welded component to site.<br />
This stipulation is made in order that inspection can be carried out<br />
on the weldment and analysis of test results completed prior to<br />
despatch.<br />
Non-destructive testing of welds shall be in accordance with the<br />
following British Standard Specifications:-<br />
Visual Inspection .. .. BS EN 970:1997<br />
Radiographic Examination.. .. BS EN 1435:1997<br />
Ultrasonic Examination.. .. BS EN 1714:1998<br />
BS 3923 : Part<br />
2:1974<br />
Penetrant Test.. .. .. BS EN 571-1:1997<br />
Magnetic Particle Test.. .. BS EN ISO 9934-<br />
1:2001<br />
17 WEIGHTS<br />
76
All weights and variations or otherwise will be based on the listed<br />
weights of members and no allowance made for rolling margins. All<br />
steel sections shall be of "full profile" with no appreciable loss of<br />
material through corrosion or deficient rolling. If it is found that any<br />
steel weights less than 2% less than the listed weights, the<br />
Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall replace it with a satisfactory section.<br />
18 CLEANING & SURFACE PREPARATION<br />
All steelwork, except where metal coatings or anti-corrosive paint<br />
treatments are to be applied, shall be thoroughly scraped and wire<br />
brushed free from dirt, loose rust, scale and grease immediately<br />
before despatch to site.<br />
Steel which has weathered to some degree may be used but<br />
heavily pitted steel, as depicted for Grade D surfaces in the<br />
Swedish Standards SIS 05 5900 shall not be used except with the<br />
consent of the Engineer.<br />
Irrespective of the steel protection system specified elsewhere the<br />
interfaces of connections where High Strength Friction Grip Bolts<br />
are to be employed shall be thoroughly cleaned as specified and<br />
the steel surfaces shall be left unpainted.<br />
Steelwork which is to be galvanised shall be flash cleaned by<br />
pickling immediately prior to galvanising. This operation shall be<br />
carried out by immersing the fabrication in a bath of warm diluted<br />
sulphuric acid or hydrochloric acid to remove all residues of<br />
millscale, rust and foreign matter. Care should be taken to ensure<br />
complete drainage of the acid from the steel on completion of the<br />
process.<br />
All steelwork to receive metal spray, or anti-corrosive paint<br />
treatment shall be prepared by grit blasting or shot blasting of the<br />
steel surface to a "Second Quality" surface cleanliness as defined in<br />
BS 7079 Part 0:1990. "Preparation of steel substrates before<br />
application of paints and related products". The surface roughness<br />
of the blast cleaned steel should not be greater than the<br />
recommended maximum amplitude of 75 microns (0.003 inch). The<br />
steel surface profile may be further limited by the paint<br />
manufacturer's requirements and these shall be accepted as<br />
forming part of this specification.<br />
APPENDIX 1 – THE PREPARATION OF STRUCTURAL STEELWORK<br />
77
DRAWINGS<br />
A Check List for Steelwork Sub-Contractor<br />
Clause<br />
Requirement<br />
Steelwork Details:<br />
Indicate all member sizes and weights.<br />
Provide full setting out dimensions on all Plans,<br />
Cross-sections & Elevations.<br />
Provide setting out plan for holding down bolts.<br />
Provide Cross-sections/Elevations on each grid<br />
line.<br />
Provide details of all bolted and welded<br />
connections.<br />
Add a General Note to the GA Drawings detailing<br />
anti-corrosion protection system.<br />
Indicate on GA Drawings fire protection system to<br />
be applied to all steel members<br />
Erection Precautions:<br />
Add a General Note to the GA Drawings to<br />
ensure that a Schedule of all High Strength<br />
Friction Grip Bolts used on the project.<br />
Indicate on drawings the location and type of any<br />
temporary bracing which may be required for the<br />
stability of the bare steel frame. These additional<br />
braces shall ensure the stability of the partially<br />
clad building prior to the erection of all roof and<br />
vertical bracing etc.<br />
Steel:<br />
List on GA Drawings the grades of steel to be<br />
used on the project.<br />
1802SR<br />
PROTECTION OF STEELWORK AGAINST CORROSION<br />
METAL COATINGS AND ANTI-CORROSIVE PAINT TREATMENTS<br />
(a)<br />
Galvanising<br />
Galvanising treatment shall be carried out in accordance with the<br />
requirements of BS EN ISO 1461:1999 "Specification for Hot-dip<br />
Galvanised Coatings". The metal coating thickness shall be not<br />
less than 85 microns (610 grams per square metre).<br />
78
The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall make certain that all<br />
fabrications to be galvanised are free from excessive rust and<br />
traces of paint, varnish or cutting oil etc., as normal pickling<br />
operations will not remove these materials. The galvanising<br />
process shall be applied to completed structural components and<br />
holding down bolt assemblies. Unless agreed otherwise with the<br />
Engineer all galvanised steel fabrications shall be fully seal welded<br />
prior to galvanising. Intermittent welding in such fabrications is not<br />
permitted.<br />
(b)<br />
Sprayed Metal Coatings<br />
Zinc or aluminium sprayed metal coatings shall be applied strictly in<br />
accordance with the requirements of BS EN ISO 2063:2005.<br />
"Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Thermal spraying: zinc,<br />
aluminium and their alloys".<br />
The type of metal coating shall be as specified on the Contract<br />
Drawings but the coatings of either metal shall have a minimum<br />
nominal thickness of 150 microns at any point. The metal spray<br />
must be applied to blast-cleaned steel prepared as described in the<br />
preceding clause "Cleaning and Surface Preparation". Unless<br />
agreed otherwise all metal sprayed steel fabrications shall be fully<br />
seal welded prior to treatment. Intermittent welding is not permitted<br />
in metal sprayed fabrications. The finished surface of sprayed<br />
metal coatings shall be sealed before the application of paint coats<br />
in accordance with BS 5493 Table 4C Part 2.<br />
(c)<br />
Anti-Corrosive Paint Treatments<br />
The preparation of surfaces and methods of application of the paint<br />
system shall at all times be in accordance with the paint<br />
manufacturers instructions and these shall be accepted as forming<br />
part of the specification.<br />
All paint treatments shall be applied to blast-cleaned steel of<br />
"Second Quality" surface cleanliness as described in the earlier<br />
clause of this Specification dealing with "Cleaning and Surface<br />
Preparation".<br />
The blast cleaned surfaces shall be brushed clean of abrasive<br />
residues and dust etc immediately prior to painting. Sharp<br />
protuberances, surface laminations etc shall be removed by<br />
79
chipping and grinding. No blasted surface shall be left overnight<br />
before painting. All interfaces of connections, except those which<br />
are to be clamped together by friction grip bolts, shall be fully<br />
primed before assembly.<br />
The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall take all necessary precautions<br />
to satisfy the relevant sections of the Factories Act and any other<br />
regulations governing the handling and welding of primed steelwork.<br />
Care shall be taken to remove grease and oil including cutting oil,<br />
from the primed steel surfaces immediately prior to painting.<br />
If the primed surface has become contaminated with dirt or soluble<br />
salts etc, these shall be removed with clean water and the surface<br />
then allowed to dry. Handling of the coated steel shall not take<br />
place until all the coating is touch dry. Coated Steelwork shall be<br />
protected against mechanical damage during handling,<br />
transportation and erection. Fabricated steelwork which is to be<br />
stored either on site or in the works, awaiting delivery or erection,<br />
shall be kept clear of the ground and stored on suitable packing in<br />
such a way as to ensure that the minimum amount of water or dirt<br />
comes in contact with the coated steel. Suitable packings shall also<br />
be placed between layers of stocked steelwork.<br />
All sharp edges on steel sections etc. shall be removed by light<br />
grinding to improve the quality of the final paint system. Such<br />
edges in addition shall be "stripe" painted first, to allow a build up of<br />
paint on the steel edges, prior to the application of the paint<br />
generally.<br />
The following is a summary of the anti-corrosive paint system. The<br />
paint system is an International Paint Company specification. Other<br />
paint manufacturer's anti-corrosive paint systems, of equal quality<br />
and performance, may be substituted providing the Engineer's<br />
written approval is obtained.<br />
Shop primer: Apply Interplate 180 (2 pack Epoxy primer<br />
with zinc phosphate and iron oxide) to blast cleaned steel<br />
at works immediately or within 2 hours of blast cleaning. After<br />
fabrication carry out remedial treatment of damaged areas and<br />
welds the latter by blast cleaning followed by touch up with<br />
Interplate 180.<br />
Dry film thickness: 25 micrometres.<br />
- Shop Second coat: Intergard 251 (colour to be defined by CA).<br />
80
Dry film thickness: 75 micrometres.<br />
- Shop Third coat: Intergard 400 (colour to be defined by CA).<br />
Dry film thickness: 125 micrometres.<br />
- Site Preparation: Touch in shop coats and prepare surface as<br />
Clause 765.<br />
- Site top coat: Interthane 990<br />
Dry film thickness: 50 micrometres (number of coats dependant on<br />
colour)<br />
Colour: To be defined by Architect.<br />
Top Coat to be site applied to Architect’s specification.<br />
20 IDENTIFICATION<br />
All beams and stanchions etc shall be clearly marked with their<br />
numbers, together with the number of the members into which they<br />
frame at both ends. All parts shall carry a contract reference<br />
number or mark. Unless agreed otherwise with the Engineer all<br />
identification marks shall be removed or painted out after<br />
completion of steel erection and during the steel touch-up painting<br />
operation. Embossed weld metal identification markings will not be<br />
permitted on the steelwork.<br />
21 GENERAL<br />
If anything in the drawings, specifications or other documents is not<br />
clear to the Main Contractor and/or Steelwork Sub-Contractor, they<br />
shall draw the attention of the Engineer to such in writing and ask<br />
for his instructions.<br />
The workmanship and materials throughout the work shall be to the<br />
standards required by the relevant British Standard Specifications where these<br />
apply and otherwise shall be the best of their respective kinds, and shall be of<br />
quality consistent with the performance required or implied. The work shall be<br />
done to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer and the Engineer's wishes<br />
and instructions in all these matters shall be considered as forming part of the<br />
Specification for the work.<br />
81
APPENDIX 0/2: CONTRACT - SPECIFIC MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES AND<br />
TABLES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT<br />
Part A: Volume 1 Specification<br />
Clause No (etc)<br />
Alterations to be made<br />
None<br />
82
APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION FOR<br />
HIGHWAY WORKS<br />
Appendix 0/3 is comprised of two lists, A and B, of Numbered Appendices as follows:<br />
List ‘A’ is a complete list of the Numbered Appendices referred to in the Specification for Highway Works<br />
with those not adopted marked ‘Not Used’. Those identified by the letters T or C shall be completed by<br />
the Tenderer or Contractor respectively.<br />
List ‘B’ gives the list of Contract-specific Numbered Appendices devised for the Contract.<br />
Guide to Type of Number Appendices – who compiles/completes<br />
Symbol<br />
(Co) Compiler compiles : Identified in the Notes for Guidance examples by the term “Sample”<br />
included in their title.<br />
(Co/C) Compiler partially compiles and Contractor completes and returns to Overseeing<br />
Organisaion.<br />
(Co/T) Compiler partially compiles and Tenderer completes and returns with Tender.<br />
(C) Contractor completes and returns to Project Manager.<br />
(P) This indicates the Appendix is a national proforma and format must not be altered.<br />
Volume<br />
Completed<br />
Appendix<br />
Title<br />
No<br />
by<br />
No<br />
INTRODUCTION<br />
(Co)<br />
0/1<br />
Contract-specific Additional, Substitute and Cancelled<br />
Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />
Included in the Contract<br />
(Co)<br />
0/2<br />
Contract-specific Minor Alterations to Existing Clauses,<br />
Tables and Figures<br />
Included in the Contract<br />
(Co)<br />
0/3<br />
List of Numbered Appendices Referred to in the<br />
Specification and Included in the Contract<br />
(Co)<br />
0/4<br />
List of Drawings Included in the Contract<br />
(Co)<br />
0/5<br />
Special National Alterations of the Overseeing Organisations<br />
of Scotland/Wales/Northern Ireland<br />
PRELIMINARIES<br />
(Co)<br />
1/1<br />
Temporary Accommodation and Equipment for the<br />
Overseeing Organisation<br />
Not Used<br />
1/2#<br />
Vehicles for the Overseeing Organisation<br />
(Co)<br />
1/3<br />
Communication System for the Overseeing Organisation<br />
(Co)<br />
1/4<br />
Working and Fabrication Drawings<br />
(Co)<br />
1/5<br />
Testing to be Carried out by the Contractor<br />
(Co)<br />
1/6<br />
Supply and Delivery of Samples to the Overseeing<br />
Organisation<br />
(Co)<br />
1/7<br />
Site Extent and Limitations on Use<br />
83
Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />
Volume<br />
No<br />
Completed<br />
by<br />
Appendix<br />
No<br />
(Co) 1/8<br />
(Co) 1/9<br />
(Co/C) 1/10<br />
(Co/C) 1/11<br />
(Co/C) 1/12<br />
(C) Not 1/13<br />
Used 1/14<br />
Not Used 1/15<br />
(Co) 1/16<br />
Not Used 1/17<br />
(Co) 1/18<br />
Not Used 1/19<br />
Not Used 1/20#<br />
(Co) 1/21<br />
Not Used 1/22<br />
Not Used 1/23<br />
Not Used 1/24<br />
Not Used 1/25<br />
Not Used 1/26<br />
Not Used 1/27<br />
Title<br />
Operatives for the Overseeing Organisation<br />
Control of Noise and Vibration<br />
Structures to be Designed by the Contractor<br />
Structural Elements and Other Features to be Designed by<br />
the Contractor<br />
Setting Out and Existing Ground Levels<br />
Programme of Works<br />
Payment Applications<br />
Accommodation Works<br />
Privately and Publicly Owned Services and Supplies<br />
Traffic Safety and Management<br />
Temporary Diversions for Traffic<br />
Routing of Vehicles<br />
Recovery Vehicles for Breakdowns<br />
Information Boards<br />
Progress Photographs<br />
Risks to Health and Safety from Materials or Substances<br />
Quality Management System<br />
Temporary Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System for the<br />
Monitoring of Traffic<br />
Temporary Automatic Speed Camera System for the<br />
Enforcement of Mandatory Speed Limits at Road Works<br />
(TASCAR)<br />
Temporary Automatic Speed Camera System for the<br />
Enforcement of Mandatory Speed Limits at Road Works<br />
(TASCAR) - Particular Requirements<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
2/1<br />
2/2<br />
2/3<br />
2/4<br />
2/5<br />
SITE CLEARANCE<br />
List of Buildings, etc. to be Demolished or Partially<br />
Demolished<br />
Filling of Trenches and Pipes<br />
Retention of Material Arising from Site Clearance<br />
Explosives and Blasting<br />
Hazardous Materials<br />
(Co)<br />
3/1<br />
FENCING<br />
Fencing, Gates and Stiles<br />
84
Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />
Volume<br />
No<br />
Completed<br />
by<br />
Appendix<br />
No<br />
(Co) 4/1<br />
(Co) 4/2<br />
Title<br />
ROAD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (VEHICLE AND<br />
PEDESTRIAN)<br />
(05/04) Road Restraint Systems (Vehicle and Pedestrian)<br />
(05/04) Information Required to Demonstrate Compliance of<br />
Road Restraint Systems to BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2,<br />
BS EN 1317-3 and DD ENV 1317-4: 2002<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
(Co)<br />
5/1<br />
5/2<br />
5/3<br />
5/4<br />
5/5<br />
5/6<br />
5/7<br />
DRAINAGE AND SERVICE DUCTS<br />
Drainage Requirements<br />
Service Duct Requirements<br />
Surface Water Channels and Drainage Channel Blocks<br />
Fin Drains and Narrow Filter Drains<br />
Combined Drainage and Kerb Systems<br />
Linear Drainage Channel Systems<br />
Thermoplastics Structural Wall Pipes and Fittings<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
Not Used<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
Not Used<br />
(Co)<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
6/1<br />
6/2<br />
6/3<br />
6/4<br />
6/5<br />
6/6<br />
6/7<br />
6/8<br />
6/9<br />
6/10<br />
6/11<br />
6/12<br />
6/13<br />
6/14<br />
6/15<br />
EARTHWORKS<br />
Requirements for Acceptability and Testing etc. of<br />
Earthworks Materials<br />
Requirements for Dealing with Class U1B and Class U2<br />
Unacceptable Materials<br />
Requirements for Excavation, Deposition, Compaction<br />
(Other than Dynamic Compaction)<br />
Requirements for Class 3 Material<br />
Geotextiles Used to Separate Earthworks Materials<br />
Fill to Structures and Fill Above Structural Foundations<br />
Sub-formation and Capping and Preparation and Surface<br />
Treatment of Formation<br />
Topsoiling<br />
Earthwork Environmental Bunds, Landscape Areas,<br />
Strengthened Embankments<br />
Ground Anchorages, Crib Walling and Gabions<br />
Swallow Holes and Other Naturally Occurring Cavities and<br />
Disused Mine Workings<br />
Instrumentation and Monitoring Ground Improvement<br />
Limiting Values for Pollution of Controlled Waters (11/06)<br />
Limiting Values for Harm to Human Health and the<br />
Environment (11/04)<br />
85
Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />
Volume<br />
No<br />
Completed<br />
by<br />
Appendix<br />
No<br />
(Co) 7/1#<br />
(Co) 7/2<br />
Not Used 7/3<br />
(Co)<br />
7/4<br />
7/5<br />
Not Used<br />
7/6<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
7/7<br />
Not Used<br />
7/8<br />
(Co)<br />
7/9<br />
Not Used 7/10<br />
Not Used 7/11<br />
Not Used 7/12<br />
Not Used 7/13<br />
Not Used 7/14<br />
Not Used 7/15<br />
Not Used 7/16<br />
Not Used<br />
7/17<br />
7/18<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
7/19<br />
Not Used<br />
7/20<br />
Not Used<br />
7/21<br />
Not Used<br />
7/22<br />
Title<br />
ROAD PAVEMENTS – GENERAL<br />
Permitted Pavement Options (Schedules 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5)<br />
Excavation, Trimming and Reinstatement of Existing<br />
Surfaces<br />
Surface Dressing - Performance Specification (Sheets 1, 2<br />
and 3)<br />
Bond Coats, Tack Coats and Other Bituminous Sprays<br />
(Sheets 1, 2 and Binder Data Sheet)<br />
In Situ Recycling - The Remix and Repave Processes<br />
Breaking Up or Perforation of Existing Pavement<br />
Slurry Surfacing Incorporating Microsurfacing (Sheets 1, 2<br />
and 3)<br />
Not Used<br />
Cold-Milling (Planing) of Bituminous Bound Flexible<br />
Pavement<br />
Not used (11/09)<br />
Overband and Inlaid Crack Sealing Systems<br />
Arrester Beds<br />
Saw-Cut Crack and Seal Bituminous Overlays on Existing<br />
Jointed Concrete Pavements<br />
Preparation of Jointed Concrete Pavements Prior to<br />
Overlaying and Saw-Cut and Seal of the Bituminous Overlay<br />
(11/03)<br />
Saw-Cut, Crack and Seat Existing Jointed Reinforced<br />
Concrete Pavements (11/03)<br />
Cracking and Seating of Existing Jointed Unreinforced<br />
Concrete Pavements and CBM Bases<br />
Cracking Plant and Equipment Progress Record<br />
Site Specific Details and Requirements for Cold Recycled<br />
Bitumen Bound Material<br />
Site Specific Details and Requirements for Recycled Cement<br />
Bound Material<br />
Not Used<br />
Surface Dressing - Recipe Specification (Sheets 1, 2 and<br />
Binder Data Sheet)<br />
Repairs to Potholes (11/03)<br />
86
Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />
Volume<br />
No<br />
Completed<br />
by<br />
Appendix<br />
No<br />
Not Used 10/1<br />
Title<br />
ROAD PAVEMENTS - CONCRETE AND CEMENT BOUND<br />
MATERIALS<br />
Plant and Equipment for the Construction of Exposed<br />
Aggregate Concrete Surface<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
11/1<br />
11/2#<br />
KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS<br />
Kerbs, Footways and Paved Areas<br />
Access Steps<br />
(Co)<br />
Not Used<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
Not Used<br />
12/1#<br />
12/2<br />
12/3<br />
12/4<br />
12/5<br />
12/6<br />
TRAFFIC SIGNS<br />
Traffic Signs: General<br />
Traffic Signs: Marker Posts<br />
Traffic Signs: Road Markings and Studs<br />
Traffic Signs: Cones, Cylinders, FTDs and Other Traffic<br />
Delineators<br />
Traffic Signs: Traffic Signals<br />
Traffic Signs: Special Sign Requirements on Gantries<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
13/1#<br />
13/2<br />
13/3<br />
13/4<br />
13/5<br />
13/6<br />
13/7#<br />
13/8<br />
13/9<br />
ROAD LIGHTING COLUMNS AND BRACKETS, CCTV<br />
MASTS AND CANTILEVER MASTS (11/03)<br />
Information to be Provided When Specifying Lighting<br />
Columns and Brackets<br />
(Specification for Highway Works) Typical Lighting Column<br />
and Bracket Data Sheets 1 and 2<br />
Instructions for Completion of Lighting Column and Bracket<br />
Data Sheets<br />
Information to be Provided When Specifying CCTV Masts<br />
(Specification for Highway Works) Typical CCTV Mast Data<br />
Sheet<br />
Instructions for Completion of CCTV Mast Sheets<br />
Information to be Provided When Specifying Cantilever<br />
Masts (11/03)<br />
(Specification for Highway Works) Typical Cantilever Masts<br />
Data Sheets 1 and 2 (11/03)<br />
Instructions for Completion of Cantilever Masts Data Sheets<br />
(11/03)<br />
87
Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />
Volume<br />
No<br />
Completed<br />
by<br />
Appendix<br />
No<br />
Not Used 14/1<br />
Not Used 14/2<br />
Not Used 14/3<br />
Not Used 14/4<br />
Not Used 14/5<br />
Title<br />
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR ROAD LIGHTING AND<br />
TRAFFIC SIGNS<br />
Site Records<br />
Location of Lighting Units and Feeder Pillars<br />
Temporary Lighting<br />
Electrical Equipment for Road Lighting<br />
Electrical Equipment for Traffic Signs<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
15/1<br />
15/2<br />
MOTORWAY COMMUNICATIONS<br />
Motorway Communications<br />
Cable Duct Requirements<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
16/1<br />
16/2<br />
16/3<br />
16/4<br />
16/5<br />
16/6<br />
16/7<br />
16/8<br />
16/9<br />
16/10<br />
16/11<br />
16/12<br />
16/13<br />
16/14<br />
16/15<br />
16/16<br />
16/17<br />
16/18<br />
PILING AND EMBEDDED RETAINING WALLS<br />
General Requirements for Piling and Embedded Retaining<br />
Walls<br />
Precast Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Piles and<br />
Precast Reinforced Concrete Segmental Piles<br />
Bored Cast-in Place Piles<br />
Bored Piles Constructed using Continuous Flight Augers and<br />
Concrete or Grout Injection throughHollow Auger Stems<br />
Driven Cast-in-Place Piles<br />
Steel Bearing Piles<br />
Reduction of Friction on Piles<br />
Non-Destructive Methods for Testing Piles<br />
Static Load Testing of Piles<br />
Diaphragm Walls<br />
Hard/Hard Secant Pile Walls<br />
Hard/Soft Secant Pile Walls<br />
Contiguous Bored Pile Walls<br />
King Post Walls<br />
Steel Sheet Piles<br />
Integrity Testing of Wall Elements<br />
Instrumentation or Piles and Embedded Walls<br />
Support Fluid<br />
88
Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />
Volume<br />
No<br />
Completed<br />
by<br />
Appendix<br />
No<br />
(Co) 17/1<br />
Not Used 17/2<br />
(Co) 17/3<br />
(Co) 17/4<br />
(Co) 17/5<br />
Not Used 17/6<br />
Title<br />
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE<br />
Schedule for the Specification of Designed Concrete (05/06)<br />
Concrete - Impregnation Schedule<br />
Concrete - Surface Finishes<br />
Concrete - General<br />
Buried Concrete (05/02)<br />
Grouting and Duct Systems for Post-tensioned Tendons<br />
(Co)<br />
18/1<br />
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK<br />
Requirements for Structural Steelwork<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
19/1<br />
19/2<br />
19/3<br />
19/4#<br />
19/5<br />
PROTECTION OF STEELWORK AGAINST CORROSION<br />
(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P1 (New Works)<br />
Paint System Sheet<br />
Requirements for Other Work<br />
(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P2 Paint Data<br />
Sheet<br />
(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P3 Paint Sample<br />
Despatch List: Sheets 1 and 2<br />
General Requirements<br />
(Co)<br />
20/1<br />
WATERPROOFING FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES<br />
Waterproofing for Concrete Structures<br />
Not Used<br />
21/1<br />
BRIDGE BEARINGS<br />
Bridge Bearing Schedule<br />
Not Used<br />
22/1<br />
(05/04) Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
23/1<br />
23/2<br />
BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS AND SEALING OF GAPS<br />
Bridge Deck Expansion Joints Schedule<br />
Sealing of Gaps Schedule (Other than in Bridge Deck<br />
Expansion Joints)<br />
(Co)<br />
24/1<br />
BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND STONEWORK<br />
Brickwork, Blockwork and Stonework<br />
89
Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />
Volume<br />
No<br />
Completed<br />
by<br />
Appendix<br />
No<br />
Not Used 25/1<br />
Not Used 25/2<br />
Not Used 25/3<br />
Not Used 25/4<br />
Not Used 25/5<br />
Title<br />
SPECIAL STRUCTURES<br />
Requirements for Corrugated Steel Buried Structures<br />
Requirements for Reinforced Soil and Anchored Earth<br />
Structures<br />
Requirements for Pocket - Type and Grouted - Cavity<br />
Reinforced Brickwork Retaining Wall Structures<br />
Environmental Barriers<br />
Requirements for Buried Rigid Pipes for Drainage Structures<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
26/1<br />
26/2<br />
26/3<br />
MISCELLANEOUS<br />
Ancillary Concrete<br />
Bedding Mortar<br />
Cored Thermoplastic Node Markers<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
Not Used<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
(Co)<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
30/1<br />
30/2<br />
30/3<br />
30/4<br />
30/5<br />
30/6<br />
30/7<br />
30/8<br />
30/9<br />
30/10<br />
30/11<br />
30/12<br />
LANDSCAPE AND ECOLOGY<br />
General, sheets 1, 2 and 3<br />
Weed Control<br />
Control of Rabbits and Deer<br />
Ground Preparation<br />
Grass Seeding, Wildflower Seeding and Turfing<br />
Planting, sheets 1 and 2<br />
Grass, Bulbs and Wildflower Maintenance<br />
Watering<br />
Establishment Maintenance for Planting<br />
Maintenance of Established Trees and Shrubs<br />
Management of Waterbodies<br />
Special Ecological Measures<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
Not Used<br />
50/1<br />
50/2<br />
50/3<br />
50/4#<br />
50/5<br />
MAINTENANCE PAINTING OF STEELWORK<br />
(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P1<br />
(Maintenance) Paint System Sheet<br />
Requirements for Other Work<br />
(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P2 Paint Data<br />
Sheet<br />
(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P3 Paint Sample<br />
Despatch List: Sheets 1 and 2<br />
General Requirements<br />
90
List ‘B’ gives the list of Contract-specific Numbered Appendices devised for the Contract.<br />
Volume No Appendix No Appendix Title<br />
AS<br />
Quality Management Schemes<br />
91
APPENDIX 0/4: LIST OF DRAWINGS INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT<br />
1. Contract-specific Drawings Supplied to Each Tender<br />
Drawing No.<br />
073030/GA/01<br />
073030/GA/02<br />
073030/GA/03<br />
073030/GA/04<br />
073030/GA/05<br />
073030/GA/06<br />
073030/GA/07<br />
073030/GA/08<br />
073030/GA/09<br />
073030/GA/10<br />
073030/GA/11<br />
073030/GA/12<br />
073030/GA/13<br />
073030/GA/14<br />
073030/GA/15<br />
073030/GA/16<br />
073030/GA/17<br />
073030/GA/18<br />
073030/GA/19<br />
073030/GA/20<br />
073030/GA/21<br />
073030/GA/22<br />
073030/GA/23<br />
073030/GA/24<br />
073030/GA/25<br />
073030/GA/26<br />
073030/GA/27<br />
073030/GA/28<br />
073030/GA/29<br />
073030/GA/30<br />
073030/GA/31<br />
073030/GA/32<br />
073030/GA/33<br />
073030/GA/34<br />
073030/GA/35<br />
073030/GA/36<br />
83473/01<br />
83473/02<br />
Title<br />
Site Location Plan<br />
Topographical Survey Information<br />
Japanese Knotweed Area<br />
Site Boundary<br />
Proposed Road Plan<br />
Longitudinal Road Section Sheet 1<br />
Longitudinal Road Section Sheet 2<br />
Site Crossections Sheet 1<br />
Site Crossections Sheet 2<br />
Site Crossections Sheet 3<br />
Site Crossections Sheet 4<br />
Detailed Proposed Cemetery Layout Sheet 1<br />
Detailed Proposed Cemetery Layout Sheet2<br />
Detailed Site Sections 1-1 and 2-2<br />
Detailed Site Crossections 3-3<br />
Detailed Site Crossections 4-4<br />
Detailed Site Crossectins 5-5<br />
Detailed Site Crossections 6-6<br />
Detailed Site Crossections 7-7<br />
Detailed Site Crossection 8-8<br />
Detailed Site Crossection 9-9<br />
Retaining Wall Elevations Sheet1<br />
Retaining Wall Elevations Sheet 2<br />
Proposed Water Supply Layout<br />
Proposed Cable Duct Layout<br />
Proposed Drainage Plan<br />
Drainage Longsections Sheet 1<br />
Drainage Longsections Sheet 2<br />
Drainage Longsections Sheet 3<br />
Drainage Schedule<br />
Toilet Block<br />
Topsoil and Salt Silo<br />
General Arrangement Contractor Designed Retaing Walls<br />
General Arrangement Contractor Designed Steps and Ramps<br />
Miscellaneous Construction Details Sheet 1<br />
Miscellaneous Construction Details Sheet 2<br />
Landscape Proposals Sheet 1 of 3<br />
Landscape Proposals Sheet 2 of 3<br />
92
83473/03<br />
83473/04<br />
83473/05<br />
Landscape Proposals Sheet 3 of 3<br />
Landscape Details Sheet 1 of 2<br />
Landscape Details Sheet 2 of 2<br />
2. Standard Drawings<br />
(i)<br />
Supplied to Each Tenderer<br />
Drawing No.<br />
Title<br />
NONE<br />
(ii)<br />
Inspected by Tenderers<br />
The following drawings are available for inspection by tenderers at:<br />
One copy will be supplied to the Contractor<br />
Drawing No. Title Aspect required if not the whole<br />
None<br />
Drawing<br />
(iii) Brought Into the Contract by Reference<br />
HCD published by HMSO as Volume 3 of the Manual of Contract Documents for Highway Works<br />
contains the following drawings brought into the Contract by reference. Unless otherwise stated below<br />
the whole drawing is brought into the Contract.<br />
Drawing<br />
No<br />
F1<br />
F2<br />
F4<br />
F5<br />
F6<br />
Title Date Aspect/ Alternative required if<br />
not the whole Drawing<br />
Surface Water Drains – Trench and<br />
Bedding Details Dec 91<br />
Filter Drains – Trench and Bedding<br />
Details Nov 03<br />
Type 2 Chamber (Precast Concrete<br />
Manhole) May 06<br />
Type 3 Chamber (Precast Concrete<br />
Manhole) May 06<br />
Type 4 Chamber (Precast Concrete<br />
Manhole) May 06<br />
93
F7<br />
Type 5 Chamber (Precast Concrete<br />
Manhole) May 06<br />
94
APPENDIX 0/5: SPECIAL NATIONAL ALTERATIONS OF THE OVERSEEING DEPARTMENT OF<br />
NORTHERN IRELAND<br />
The following Additions, Substitutions and Cancellations and minor alterations shall be made :<br />
Additional Clauses<br />
Clause No<br />
Title and written text<br />
650A<br />
Waste Management<br />
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of all waste including but not<br />
limited to spoil detritus and the like arising from all work required by or<br />
associated with the Contract. Waste shall be transported to appropriate<br />
licensed waste disposal or recycling sites. The contractor shall be responsible<br />
for all costs, charges and taxes incurred in disposal of the waste.<br />
2 The Contractor shall be aware of and comply with current Waste Management<br />
statutory obligations. Information on Waste Management and The Controlled<br />
Waste (Duty of Care) Regulations can be obtained from the Environmental<br />
and Heritage Service (Environment Protection Section) web site –<br />
www.ehsni.gov.uk and also www.greentriangle.org/<br />
3 Under the Regulations both the Contractor and Carrier (Transferor and<br />
Transferee) shall complete Controlled Waste Transfer Notes. The format of a<br />
typical “Controlled Waste Transfer Note” is set out below.<br />
4 The Controlled Waste Transfer Notes are legal documents and the Transferor<br />
and Transferee shall keep copies of these for at least two years, and make<br />
them available for inspection by the Department of the Environment and the<br />
Employer on request. A season ticket may be used, where a series of<br />
transfers of waste of the same description is being made, to the same place by<br />
the same person. In this case, one transfer note may be used covering a<br />
series of transfers.<br />
5 A summary of transfer Notes / Season Tickets shall be provided by the<br />
Contractor at six month intervals and on Completion. The summary shall<br />
include the following minimum information:-<br />
• Details of the Transferor and Transferee<br />
• Site Location and Dates of Waste Transfer<br />
• Description of Waste and European Waste Catalogue Code<br />
95
• Quantity of Waste transferred<br />
6 If the Contractor is required to transfer material (including topsoil) from one<br />
Roads Service site to another site at a different geographical location, transfer<br />
notes shall be required. Similarly, for any materials recycled off-site, an<br />
estimate of the weight of material processed, shall be indicated on transfer<br />
notes.<br />
7 Disposal of Class U1 unacceptable material (as defined in sub-Clause 601-2)<br />
shall be carried out in accordance with the “The Controlled Waste (Duty of<br />
Care) Regulations (Northern Ireland).<br />
Under the Regulations both the Contractor and Carrier (Transferor and<br />
Transferee) shall complete Controlled Waste Transfer Notes.<br />
8 If Class U2 material (as defined in sub-Clause 601-2) is encountered in the<br />
Works, it shall be disposed of in a manner to be agreed between the Contractor<br />
and the Overseeing Organisation and comply with the current Waste<br />
Management legislation in Northern Ireland.<br />
9 Certain particularly difficult or dangerous wastes (“special wastes”) are subject<br />
to additional requirements in the Special Waste Regulations (Northern Ireland)<br />
and other legislation on Road Transport of dangerous substances. The<br />
Contractor shall seek advice from the Environmental and Heritage Service at<br />
the Duty of Care help-line - 02890 546450 or at their website<br />
http://www.ni-environment.gov.uk if he has any doubts concerning applicable<br />
legislation or the constitution of dangerous waste or the identification of any<br />
waste material.<br />
Special Waste is subject to the “The Controlled Waste (Duty of Care)<br />
regulations (Northern Ireland) and the completion of the Waste Transfer Notes /<br />
Season Ticket is required in the same way as Controlled Waste.<br />
96
Cancelled Clauses<br />
Clause No.<br />
801NIC<br />
TITLE<br />
General Requirements for Unbound, Hydraulically Bound and Other Materials<br />
850NIC Granular Sub-base Material Type 3<br />
851NIC<br />
1212NIC<br />
APPENDIX<br />
AC<br />
Filter Layers<br />
Road Markings<br />
Quality management schemes<br />
Substitute Clauses<br />
1212 NIS General<br />
1. Road markings shall be white or yellow (Classes Y1 and Y2) complying with BSEN<br />
1436 Table 6 as appropriate except where an alternative shade has been specified in<br />
Appendix 12/3. The markings shall consist of continuous or intermittent lines, figures,<br />
arrows or symbols and comply with sub-clause 2 to 10 of this clause.<br />
Statutory requirements controlling road markings are contained in the Traffic Signs<br />
Regulations (Northern Ireland) 1997 and subsequent amending Regulations.<br />
Permanent Road Marking<br />
2. Permanent road markings shall be one of the following materials and comply with<br />
the colour, location and material type requirements described in Appendix 12/3:<br />
i. Thermoplastic road marking material or paint in accordance with BS EN 1871<br />
ii. Permanent preformed road marking in accordance with BS EN 1790<br />
iii. Other materials as described in Appendix 12/3 to BS EN 1871<br />
The road marking shall be tested in road trials to the Roll over class of P5 in<br />
accordance with procedure stated in BS EN 1824 to demonstrate compliance with the<br />
performance requirements as stated below.<br />
The test report shall give particulars of the quality and quantity of the material,<br />
including drop on glass beads laid at the test site for future reference and comparison<br />
purposes should such a need arise.<br />
Road Markings shall have the following road performance as defined in BS EN 1436<br />
97
for the period of the functional life starting from the date of application or when the road<br />
is trafficked, whichever is later.<br />
The materials to be used shall be to the same mix, material quality, quantity and rate of<br />
application as used on the test site.<br />
Performance Requirements<br />
3<br />
.<br />
i<br />
The Total Wear Index, at any position in the works as selected by the<br />
Overseeing Organisation, shall not exceed 30 when assessed in accordance<br />
with the recommended test for determining wear/erosion of road markings.<br />
(See Appendix 12/3)<br />
ii<br />
White road marking shall have the following minimum standard of performance<br />
as defined in BS EN 1436 for a period of 2 years from the date of application<br />
Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />
Reference<br />
Colour Table 6 White x,y co-ordinates given<br />
Luminance Table 5 Class B2 0.30<br />
Skid Resistance Table 7 Class SI 45<br />
Retro-reflectivity Table 2 Classes Class R2 100<br />
of RL for dry<br />
markings<br />
Retro-reflectivity Table 3 Class RWO No requirement<br />
iii<br />
Yellow road marking shall have the following minimum standard of performance<br />
as defined in BS EN 1436 for a period of 2 years from the date of application.<br />
Property BSEN 1436<br />
Requirement Value<br />
Reference<br />
Colour Table 6 Yellow x,y co-ordinates<br />
Luminance Table 5 Class BI 0.20<br />
Skid Resistance Table 7 Class SI 45<br />
Retro-reflectivity Table 2 Classes of RL Class R0 No requirement<br />
for dry markings<br />
Retro reflectivity Table 3 Class RWO No requirement<br />
98
iv<br />
Unless otherwise specified all white markings shall be reflectorised by<br />
incorporation into the road marking material and to the wet surface of the<br />
marking of either solid glass beads to BSEN 1423 and BSEN 1424 or other<br />
suitable qualified materials.<br />
v<br />
Where there is a requirement for enhanced retro-reflectivity, products<br />
complying with the following retro-reflectivity performance shall be used.<br />
Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />
Reference<br />
Retro-reflectivity Table 2 Class R4 200<br />
vi Where there is a requirement for enhanced wet night visibility, products<br />
showing the following retro-reflectivity performance shall be used. (Note: It<br />
should be noted that a standard material is unlikely to satisfy this requirement.)<br />
Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />
Reference<br />
Retro-reflectivity Table 3 Class RW3 50<br />
vii<br />
Where there is a special requirement for enhanced skid resistance, products<br />
complying with the following skid resistance performance shall be used as<br />
directed by the Overseeing Organisation.<br />
Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />
Reference<br />
Skid Resistance Table 7 Class S2 50<br />
Skid Resistance Table 7 Class S3 55<br />
viii<br />
Where there is a special requirement for enhanced luminance, products<br />
complying with the following luminance requirements shall be used.<br />
Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />
Reference<br />
Luminance Table 5 Class B3 0.40<br />
ix<br />
Where there is a special requirement for enhanced retro-reflectivity for yellow<br />
products, products complying with the following retro-reflectivity requirements<br />
shall be used.<br />
Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />
Reference<br />
Retro-reflectivity Table 2 Class Rl Class R1 80<br />
99
For recommended procedures for the measurement of Luminance, Skid Resistance<br />
and Retro-reflectivity refer to Appendix 12/3.<br />
It should be noted that enhanced performance in one parameter might lead to poorer<br />
performance in other parameters. It is not possible to enhance performance in all<br />
parameters simultaneously.<br />
4.The width tolerances and thickness for screed, spray, preformed and extrusion white<br />
or yellow lines shall be in accordance with the Traffic Signs Regulations (Northern<br />
Ireland) 1997. With the exception of the road markings listed in Regulation 29 (2) of<br />
the Traffic Signs Regulations (Northern Ireland) in no case shall materials be laid<br />
more than 6mm thick. Unless otherwise specified, all white markings shall be<br />
reflectorised with glass beads in accordance with BS EN 1423 and 1424 by<br />
incorporation (apart from preformed markings) into the road marking mixture and onto<br />
the wet surface of the marking.<br />
5. The pavement shall be prepared in accordance with the following:<br />
i. Where the marking is to be applied on concrete carriageways, the transverse<br />
texturing shall be freed from all traces of curing compound by wire brushing<br />
or other approved means. Prior to the application of thermoplastic material a<br />
tack coat compatible with the road surface and the marking material shall be<br />
applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.<br />
ii.<br />
On surface dressed carriageways, all loose chippings where the marking is to<br />
be applied shall be removed prior to application.<br />
6. Road marking materials shall only be applied to surfaces that are clean and dry.<br />
Markings shall be free from raggedness at their edges and shall be laid by mechanical<br />
means to a regular alignment.<br />
Raised Rib Road Markings<br />
7. Raised Rib Road Markings shall be white lines, which are continuous over the<br />
sections where they are specified in Appendix 12/3. Where specified in Appendix<br />
12/3 gaps shall be provided for drainage purposes.<br />
8.Raised Rib Road Markings shall be in accordance with the Traffic Signs Regulations<br />
(Northern Ireland) 1997, including Diagrams 1012.2 and 1012.3, as appropriate.<br />
Spacing of the transverse raised ribs shall be 500mm or 250mm as specified in<br />
Appendix 12/3.<br />
9.Raised Rib Road markings shall not be used adjacent to hatched areas or central<br />
reserve crossings except on motorways.<br />
100
Sector Schemes<br />
10. The application of permanent road markings shall be in accordance with the<br />
Sector Scheme described in Appendix AS, incorporated within this Appendix 0/5.<br />
TEMPORARY ROAD MARKINGS<br />
11. Temporary road markings shall only be adopted with the prior approval of the<br />
Engineer. They shall either comply with sub-Clauses 1 to 6 of this Clause or if<br />
required to be removable, be constructed from a proprietary preformed road marking<br />
material complying with BS EN1790<br />
12. When temporary road markings are used on surfaces that will continue to be<br />
used by public traffic after their removal, any shadow trace remaining after their<br />
removal shall be permanently obliterated. Preformed materials shall not be used for<br />
this obliteration.<br />
13 Temporary road markings constructed from a proprietary preformed road marking<br />
material shall only be adopted in locations and on types of road surface as described<br />
in Appendix 12/3 and shall comply with any other requirement therein. The marking<br />
material shall be new and together with any primer shall be stored and installed in<br />
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and within the recommended shelf<br />
life. Preformed road markings shall only be applied to surfaces that are clean and dry.<br />
Upon removal they shall be disposed of off site and if any making good is necessary<br />
to the road surface it shall be satisfactorily carried out before the road is opened to the<br />
traffic.<br />
14 Only preformed road markings which have received type approval in accordance<br />
with the requirements of BS EN 1790 shall be incorporated into the works.<br />
ROAD MARKINGS ON POROUS ASPHALT SURFACING<br />
15. Spray Paint, thermoplastic applied by machine screed, spray or extrusion or<br />
performed road markings shall be used for carriageway markings on porous asphalt<br />
surfacing. Manual screeding shall not be permitted except for directional arrows and<br />
similar markings.<br />
REMOVAL OF ROAD MARKINGS<br />
16. The removal of road markings on surfaces that will continue to be used by traffic<br />
shall be undertaken in a manner that will avoid damage to the surface.<br />
The removal of temporary road markings shall comply with sub-Clauses 1212.12 and<br />
101
1212.13.<br />
For Bituminous surface courses, the removal of permanent road markings shall be by<br />
mechanical means or forced air abrasive (shot blasting) only. Hot Compressed Air<br />
(HCA) lance shall be permitted on other types of surface courses. In all cases the<br />
contractor shall submit details of the proposed method for the Overseeing<br />
Organisation’s consent. Advice on removal methods is given in sub-Clause NG<br />
1212.12.<br />
Masking of Road Markings<br />
17. When black masking materials are required to cover existing permanent road<br />
markings, they shall either comply with BS 7962 or have received written type<br />
approval from the<br />
Overseeing Organisation and if required to be removable, be<br />
constructed from a proprietary preformed removable black masking material.<br />
The total thickness of original and masking materials shall not exceed 6mm.<br />
MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES<br />
CLAUSE No.<br />
ALTERATIONS TO BE MADE<br />
508.8NI<br />
Gullies and Pipe Junctions<br />
Add to end of sub-Clause 508.8NI the following sentence<br />
The Contractor shall guarantee the materials and workmanship for a period<br />
not less than one year from the date when traffic was allowed over the<br />
adjusted cover or grating<br />
1101.1 NI Precast Concrete Kerbs, Channels, Edgings and Quadrants<br />
Delete “C6/8 or ST1” on lines 8 and 13 and substitute with “C8/10 or ST2”<br />
1507.31 Cable Installation<br />
Delete “or all pass as” in line 3 and substitute with “pass a”.<br />
APPENDIX F<br />
PUBLICATIONS<br />
REFERRED TO<br />
IN THE<br />
SPECIFICATION<br />
9. ACTS AND STATUTORY INSTRUMENTS<br />
(ix) Add “Construction (Use of Explosives) Regulations (Northern Ireland)” to<br />
list.<br />
(xv) Add “Wildlife (Northern Ireland) Order 1985” to list.<br />
102
APPENDIX AS<br />
QUALITY MANAGEMENT SCHEMES<br />
PART 1 (As Part 1 in Appendix A unamended)<br />
PART 2 (05/01): List of Accepted Quality Management Schemes<br />
The following is the list of accepted quality management schemes referred to in Clause 104 NI, for<br />
which accreditation is currently required by the Overseeing Organisation of Northern Ireland.<br />
Scheme 2:<br />
Scheme 2B:<br />
(05/04) Supply and Erection of Fences<br />
Vehicle Restraint Systems<br />
(05/04) (National Scheme applies)<br />
Certification<br />
Bodies:<br />
(05/04) Certification bodies which have been accredited by UKAS to issue certificates<br />
against the Sector Scheme Document (SSD) for the Supply, Installation and Repair of<br />
Vehicle Restraint Systems published by UKAS on behalf of the Vehicle Restraint<br />
Systems Sector Scheme Advisory Committee are listed in Table A/2.<br />
Specification:<br />
Vehicle Restraint Systems shall be in accordance with Series 400 of the Specification,<br />
the Drawings refered to in the Contract and BS 7669 Part 3. The scheme incorporates<br />
training for the use of Temporary Vertical Concrete Barriers (TVCB) and proprietary<br />
Temporary Steel Vehicle Restraint Systems.<br />
Notes 1. (05/04) This Scheme requires training on an approved course<br />
administered by the Lantra Awards (formerly the National Fencing<br />
Training Authority (NFTA)). All Vehicle Restraint Systems lead<br />
erectors are required to carry registration/skill cards indicating what<br />
types of fencing they have been trained to erect.<br />
2. Confirmation of the accreditation status of certification bodies should<br />
be checked with UKAS.<br />
3. (05/04) Copies of the SSD are available from UKAS Publications or on<br />
request from accredited certification bodies with whom the Supplier is<br />
registered. It can also be accessed from the UKAS web site (<br />
www.ukas.com/information_centre/publications.asp )<br />
103
4. (05/04) A Register of Assessed Companies is available from, and<br />
maintained by, Lantra Awards (formerly NFTA) on behalf of the<br />
advisory committee. A small charge will be made for the document.<br />
Scheme 6:<br />
The Manufacture, Supply and Verification of Lighting Columns and Bracket Arms<br />
(National Scheme applies)<br />
Certification<br />
Bodies:<br />
(05/04) Certification bodies which have been accredited by UKAS to issue certificates<br />
against the Sector Scheme Document (SSD) for the Manufacture, Supply and<br />
Verification of Lighting Columns and Bracket Arms published by UKAS on behalf of the<br />
Lighting Column Sector Scheme Technical Advisory Committee are listed in Table A/2.<br />
Specification:<br />
(05/04) The manufacture, supply and verification of lighting columns and bracket arms<br />
shall comply with Series 1300 of the Specification, Standard BD 26 (DMRB 2.2.1) and<br />
the Technical Approval Scheme adopted by the Overseeing Organisation.<br />
Not<br />
e:<br />
1. (05/04) Copies of the SSD are available from UKAS Publications or on<br />
request from accredited certification bodies with whom the Supplier is<br />
registered. It can also be accessed from the UKAS web site<br />
(www.ukas.com/information_centre/publications.asp ).<br />
Scheme 7:<br />
Application of Road Marking Materials and Road Studs to Road Surfaces<br />
(National Scheme applies)<br />
Certification<br />
Bodies:<br />
Certification bodies which have been accredited by UKAS to issue certificates against<br />
the Sector Scheme Document (SSD) for the Application of Road Marking Materials and<br />
Road Studs to Road Surfaces published by UKAS on behalf of the Road Marking<br />
Sector Scheme Technical Advisory Committee are listed in Table A/2.<br />
Specification:<br />
Road marking materials shall be in accordance with Series 1200 of the Specification<br />
and shall be manufactured to comply with all of the appropriate requirements of one of<br />
the following British Standards:<br />
BS EN<br />
1423<br />
BS EN<br />
1424<br />
Road marking materials – Drop on materials – Glass beads, antiskid<br />
aggregates and mixtures of the two.<br />
Road Marking Materials – Premix glass beads<br />
104
BS EN<br />
1436<br />
BS EN<br />
1463-1<br />
BS EN<br />
1463-2<br />
BS EN<br />
1790<br />
BS EN<br />
1824<br />
BS EN<br />
1871<br />
Road marking materials – Road marking performance for road users.<br />
Road marking materials – Retroreflecting road studs – Part 1, Initial<br />
performance.<br />
Road marking materials – Retroreflecting road studs – Part 2, Road test<br />
performance specifications.<br />
Road marking materials – Preformed road markings<br />
Road marking materials – Road trials<br />
Road marking materials – Physical properties<br />
Not<br />
es:<br />
1. (05/04) The scheme requires operatives to have successfully undergone a<br />
course of approved training currently managed by RSMA in conjunction<br />
with NERO and the Local Government National Training Organisation<br />
(fomerly Local Government Management Board) and/or have achieved<br />
NVQ level 2 in Road Marking. All road marking operatives are required to<br />
carry a registration/skill card indicating what types of marking they are<br />
qualified to apply.<br />
2. Confirmation of the accreditation status of certification bodies can be<br />
obtained from UKAS.<br />
3. (05/04) Copies of the SSD are available from UKAS Publications or on<br />
request from the accredited certification bodies with whom the Supplier is<br />
registered. It can also be accessed from the UKAS web site<br />
(www.ukas.com/information_centre/publications.asp ).<br />
4. (05/04) The manufacture of road marking materials to BS EN 1423, BS EN<br />
1424, BS EN 1436, BS EN 1790 and BS EN 1824 is subject to product<br />
certification requirements (see Appendix B – Marked Schemes).<br />
Scheme 13A:<br />
Supply and Application of Surface Dressings to Road Surfaces<br />
(National Scheme applies)<br />
105
Certification<br />
Bodies:<br />
Certification bodies which have been accredited by UKAS to issue certificates against<br />
the Sector Scheme Document for the Supply and Application of Surface Dressings to<br />
Road Surfaces published by UKAS on behalf of the Sector Scheme Advisory<br />
Committee for Surface Dressing are listed in Table A/2.<br />
Specification:<br />
Surface Dressing shall be in accordance with Series 900 of the Specification and the<br />
Drawings referred to in the Contract.<br />
N<br />
ot<br />
e:<br />
(05/04) Copies of the SSD are available from UKAS Publications or on request<br />
from accredited certification bodies with whom the Supplier is registered. It may<br />
also be accessed from the UKAS web site<br />
(www.ukas.com/information_centre/publications.asp)<br />
Scheme 14<br />
Production of Asphalt Mixes<br />
(National Scheme applies)<br />
Certification<br />
Bodies:<br />
Certification bodies which have been accredited by UKAS to issue certificates against<br />
the Sector Scheme Document (SSD) for the Production of Asphalt Mixes, published by<br />
UKAS on behalf of the Sector Scheme Advisory Committee for the Quality Assurance<br />
of the Production of Asphalt Mixes are listed in Table A/2.<br />
Specification:<br />
The supply of asphalt shall comply with the Specification for Highway Works, in<br />
particular Series 900 and the following British Standards.<br />
BS 594<br />
Hot rolled asphalt for roads and other paved areas.<br />
Part 1. Specification for constituent materials and asphalt mixtures.<br />
Part 2. Specification for the transport, laying and compaction of rolled<br />
asphalt.<br />
BS 598<br />
Sampling and examination of bituminous mixtures for roads and other<br />
paved areas<br />
Part 100 – Methods for sampling for analysis.<br />
Part 101 – Methods for preparatory treatment of samples for analysis.<br />
Part 102 – Analytical test methods.<br />
Part 103 – Method for the recovery of soluble bitumen for examination.<br />
106
BS<br />
4987<br />
(11/03) Coated macadam (asphalt concrete) for roads and other paved<br />
areas.<br />
BS<br />
4987-1<br />
BS<br />
4987-2<br />
Part 1. Specification for constituent materials and for mixtures.<br />
Part 2. Specification for transport, laying and compaction.<br />
Not<br />
e:<br />
(05/04) Copies of the SSD are available fromUKAS Publications or on request<br />
from the accredited certification bodies with whom the Supplier is registered. It<br />
may also be accessed from the UKAS web site<br />
(www.ukas.com/information_centre/publications.asp)<br />
Address of United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) from whom details of SSDs can<br />
be obtained:<br />
United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS)<br />
21-47 High Street<br />
Feltham<br />
Middlesex<br />
TW13 4UN<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 20 8917 8400<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 20 8917 8500<br />
Addresses of Certification Bodies:<br />
(11/03) BM TRADA Certification Limited<br />
Stocking Lane<br />
Hughenden Valley<br />
High Wycombe<br />
Buckinghamshire<br />
HP14 4NR<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 1494 569700<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 1494 565487<br />
E-Mail: enquiries@bmtrada.com<br />
107
British Standards Institution<br />
389 Chiswick High Road<br />
London<br />
W4 4AL<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 20 8996 9000<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 20 8996 7400<br />
E-Mail: info@bsi.org.uk<br />
(11/03) Bureau Veritas Quality International (BVQI) Ltd<br />
2 nd Floor<br />
Tower Bridge Court<br />
224-226 Tower Bridge Road<br />
LONDON<br />
SE1 2TX<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 020 7661 0700<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 020 7661 0787<br />
E-Mail: info@bvqi.com<br />
(11/03) European Quality Assurance (EQA) Ltd<br />
Navigation House<br />
48 Millgate<br />
Newark<br />
Nottinghamshire<br />
NG24 4TY<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 1636 611226<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 1636 611704<br />
E-Mail: eqaltd@aol.com<br />
ISOQAR Ltd<br />
First Floor<br />
West Point<br />
501 Chester Road<br />
Manchester<br />
M16 9HU<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 161 877 6914<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 161 877 6915<br />
E-Mail: enquiries@isoqar.com<br />
Hiramford<br />
108
(11/03) Lloyd’s Register Quality Assurance (LRQA) Ltd<br />
Middlemarch Office Village<br />
Siskin Drive<br />
Coventry<br />
CV3 4FJ<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 2476 88 2222<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 2476 63 9493<br />
E-Mail: enquiries@lrqa.co.uk<br />
National Quality Assurance (NQA) Ltd<br />
Warwick House<br />
Houghton Hall Park<br />
Houghton Regis<br />
Dunstable<br />
LU5 5ZX<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 1582 539 000<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 1582 539 000<br />
E-Mail: enquiries@nqa.com<br />
(11/03) Moody International Certification Ltd<br />
Salisbury House<br />
Stephenson’s Way<br />
The Wyvern Business Park<br />
DERBY<br />
DE21 6LY<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 8707 529001<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 1332 675020<br />
E-Mail: jeff@moodycert.co.uk<br />
(11/03) QA International Certification Ltd<br />
Suite 2-4<br />
Cleveland Hall<br />
Cleveland Street<br />
Darlington<br />
Co Durham<br />
DL1 2PE<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 1325 384272<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 1325 480980<br />
E-Mail: ukregister@aol.com<br />
109
(11/03) SGS United Kingdom Ltd<br />
SGS House<br />
217-221 London Road<br />
Camberley<br />
Surrey<br />
GU15 3EY<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 1276 691133<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 1276 691155<br />
E-Mail: ukenquiries@sgs.com<br />
UK Certification Authority for Reinforcing Steels (CARES)<br />
Pembroke House<br />
21 Pembroke Road<br />
Sevenoaks<br />
Kent<br />
TN13 1XR<br />
Telephone: +44 (0) 1732 450000<br />
Facsimile: +44 (0) 1732 455917<br />
E Mail: general@ukcares.com<br />
110
SERIES 100 – PRELIMINARIES<br />
APPENDIX 1/1: TEMPORARY ACCOMMODATION AND EQUIPMENT FOR THE PROJECT<br />
MANAGER<br />
The temporary accommodation and equipment for the Project Manager shall be as described below:<br />
Accommodation Required<br />
The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval an office layout based on the accommodation<br />
description and shall then provide and maintain to the satisfaction of the Project Manager for the sole<br />
use of the Supervisor and his staff an office building of not less than 15 square metres total floor area.<br />
The building shall have a five-lever mortice lock and four keys are to be provided. The entrance door<br />
must contain a weatherproof letterbox at least 300 mm wide x 100 mm deep.<br />
The building shall consist of the following accommodation.<br />
Description<br />
Area (sq. metres)<br />
Office 10<br />
Kitchen 3<br />
Room with toilet and wash hand basin 3<br />
Before erecting the offices the area to be used shall be cleared of all turf and vegetation, trimmed to falls<br />
and drained to prevent accumulation of surface water. A hard standing car park for at least 4 cars shall<br />
be provided adjacent to the office with a hard track to the highway and a hard path to the office<br />
entrances.<br />
Fittings and Furnishings<br />
A supply of pure (drinking) water and an electricity supply sufficient to operate the various items listed in<br />
the Appendix or otherwise required in the Contract at any time is to be provided.<br />
The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 must be complied with in all respects in the furnishing of the<br />
Office and at any other locations on site where applicable.<br />
The buildings shall be in a good state of repair with clean and sound floor coverings and shall be<br />
weatherproof to the Project Manager’s satisfaction. It shall be furnished and equipped as detailed in the<br />
schedule below.<br />
Duration<br />
For the duration of the Contract.<br />
111
Fittings and Furnishings of Accommodation<br />
1 3 Drawer. desk with at least one lockable drawer.<br />
2 One armchair suitable for the above desk.<br />
3 4 Desk chairs.<br />
4 6 m of shelving (minimum width 225 mm)<br />
5 4 No hat and coat pegs.<br />
6 Adequate electric heating units to achieve the minimum temperature required under the<br />
Workplace (Health Safety and Welfare) Regs 1992.<br />
7 Windows complying both in area and ability to open with the Building Standards Regulations 1981<br />
with blinds and fitted with security grilles.<br />
8 Artificial electric lighting to achieve a minimum of 500 lux measured at the horizontal tops of<br />
desks.<br />
9 Lavatory (3 m x 1 m) with<br />
1 No low flush W.C.<br />
1 No wash hand basin with hot and cold tap supply.<br />
1 No mirror (600 mm x 600 mm).<br />
1 No paper towel dispenser with towels.<br />
10 Telephone/fax/photocopier connected exclusively to STD.<br />
11 Laptop Hardware<br />
Dell Precision Mobile Workstation M6500 Essential with:<br />
• English Genuine Windows® 7 Professional (64Bit OS) with recovery DVD<br />
• One Intel® Core i7-840QM(1.86GHz,8MB,Quad Core,45W) Memory runs at 1333MHz<br />
• 320GB Serial ATA (7200RPM) HDD<br />
• 8GB 1333MHz DDR3 Dual Channel (2x4GB)<br />
• 8X DVD+/-RW Drive Tray Load with Optical Software Included<br />
• 1GB nVIDIA FX2800M (with 1GB dedicated memory)<br />
• 3Yr ProSupport and Next Business Day On-Site Service<br />
• 17in Widescreen WUXGA (1920x1200)<br />
• Carry Case<br />
Laptop Software<br />
• Microsoft Office 10 Professional<br />
• McAfee SaaS Endpoint Protection<br />
• Autodesk Autocad LT 2011<br />
Accessories<br />
• HP Officejet Pro K8600 Colour Ink-jet printer - 35 ppm - 250 sheets (A3)<br />
112
• High speed mobile internet connection via usb dongle if landline internet connection is<br />
not available.<br />
• 16gb USB flash drive<br />
• Optical wireless Logitech mouse<br />
• Wireless keyboard<br />
• Port replicator (Docking station)<br />
11 1 No. approved maximum and minimum thermometer graduated in degrees centigrade.<br />
12 Hot running water in kitchen and at hand basin near toilet.<br />
13 Electric cooker.<br />
14 Fridge<br />
15 Microwave cooker.<br />
16 10 No. mugs and spoons.<br />
17 3 No. carbon dioxide fire extinguishers mounted on wall brackets.<br />
18 1 No. first aid kit complying with the requirements of the Health and Safety (First Aid) Regulations<br />
1981 for 1 to 5 employees.<br />
19 2 No. hand towels, tea towels (to be cleaned regularly) also supply of soap, washing up liquid etc.<br />
20 1 No. square mouth shovel.<br />
21 1 No. fire resistant office safe/combination lock filing cabinet.<br />
Protective clothing shall be provided:<br />
1 Approved safety helmets, white - 6 No<br />
2 Water-resistant leather boots with steel toe caps - 2 pair<br />
3 Wellington Boots with steel toe caps - 2 pair<br />
4 Breathable Weatherproof Suits with fleece lining - 3 No<br />
5 High visibility safety waist coats – 6 No<br />
Survey equipment shall be provided:<br />
1 One Sokkia, or approved equal, total survey station, Set 4C, with reflector, tripods and detail pole<br />
2 One automatic level with telescopic tripod and push button compensator control<br />
3 One 5 m long levelling staff graduated in metres and centimetres<br />
4 Two 5 metre steel tapes graduated in metres and millimetres<br />
5 Two 30 metre long plastic tapes graded in metres and millimetres<br />
6 One 50 metre long plastic tape graded in metres and millimetres<br />
7 Six, 2 metre long steel tipped ranging rods<br />
8 One metre long spirit level and one plumb-bob complete with six metres of line<br />
9 Wooden survey pegs, wax crayons, spray paint and nails as required<br />
10 Canon IXUS 210 Digital camera with 16gb memory card and case<br />
11 Photographic printing paper<br />
12 No 16 oz claw hammer<br />
13 1 No 10 lb sledge hammer<br />
14 1 set of manhole cover lifting keys<br />
113
All the above survey equipment, office fittings and furniture shall be supplied for the sole use of the<br />
Project Managers Staff for the duration of the Contract but shall remain the property of the Contractor<br />
who shall maintain it and replace it if damaged. The Contractor shall maintain the survey instruments in<br />
adjustment.<br />
The total survey station and the automatic level will be supplied with calibration certificates to show that<br />
they have been recalibrated immediately prior to use on this contract.<br />
The Contractor shall comply with all statutory regulations with regard to:<br />
1 Bunding of oil storage.<br />
2 Bunded area for fuelling of plant.<br />
3 Run-off from compound<br />
4 Chemical toilets<br />
5 Collecting and disposal of waste from site (i.e. netted skips)<br />
The Contractor shall comply with the Environmental Management Plan and develop this plan as<br />
required.<br />
114
APPENDIX 1/3:<br />
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR THE PROJECT MANAGER<br />
The Contractor shall supply two new mobile phones for the sole use of the Project Managers<br />
Representatives. The telephones shall be supplied with spare batteries, battery re-charging units and<br />
hands free kits. The telephones shall be provided for the duration of the contract.<br />
All rental and call charges to be paid for by the Contractor. The terms of the rental agreement for the<br />
telephones shall be acceptable to the Project Manager. The Contractor shall demonstrate the<br />
acceptability of the proposed phones and that coverage can be achieved across the full extent of the Site<br />
before they will be considered acceptable to the Project Manager.<br />
115
APPENDIX 1/4:<br />
WORKING AND FABRICATION DRAWINGS<br />
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager detailed working drawings for the following elements:<br />
Series Description Required by:<br />
2500<br />
Contractor Designed<br />
Retaining Walls<br />
4 weeks before start of erection of structure on site; see<br />
also requirements set out in Appendices 1/10 & 6/10.<br />
Design calculations and certificate required.<br />
1700 and<br />
1800<br />
100<br />
Contractor Designed<br />
steps and ramps<br />
Traffic Management<br />
proposals<br />
4 weeks before start of construction of slopes on site;<br />
see also requirements set out in Appendices 1/10 & 6/10<br />
Design calculations and certificate required.<br />
4 weeks prior to commencement on site.<br />
Reference should be made to Appendices 1/17 & 1/18.<br />
400<br />
Pedestrian guard rails<br />
Safety Fences<br />
4 weeks before fabrication of rails<br />
4 weeks before installation of safety fence<br />
400 Road Restraint Systems<br />
4 weeks prior to commencement on site.<br />
Systems Approval documentation will be required for all<br />
required systems. Such documentation to be submitted<br />
with fabrication drawings.<br />
116
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR<br />
General<br />
1. The Contractor shall carry out testing in accordance with Table 1/5 in this Appendix.<br />
2. Tests comparable to those specified in this Appendix will be necessary for any equivalent work,<br />
goods or materials proposed by the Contractor (see Clause 105.4).<br />
3. (N) indicates that a UKAS (NAMAS) sampling and test report or certificate is required.<br />
4. Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix test certificates for work, goods on materials as<br />
scheduled under any one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.<br />
5. Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix tests for work, goods on materials as scheduled under<br />
any one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.<br />
6. All laboratory testing shall be carried out by a testing house which is independent of the<br />
Contractor and is not within the same group of companies as the Contractor.<br />
7. Special National Alterations of the Overseeing Departments of Scotland, Wales or Northern<br />
Ireland are to be regarded as part of the main Specification clauses for the purposes of testing.<br />
8. Cube strengths are not required for concrete complying with Clause 2602.<br />
9. The main specification for testing is the Specification for Highways Works. Testing under Series<br />
500 will also require testing as detailed in the Civil Engineering Specification for the Water<br />
Industry 6 th Edition June 2004.<br />
117
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Test Certificate<br />
Comments<br />
Series 300<br />
306 Permanent fencing Quality management<br />
Concrete components Cover to reinforcement 1 per consignment<br />
(maximum 1 per 100<br />
components) (BS1722)<br />
scheme applies<br />
308 Gates and stiles Quality management<br />
Reinforced concrete post Cover to reinforcement 1 per consignment<br />
(maximum 1 per 100<br />
components<br />
(BS 3470)<br />
scheme applies<br />
308 &<br />
311<br />
Preservation of timber<br />
Full sapwood<br />
penetration<br />
As required in sub-<br />
Clause 311.2(v)<br />
Required for each<br />
batch<br />
Quality management<br />
scheme applies<br />
118
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Test Certificate<br />
Comments<br />
Series 400<br />
402 Welding Welding procedures<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
Welder qualifications<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
Production testing<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
(Every seven years) Required Quality management<br />
As required in sub-<br />
Clause 402.6 (iii)<br />
As required in sub-<br />
Clause 402.6 (iv)<br />
Welded joints Destructive testing To SHW sub-Clause<br />
403 Anchorages and attachment<br />
systems for use in drilled holes<br />
Ultimate tensile load<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
402.6(v) and 402.6(vi)<br />
404 Anchorages in drilled holes Loading test on site As required in Appendix<br />
Post foundations<br />
Required<br />
406 Vehicle parapets Required (BS<br />
407 Anchorages and attachment<br />
systems for use in drilled holes<br />
Ultimate tensile load<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
409 Vehicle parapet posts Production testing as<br />
specified in BS 6779-1<br />
1998 (AMD No 14290,<br />
21 March 2003)<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
410 Anchorages in drilled holes On-site tensile load test As required in<br />
Appendix 4/1<br />
4/1<br />
6779-1 1998<br />
(Amd. No.14290<br />
21 March 2003))<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
scheme applies<br />
For details see NG<br />
402(N)<br />
To provide well attested<br />
and documented<br />
evidence, to SHW sub-<br />
Clause 403.15<br />
Quality management<br />
scheme applies<br />
To provide well attested<br />
and<br />
documented evidence<br />
Certification in<br />
accordance with Clause<br />
409 is required<br />
119
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Test<br />
Certificate<br />
Comments<br />
Series 500<br />
501 Pipes for drainage and service ducts Product certification<br />
scheme applies<br />
Vitrified Clay ` Required for<br />
pipes not quality<br />
Concrete-<br />
PC/SRC<br />
Concrete<br />
Prestressed<br />
Iron- cast<br />
Not<br />
exceeding<br />
900 mm dia<br />
marked by an<br />
UKAS or<br />
equivalaent<br />
accredited body<br />
listed in Appendix<br />
B<br />
Iron- ductile<br />
PVC-U<br />
GRP<br />
Plastics, see Table 5/1<br />
Corrugated Steel Manufacturers test Required<br />
Corrugated<br />
steel bitumen<br />
protection<br />
Not<br />
exceeding<br />
900 mm<br />
dia<br />
(AASHTO)<br />
Other materials Required BBA certification (or<br />
equivalent) applies<br />
503 Pipe Bedding Grading and fines<br />
content<br />
Water-soluble sulphate<br />
(WS) content (N)<br />
Oxidisable sulfides<br />
(OS) content and toal<br />
potential sulphate<br />
(TPS) content (N)<br />
Resistance to<br />
fragmentation (N)<br />
1 per week Required<br />
5 per source<br />
5 per source<br />
1 per source<br />
120
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause<br />
Work, Goods or<br />
Material<br />
Test<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Test<br />
Certificate<br />
Comments<br />
Series 500 (continued)<br />
505 Filter medium backfill Plastic index (N) 1 per source Required<br />
Resistance to fragmentation (N) 1 per source<br />
Water-soluble sulphate (WS) content 5 per course<br />
(N)<br />
Oxidisable sulfides (OS) content and 5 per source<br />
total potential sulphate (TPA) content<br />
(N)<br />
Grading and fines content<br />
1 per week<br />
Permeability (N)<br />
1 per source<br />
506 Sealing existing<br />
drains<br />
Concrete<br />
Grout<br />
507 Chambers<br />
Precast concrete<br />
Product certification<br />
scheme<br />
Corrugated<br />
galvanized steel<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests) Required Product certification<br />
scheme<br />
Manhole steps<br />
Steel fitments<br />
Covers, grates<br />
and frames<br />
Product certification<br />
scheme applies<br />
Cover bolts<br />
Quality management<br />
scheme applies<br />
508 Gullies and pipe<br />
junction<br />
Product certification<br />
applies<br />
Precast concrete<br />
Clay<br />
Cast iron and<br />
steel<br />
509 Watertightness of<br />
joints<br />
Air test<br />
Pressure test<br />
All pipelines with<br />
watertight joints<br />
All watermains<br />
Required Specification for the<br />
Water Industry Section 7<br />
121
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 500 (continued)<br />
512 Backfill to pipe bays Grading 1 per 50 tonnes (min of Required<br />
3)<br />
Water-soluble sulphate<br />
(WS) content (N)<br />
Oxidisable sulfides (OS)<br />
content and total<br />
potential sulfate (TPA)<br />
content (N)<br />
5 per source<br />
5 per source<br />
Minimum to allow for<br />
natural variability of<br />
sulphur compounds<br />
513 Permeable backing to earth<br />
retaining structures<br />
Precast hollow concrete<br />
blocks<br />
Plastic index (N) 1 per source Required<br />
Water-soluble sulphate 5 per source Required<br />
(WS) content (N)<br />
Oxidisable sulfides (OS) 5 per source<br />
content and total<br />
potential sulphate (TPS)<br />
content (N)<br />
Resistance to<br />
1 per source<br />
fragmentation (N)<br />
Grading<br />
1 per 200 tonnes (min<br />
of 3)<br />
Permeability (N)<br />
1 per source<br />
(Manufacturer’s test)<br />
Required<br />
514 Fin Drains Manufacturer’s test Required BAA Certification (or<br />
equivalent) applies<br />
515 Narrow filter drains Manufacturer’s test Required BAA Certification (or<br />
Geotextile, pipes and<br />
fittings<br />
equivalent) applies<br />
Granular fill Plastic index (N) 1 per source<br />
Resistance to<br />
fragmentation (N)<br />
Water-soluble sulphate<br />
5 per source<br />
(WS) content (N)<br />
Oxidisable sulfides (OS)<br />
5 per source<br />
content and total<br />
potential sulphate (TPS)<br />
content (N)<br />
Grading and fines<br />
1 per week (Min of 3)<br />
contents<br />
Permeability (N)<br />
1 per source<br />
516 Combine drainage and kerb<br />
Load test<br />
A minimum of 1 test<br />
Required<br />
Certification that the<br />
systems<br />
and not less than 1 test<br />
systems comply with<br />
per 1000 m for each<br />
Clause 516 is required<br />
type and source<br />
122
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Frequency of<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Testing<br />
Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 500 (continued)<br />
517 Linear drainage systems Load test A minimum of 1 test and<br />
not less than 1 test per<br />
100 m for each type and<br />
Required<br />
Certification that the<br />
systems comply with<br />
Clause 517 is required<br />
source<br />
518 Thermoplastic structured wall<br />
pipes and fittings<br />
(Manufacturer’s test) Required BAA Certification (or<br />
equivalent) applies<br />
123
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Series 600<br />
601, Acceptable material<br />
631 to Class General Description<br />
637, 1 General granular fill Grading/uniformity<br />
Twice a week<br />
640<br />
coefficient<br />
mc/MCV (N)<br />
2 per 1000 m 3 up to<br />
max of 5 per day<br />
SMC of chalk (N)<br />
Twice a week<br />
1C only Resistance to fragmentation Weekly<br />
(N)<br />
2 General cohesive fill Grading Twice a week<br />
mc/MCV/PL Undrained 2 per 1000 m 3 up to<br />
shear strength (N)<br />
max of 5 per day<br />
3 General Chalk fill mc (N) 2 per 1000 m 3 up to<br />
max of 5 per day<br />
4 Landscape fill Grading/mc/MCV (N) Daily<br />
5 Topsoil Grading Daily<br />
Test Certificate<br />
Required<br />
Comments<br />
6 Selected granular fill Grading/uniformity<br />
coefficient<br />
1 per 400 tonnes<br />
PL/LL(N)<br />
Resistance to fragmentation<br />
(N)<br />
Daily<br />
Weekly for on-site<br />
material*<br />
SMC (N)<br />
omc/mc, mc or MCV (N)<br />
Weekly<br />
1 per 400 tonnes<br />
Organic matter/ water<br />
soluble sulfate (WS) (N)<br />
Oxidisable sulfides (OS)<br />
and total potential sulphate<br />
(TPS) content (N)<br />
pH/ chloride ion contents<br />
(N)<br />
Resistivety (N)<br />
Undrained and drained<br />
shear parameters<br />
Weekly<br />
Weekly<br />
Weekly<br />
6F4<br />
and<br />
6F5<br />
Size designation and overall<br />
grading catogory<br />
Maximum fines and<br />
oversize catogories<br />
Volume stability of blast<br />
furnace slag<br />
Volume stability of steel<br />
(BOF and EAF) slag<br />
Other aggregate<br />
requirements<br />
1 per week<br />
1 per week<br />
6 monthly<br />
6 monthly<br />
Annex C of BS EN<br />
13242<br />
124
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Test Certificate<br />
Comments<br />
Series 600 ( Continued)<br />
Laboratory dry density and<br />
optimum water content<br />
7 Selected cohesive fill Grading/ mc/MCV/ bulk<br />
Daily<br />
Required<br />
density (N)<br />
SMC of chalk (N)<br />
Twice a week<br />
PL/LL(N)<br />
Daily<br />
Organic matter/ water<br />
Twice a week or daily<br />
soluble sulfate (WS) (N)<br />
where sulphates are<br />
expected<br />
Oxidisable sulfides (OS)<br />
Twice a week or daily<br />
and total potential sulphate<br />
where sulphates are<br />
(TPS) content (N)<br />
expected<br />
pH/ chloride ion contents<br />
Weekly<br />
(N)<br />
Resistivety (N)<br />
[As Required]<br />
Undrained and drained<br />
[As Required]<br />
shear parameters<br />
Permeability (N)<br />
[As Required]<br />
8 Miscellaneous fill mc/MCV (N) Daily<br />
9 Stabilised materials Pulverisation 1 per lane width per<br />
mc/MCV/PL (N)<br />
Bearing ratio (N)<br />
200 m length<br />
Pulvarised ash Chemical analysis 1 per consignment<br />
Furnace bottom ash Grading 1 per 300 tonnes<br />
Fill adjecent to cementatious<br />
Water-soluble sulphate<br />
1 per 400 tonnes or per<br />
materials or metalic items<br />
(WS) content, oxidisable<br />
location if less than 400<br />
sulfides (OS) and total<br />
tonnes<br />
potential sulphate (TPS)<br />
content (N)<br />
Earthworks material beneath<br />
surface of a road or paved<br />
central<br />
reserve<br />
Frost heave (N)<br />
Required<br />
(i) Off site source<br />
1 every four months*<br />
(ii) On site source<br />
As required<br />
125
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 600 (continued)<br />
609<br />
621<br />
Geotextiles Tensile load 1 per 400 square<br />
Permeability<br />
Pore size<br />
metres<br />
Required<br />
612 Compaction of fills Required<br />
Method compaction Field dry density (N) As required<br />
End product compaction<br />
614 Cement stabilisation to form<br />
capping<br />
Optimum mc (2.5 kg<br />
rammer/vibrating<br />
hammer method) (N)<br />
Field dry density (N)<br />
Rate of spread of cement<br />
Each class or sub class<br />
of material*<br />
1 per 400 tonnes<br />
1 per 500 square<br />
meters of cement<br />
spread<br />
Required<br />
615<br />
641<br />
643<br />
622<br />
638<br />
639<br />
Lime stabilisation to form capping Rate of spread of lime 1 per 500 square<br />
meters of lime spread<br />
Earthworks for reinforced soil and<br />
anchored earth structures<br />
Available lime content<br />
Redox potential<br />
Each source of lime<br />
weekly during the<br />
stabilisation operation<br />
5 locations withinthe<br />
affected area<br />
Drainage layers Grading 1 per 400 tonnes<br />
Chemical Analysis<br />
Required<br />
Reinforcing elements Coeff. Of friction Each type of element<br />
with each type of fill<br />
Anchor elements<br />
Adhesion<br />
624 Ground anchorages Proof loading As required in Appendix<br />
6/10<br />
Required<br />
626 Gabions Required<br />
Fill Grading 1 per 400 tonnes<br />
Geomesh<br />
PVC coated wire<br />
642 Earthworks materials for<br />
corrugated steel buried<br />
structures<br />
10% fine values (N) Each class or sub class<br />
Constrained soil<br />
modulus (M)<br />
of material<br />
1 per 400 square<br />
metres<br />
3 on each side<br />
ofeach structure<br />
Required<br />
(ASTM G23)<br />
Required<br />
126
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Test Certificate<br />
Comments<br />
Series 800<br />
801<br />
General requirements for unbound<br />
Water-soluble sulphate<br />
1 per 400 tonnes or<br />
Required<br />
803<br />
mixtures for adjacent to cement bound<br />
(WS) content (N)<br />
per location if less than<br />
804<br />
materials, concrete pavements,<br />
400 tonnes<br />
805<br />
806<br />
structures or products<br />
Oxidisable sulfides (OS)<br />
content and total<br />
1 per 400 tonnes or<br />
per location if less than<br />
potential sulphate (TPA)<br />
400 tonnes<br />
content (N)<br />
Unbound mixture beneath surface of a<br />
Frost heave (N)<br />
1 per source<br />
road or paved central reserve<br />
Grading and fines<br />
1 per week<br />
content<br />
Plastic index (N)<br />
Resistance to<br />
6 monthly<br />
fragmentation (N)<br />
Resistance to wear<br />
micro-Deval test<br />
Resistance to freezing<br />
1 per source<br />
and thawing<br />
(magnesium sulphate<br />
soundness) (N)<br />
Water absorption (N)<br />
Volume stability of blast<br />
6 monthly<br />
furnace slags<br />
Volume stability of steel<br />
6 monthly<br />
(BOF and EAF) slags<br />
CBR (N)<br />
1 per sources and then<br />
monthly<br />
OMC/mc (N)<br />
Density (N)<br />
Water absorption (N)<br />
821,<br />
822,<br />
823,<br />
830,<br />
831,<br />
832,<br />
834,<br />
835,<br />
840<br />
Cement and other<br />
Hydraulically Bound Mixtures<br />
(HBM)<br />
Cement and other<br />
Hydraulically Bound<br />
Mixtures<br />
(HBM)<br />
Coefficient of linear<br />
expansion<br />
Tests for laboratory<br />
mixture design<br />
Tests specified in<br />
Table 8/14 and<br />
Table 8/15<br />
Tests for laboratory<br />
mixture design<br />
Required<br />
127
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Frequency of<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Testing<br />
Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 900<br />
901<br />
925<br />
937<br />
938<br />
943<br />
Aggregates for bituminous materials Required National quality<br />
management sector<br />
schemes apply<br />
Resistance to<br />
fragmentation (hardness)<br />
Resistance to freezing and<br />
thawing (durability<br />
Cleanness<br />
Resistance to<br />
Monthly<br />
fragmentation (N)<br />
Soundness (N)<br />
1 per source<br />
Water absorption (N)<br />
Sieve test (mass Monthly<br />
passing 0.063 mm<br />
sieve) (N)<br />
Washing and sieving<br />
method to be used<br />
Shape Flakiness index (N) Monthly<br />
Blastfurnace slag Bulk density (N) 1 per 500 tonnes<br />
Soundness (N)<br />
Once every 4 months<br />
Dicalcium silicate 1 per 500 tonnes<br />
disintegration (N)<br />
Iron disintegration (N)<br />
Steel slag Bulk density 1 per 500 tonnes Required<br />
Volume stability (N) 1 per 500 tonnes<br />
Coarse aggregate for Resistance to polishing 1 per source<br />
surface courses<br />
(PSV) (N)<br />
Resistance to surface 1 per source<br />
abrasion (AAV) (N)<br />
Binders for bituminous materials Penetration (N)<br />
Softening point (N)<br />
1 per 750 tonnes<br />
1 per 750 tonnes<br />
Required National quality<br />
management section<br />
schemes apply.<br />
Modified binders should<br />
have a BBA HAPAS<br />
Roads and Bridges<br />
Certificate. In the event<br />
that no such<br />
Certificates have been<br />
issued, then in the<br />
interim, only modified<br />
binders undergoing<br />
BBA assessment<br />
should be considered<br />
for approval by the<br />
Project Manager.<br />
128
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 900 (Continued)<br />
903 to<br />
907,<br />
909 to<br />
912,<br />
914,<br />
916,<br />
925,<br />
926,<br />
929,<br />
937,<br />
938,<br />
942,<br />
943,<br />
946 to<br />
948<br />
Bituminous mixtures Grading (N) For Audit Test purpose<br />
929 Base and Binder Course<br />
Asphalt Concrete (Design<br />
Mixtures)<br />
Binder Content (N)<br />
Permanent Works -<br />
In situ air void<br />
content (N)<br />
Permanent Works -<br />
Refusal air void<br />
content (N)<br />
Permanent Works -<br />
Deformation<br />
resistance<br />
only<br />
Required<br />
National Highway Sector<br />
Schemes apply.<br />
Deformation<br />
resistance (design)<br />
Stiffness (design)<br />
930 EME 2 Permanent Works -<br />
In situ air void<br />
content (N)<br />
Richness modulus<br />
(design)<br />
Duriez (design)<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
The test certificate is the<br />
CE Mark for the mixture<br />
The test certificate is the<br />
CE Mark for the mixture<br />
Deformation<br />
Resistance (design)<br />
Stiffness (design)<br />
911 Hot Rolled Asphalt surface<br />
course (Design Mixtures)<br />
Design Binder<br />
content<br />
1 per source Required The test certificate is the<br />
CE Mark for the mixture<br />
915 Coated chippings for<br />
application to Hot Rolled<br />
Asphalt Surfacings<br />
Hot sand test (N) 1 per source National Highway Sector<br />
Schemes apply.<br />
Rate of spread (N)<br />
129
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 900 (Continued)<br />
921 Surface macrotexture Volumetric Patch (N) Required<br />
924 High friction surfaces Quality control checks As required in sub-<br />
Aggregate<br />
937 Stone mastic asphalt<br />
(SMA) binder course and<br />
regulating course<br />
System coverage<br />
Resistance to polishing<br />
(PSV) (N)<br />
Permanent Works - In<br />
situ air void content (N)<br />
Clause 924.5<br />
As required in sub-<br />
Clause 924.6<br />
1 per source and as<br />
required for coated<br />
chippings in sub-Clause<br />
915.3<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
BBA HAOAS Roads and<br />
Bridges certification (or<br />
equivalent) applies<br />
Permanent Works -<br />
Deformation resistance<br />
Binder drainage test<br />
(design)<br />
Required<br />
The test certificate is the<br />
CE Mark for the mixture<br />
Deformation resistance<br />
(design)<br />
942 Thin surface course<br />
systems<br />
943 Hot Rolled Asphalt<br />
surface course and binder<br />
course (performancerelated<br />
design mixtures)<br />
General properties Required The test certificate is in<br />
the form of a BBA<br />
HAPAS Certificate<br />
Permanent Works -<br />
In situ air void content<br />
(N)<br />
Permanent Works -<br />
Deformation resistance<br />
Required<br />
Deformation resistance<br />
(design)<br />
Required<br />
The test certificate is the<br />
CE Mark for the mixture<br />
918 Slurry surfacing<br />
incorporating microsurfacing<br />
Binder<br />
Modified binders should<br />
have a BBA HAPAS<br />
Roads and Bridges<br />
Certificate. In the event<br />
that no such Certificates<br />
have been issued, then<br />
in the interim, only<br />
modified<br />
binders undergoing BBA<br />
assessment should be<br />
considered for approval<br />
by the Overseeing<br />
Organisation.<br />
Product Identification<br />
Per product per<br />
source<br />
Required<br />
Tests are expected to be<br />
repeated every two years<br />
130
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 900 (Continued)<br />
Vialit cohesion<br />
Per product per<br />
source<br />
Required<br />
Tests are expected to be<br />
repeated every two years<br />
Rate of spread For each machine Required Not more than 6 weeks<br />
prior to start of work<br />
Penetration at 25oC<br />
and 5oC (N)<br />
Every manufactured<br />
batch<br />
Manufacturer’s QA test<br />
results may be submitted<br />
Aggregates Flakiness index (N) 1 per source Required<br />
Resistance to<br />
polishing (AAV) (N)<br />
Source approval<br />
Required<br />
Resistance to surface<br />
abrasion (AAV) (N)<br />
Source approval<br />
Required<br />
Grading (N) 1 per 200 tonnes Required<br />
System<br />
TAIT or BBA/<br />
HAPAS<br />
Required<br />
920 Bond coats, tack coats and other<br />
bituminous sprays<br />
Binder Product identification 1 per product per<br />
source<br />
Required<br />
Tests are expected to be<br />
repeated every two years<br />
Vialit cohesion<br />
1 per product per<br />
source<br />
Required<br />
Tests are expected to be<br />
repeated every two years<br />
Accuracy of spread<br />
1 for each binder and<br />
sprayer per month<br />
Required<br />
Not more than 6 weeks<br />
prior to start of work and<br />
one per month<br />
Rate of spread<br />
1 per week<br />
Penetration at 25ºC and<br />
5ºC (N)<br />
Every manufactured<br />
batch<br />
Manufacturer’s QA test<br />
results may be<br />
submitted.<br />
131
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 900 (Continued)<br />
919<br />
922 Surface Dressing National quality<br />
management sector<br />
scheme applies<br />
Binder<br />
Chippings<br />
Product Identification<br />
Vialit cohesion (N)<br />
Accuracy of spread<br />
Rate of spread<br />
Penetration at 25ºC and<br />
5ºC (N)<br />
Resistance to (PSV)<br />
polishing (N)<br />
Resistance to abrasion<br />
(AAV) (N)<br />
1 per product per<br />
source<br />
1 per product per<br />
source<br />
1 for each binder<br />
sprayer per week<br />
Every 1000 linear<br />
metres initially<br />
Every batch<br />
Source approval<br />
Source approval<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
Grading (N) 1 per 200 tonnes Required<br />
Modified binders should<br />
have a BBA HAPAS<br />
Roads and Bridges<br />
Certificate. In the event<br />
that no such Certificates<br />
have been issued, then<br />
in the interim, only<br />
modified<br />
binders undergoing BBA<br />
assessment should be<br />
considered for approval<br />
by the Overseeing<br />
Organisation.<br />
Tests are expected to be<br />
repeated every two years<br />
Tests are expected to be<br />
repeated every two years<br />
Not more than 6 weeks<br />
prior to start of work and<br />
one per week<br />
Frequency to be reduced<br />
to daily after 3<br />
satisfactory results, but<br />
not less than 1 test per<br />
site<br />
For cut back binders as<br />
supplied, manufacturer’s<br />
QA viscosity test results<br />
may be submitted.<br />
Binder content (N) 1 per 200 tonnes Required Coated chippings only<br />
Flakiness index (N) 1 per 200 tonnes Required<br />
Accuracy of spread (N)<br />
Rate of spread<br />
1 for each chipping<br />
spreader for every<br />
change of chipping size<br />
of source<br />
Every 500 linear metres<br />
initially<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
System TAIT or BBA/HAPAS Required<br />
Rollers Spray bars working Before work starts and<br />
daily during works<br />
Initial test not more than<br />
6 week prior to start of<br />
work<br />
Frequency to be reduced<br />
to daily after 3<br />
satisfactory results, but<br />
not less than 1 test per<br />
lane per site<br />
950 Depressions BBA HAPAS Roads and<br />
Bridges certification (or<br />
equivalent) applies<br />
132
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 1000<br />
1001<br />
1030<br />
1044<br />
Cement Required Quality management and<br />
product certification<br />
schemes apply<br />
Portland cement CEM 1<br />
Tests and test<br />
certificates are required<br />
Portland blastfurnace<br />
cement<br />
Blastfurnace cement<br />
CEM 111/A<br />
Portland pfa cement<br />
CEM 11/B-V<br />
Pozzolanic cement CEM<br />
Required (BS 6610)<br />
IV/A<br />
Portland cement with<br />
microsilica<br />
Required<br />
BBA Roads and Bridges<br />
Certificate required for<br />
microsilica<br />
Pulverised-fuel ash<br />
Tests and test<br />
Ground granulated blast furnace<br />
slag<br />
Admixtures<br />
certificates are required.<br />
Product certification<br />
schemes apply to pfa<br />
Mixing Water Sulfate content (N) Monthly<br />
and slag<br />
Aggregates<br />
Resistance to freezing<br />
and thawing –<br />
magnesium sulphate<br />
soundness (N)<br />
1 per source Required<br />
Water absorption (N)<br />
Flakiness index [N)<br />
Shell content (N)<br />
Resistance to<br />
fragmentation (N)<br />
Resistance to abrasion<br />
(AAV) (N)<br />
Grading and fines<br />
content (N)<br />
Chloride content (N)<br />
Total sulphur (TS) and<br />
acid-soluble sulphate<br />
(AS) content (N)<br />
Monthly*<br />
1 per source*<br />
6 monthly<br />
1 per source*<br />
1 per week per source* Required<br />
Weekly or as otherwise<br />
agreed (1 per source for<br />
CBM Aggregate)<br />
Every 6 months<br />
133
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of<br />
Series 1000 (Continued)<br />
Flint coarse aggregate<br />
containing white flints<br />
Sand (ie fine aggregate)<br />
Water absorption (N)<br />
Acid-soluble material<br />
(N)<br />
Testing<br />
3 per source<br />
thereafter weekly<br />
Monthly*<br />
Test Certificate<br />
Required<br />
Comments<br />
Not required for CBM<br />
Aggregate<br />
Blastfurnace slag Bulk density (N) Every 6 months<br />
Every 6 months<br />
Dicalcium silicate<br />
disintegration (N)<br />
Every 6 months<br />
Iron disintegration (N)<br />
Total sulfur (TS) and<br />
acid-soluble sulfate<br />
(AS) content (N)<br />
Every 6 months<br />
Pulverised-fuel ash<br />
Required<br />
(BS 3892-2)<br />
1002<br />
1003<br />
1004<br />
1044<br />
Pavement concrete<br />
Air content test (N)<br />
Density (N)<br />
Strength (N)<br />
As required in<br />
Table 10/10<br />
As required in<br />
Table 10/10<br />
As required in<br />
Table 10/10<br />
Required<br />
Product certification<br />
scheme applies<br />
1005 Consistence (Workability)<br />
Degree of<br />
Compactability<br />
(Compaction Index)<br />
(N)<br />
Vebe (N)<br />
As required in<br />
Table 10/10<br />
Required<br />
Slump (N)<br />
1011<br />
1012<br />
Dowel bars<br />
Tie bars<br />
Required<br />
Product certification<br />
scheme applies<br />
Dowel bars and<br />
Load test<br />
1 per arrangement*<br />
supporting cradles<br />
Sheathed dowel bars Bond stress 4 bars<br />
Cranked tie bars Bend test<br />
4 bars*<br />
(coated)<br />
Salt fog cabinet<br />
4 bars*<br />
1015 Joint filler board Weathering test 3 per source Required Normally undertaken by<br />
Compression and 4 per source<br />
manufacturer<br />
recovery<br />
Extrusion<br />
1 per source<br />
Cork filled board Immersion in water 2 per source<br />
Immersion in acid 2 per source<br />
134
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Series 1000 (Continued)<br />
1016<br />
1017<br />
1026<br />
1044<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Applied sealants Initial Penetration 1 per 1000 m<br />
Compression seals<br />
Self expanding cork seal<br />
Resilience<br />
Compression set<br />
Immersion in oil<br />
Tests specified in Clause<br />
1017<br />
Surface macrotexture BS EN 13036-1<br />
Volumetric Patch<br />
Technique (N)<br />
or 1 per day<br />
1 per 1000 m<br />
or 1 per day<br />
1 per type of seal<br />
1 per type of seal<br />
1 per type of seal Require<br />
Test Certificate<br />
Required<br />
(BS EN 14188-1,<br />
BS 2499-2,<br />
BS 5212-1,<br />
BS 5212-2)<br />
(BS EN 13880-2,<br />
BS EN 13880-3,<br />
and BS 4254)<br />
1 per day (set of 10) Required<br />
1027 Aluminised curing compound Efficiency index 1 per source Required<br />
1030 Wet lean concrete Density As required in Table<br />
Cube strength (N)<br />
10/9<br />
Required<br />
(ASTM D2628)<br />
(BS 2752)<br />
(BS 4443-4,<br />
Method 10 and<br />
BS EN ISO 2440)<br />
(BS EN ISO 1856)<br />
(BS 903: Part A16<br />
or BS ISO 1817)<br />
Required<br />
1043 Foamed Concrete Cube strength (N) 2 cubers per 12 m3 Required<br />
Comments<br />
135
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Test Certificate<br />
Comments<br />
SERIES 1100<br />
*1101 Precast concrete kerbs,<br />
channels, edgings and quadrants<br />
Bending strength Minimum of 8 per 1000<br />
units of each product<br />
(BS EN 1340)<br />
1104 Precast concrete flags Bending strength Minimum of 8 per 1000<br />
Bedding<br />
Granular material<br />
Mortar<br />
m 2 of each product (BS<br />
EN 1339)<br />
1107 Concrete block paving Compressive strength Minimum of 8 per 1000<br />
1108 Clay pavers<br />
Bending strength<br />
Skid resistance<br />
m 2 of each product (BS<br />
EN 1338)<br />
Minimum of 8 per 1000<br />
m2 of each product<br />
(BS EN 1344)<br />
Minimum of 8 per 1000<br />
m2 of each product<br />
(BS EN 1344)<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
Required<br />
136
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />
Frequency of<br />
Testing<br />
Test Certificate<br />
Comments<br />
Series 1200<br />
1202 Permanent traffic signs Required Quality management<br />
scheme applies.<br />
Certification that the<br />
traffic sign is capable of<br />
passing the test in BS<br />
873 : Part 1 is required<br />
1207 Anchorage in drilled holes to Loading test on site<br />
supports of traffic signs<br />
1210 Holding down bolts and<br />
anchorages to bases of<br />
permanent bollards<br />
Required<br />
Certification that the<br />
holding down bolts and<br />
anchorages are capable<br />
of complying with the<br />
performance<br />
requirements of BS 873 :<br />
Part 3 is required<br />
1212 Road Markings National quality<br />
Tests specified in BS EN<br />
Required<br />
management sector<br />
1824<br />
scheme applies.<br />
Procedures are given in<br />
BS EN 1824<br />
Glass Beads Arsenic trioxide<br />
One per contract and/ Required<br />
content, Lead<br />
content and<br />
Antimony content (N)<br />
or<br />
per specific source of<br />
supply<br />
1214 Permanent traffic cones and<br />
traffic cylinders<br />
Required<br />
Certification that<br />
permanent traffic cones<br />
and cylinders have been<br />
tested and comply with<br />
BS EN 13422 is<br />
required<br />
Tests specified in<br />
BS 873: Part 8<br />
2 of each size<br />
And category/type<br />
Flat traffic delineators Required Certification that FTD’s<br />
have been tested and<br />
comply with Clause 1214<br />
is required<br />
Tests specified in<br />
Clause 1214<br />
Other traffic delineators<br />
Tests specified in<br />
Appendix 12/4<br />
Certification that the<br />
delineators have been<br />
tested and comply with<br />
Clause 1214 is required<br />
Tests specified in<br />
Appendix 12/4<br />
137
Temporary cones, cylinders,<br />
FTD’s and other delineators<br />
Required<br />
Certification that at least<br />
1 in 500 of any batch of<br />
cones, cylinders, TDF’s<br />
and other delineators to<br />
be used in the<br />
Temporary works have<br />
passed the tests in<br />
Clause 1214 as<br />
appropriate is required<br />
138
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 1300<br />
1305 Anchorages for use in drilled<br />
Tensile load<br />
Required<br />
To provide well attested<br />
holes<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
and documented<br />
evidence<br />
1306 Anchorages in drilled holes to<br />
Loading test on site<br />
columns and masts with flange<br />
plates<br />
1310 Welding Welding procedures<br />
Every seven years<br />
Quality management<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
scheme applies<br />
Welder qualification<br />
(Sub-Clauses 1310.1<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
and 1310.2 (7.13))<br />
Production testing<br />
(Sub-Clauses 1310.1<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
and 1310.2 (7.14))<br />
Welded joints<br />
Destructive testing<br />
1313 GFRP laminates Loss on ignition 1 per 50 production<br />
columns<br />
Colour fastness<br />
1 per batch<br />
Electric strength<br />
Water absorption<br />
Impact strength<br />
1314 Brackets for laminated GFRP<br />
lighting columns<br />
Required<br />
Polyurethane foam Bulk density 1 per batch<br />
Surface hardness<br />
Apparent bulk density 2 per batch<br />
Impact strength<br />
Flexural stress<br />
139
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 1400<br />
1421 Cable<br />
1424 Lighting Units Tests specified in<br />
Clause 1424<br />
Networks<br />
Tests specified in<br />
Clause 1424<br />
Product certification<br />
scheme applies<br />
Each unit Required Product certification<br />
scheme applies<br />
Certification that the<br />
installation complies with<br />
BS 7671 (the IEE Wiring<br />
Regulations) is required<br />
Each network Required Certification that the<br />
installation complies with<br />
BS 7671 (the IEE Wiring<br />
Regulations) is required<br />
140
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 1600<br />
1601 Soil samples<br />
In situ soil tests<br />
Required<br />
1602<br />
to<br />
1606<br />
1610<br />
to<br />
1615<br />
Concrete<br />
Grout<br />
Reinforcement<br />
Prestressing<br />
Steelwork<br />
Welding<br />
Protection against corrosion<br />
Required<br />
1608 Integrity Testing Sonic Echo Every pile Required<br />
141
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 1700<br />
1702<br />
1704<br />
Cement types as stated in sub-<br />
Clause 1702.1<br />
Required<br />
Certificate to be provided<br />
monthly * for each type<br />
of cement.<br />
Quality management and<br />
product certification<br />
schemes apply<br />
Cements (all types) Chloride content Monthly Tests to be carried out by<br />
Pulverised-fuel ash Sulfate content Monthly<br />
the manufacturer and<br />
Ground granulated blastfurnace<br />
slag<br />
Acid-soluble alkali<br />
content<br />
Daily (PC)<br />
Weekly (pfa ggbs)<br />
results included on the<br />
test certificates required<br />
above.<br />
Aggregates<br />
Grading and fines<br />
content<br />
Shell content (N)<br />
1 per week (per source)<br />
Monthly<br />
Results of routine control<br />
tests from the factory<br />
production control<br />
Flakiness index (N) Monthly<br />
system operated by the<br />
Resistance to<br />
Every 6 months<br />
producer to be provided<br />
fragmentation (N)<br />
Drying shrinkage (N) 1 per 5 years<br />
– see Annex H of BS EN<br />
12620<br />
Chloride content (N) 1 per week or as<br />
otherwise agreed<br />
Product certification<br />
scheme applies<br />
Sulfate content (N) Yearly<br />
Blasfurnace slag Bulk density (N) Every 6 months<br />
Stability (N)<br />
Every 6 months<br />
Sulfur content (N) Every 6 months<br />
142
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
1702<br />
Water<br />
Tests specified in BS EN<br />
1704<br />
1008<br />
Monthly<br />
continu<br />
Chloride content<br />
Monthly<br />
ed<br />
Sulfate content<br />
Weekly<br />
Acid-soluble alkali<br />
content<br />
Admixtures Chloride content 1 per consignment Required<br />
(BS 934-2)<br />
Sulfate content<br />
Acid-soluble alkali<br />
content<br />
1 per consignment<br />
1 per consignment<br />
Required<br />
1707 Concrete Cube strength (N) Prestressed concretetwo<br />
cubes from 12 m³ or<br />
2 batches whichever<br />
represents the lesser<br />
volume<br />
Reinforced concrete –<br />
four cubes from 24 m³ or<br />
4 batches whichever<br />
represents the lesser<br />
volume but minimum of 4<br />
for every day concrete is<br />
delivered to site<br />
Mass concrete-two<br />
cubes from 50m³ or 50<br />
batches whichever<br />
represents the lesser<br />
volume<br />
Additional cubes for<br />
special purposes<br />
Required<br />
Contractor to cast and<br />
test sufficient additional<br />
cubes to demonstrate<br />
cube strength before<br />
transfer<br />
Cube strength-identity<br />
2 cubes from each of two<br />
testing as described in<br />
samples of each batch<br />
Appendix 17/4 (N)<br />
Density<br />
Modulus of elasticity<br />
Fresh concrete<br />
Consistence (slump or<br />
Each batch<br />
Required<br />
compacting factor or<br />
Vebe) (N)<br />
Air content<br />
Each batch<br />
Cement content<br />
Water/cement ratio<br />
1709 Silane Required for each<br />
delivery<br />
Refractive Index<br />
Three samples<br />
Certification that the<br />
silane complies with<br />
Clause 1709 is required<br />
Trial panels, where<br />
required in the Contract<br />
143
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
1710 Concrete packing<br />
Mortar packing<br />
Epoxy resin bonding agent<br />
Precast concrete<br />
Manufactured off Site<br />
1712 Reinforcement<br />
Cube strength<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
Contractor to make<br />
available records of tests<br />
by the manufacturer<br />
Steel bars<br />
Required<br />
(BS 4449)<br />
Product certification<br />
scheme applies<br />
Steel wire<br />
Required<br />
(BS 4482)<br />
Steel fabric<br />
Required<br />
(BS 4483)<br />
Stainless steel<br />
Required<br />
(BS 6744)<br />
1713 Fabricated reinforcement Required Certification that<br />
fabricated reinforcement<br />
complies with the routine<br />
inspection/testing<br />
requirements of BS 8666<br />
is required if the<br />
fabrication is not covered<br />
by a product certification<br />
scheme listed in<br />
Appendix B<br />
1716 Reinforcement jointing systems Permanent elongation<br />
Characteristic strength<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
Required for each<br />
type of connection<br />
BBA Roads and Bridges<br />
certificate or CARES<br />
certificate of product<br />
assessment or fully<br />
equivalent scheme apply<br />
144
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
1717 Reinforcement metal arc welding Welding procedure<br />
approval (BS 7123)<br />
Welder approval<br />
(BS 7123)<br />
As required in BS 7123<br />
Tests should be carried<br />
out by an independent<br />
testing body specified in<br />
BS 8666<br />
1718 Prestressing tendons Product certification<br />
scheme apply<br />
Steel wire<br />
Steel bar<br />
Seven- wire strand<br />
Prestressing steel<br />
Proof load<br />
(all types)<br />
Breaking load<br />
Elongation<br />
Ductility<br />
Relaxation<br />
Modulus of elasticity<br />
Super strand to BS 5896 0.1% proof load<br />
or other than lowest Breaking load<br />
strength 3-7 mm dia<br />
wires to BS 5896<br />
1724 Post-tensioning anchorages Tests in accordance<br />
with BS EN 13391<br />
(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />
Each reel<br />
Required<br />
(BS 5896)<br />
Required<br />
(BS 4486)<br />
Required<br />
(BS 5896)<br />
Required<br />
(BS EN 13391)<br />
Product certification<br />
scheme<br />
applies<br />
1726 Stainless steel bar Required<br />
(BS 6744)<br />
Product certification<br />
scheme<br />
applies<br />
1727 Inspection and testing of<br />
structures and components<br />
145
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 1900<br />
1910 Metal spray coatings Tensile test specified<br />
in BS EN 22063<br />
Stability value<br />
Grid test specified in<br />
BS EN 22063<br />
1911<br />
1911SE<br />
Paints<br />
‘A’ and ‘B’ Samples<br />
specific gravity<br />
Colour match<br />
Composition<br />
Application<br />
characteristics<br />
146
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 2000<br />
2003 Permitted waterproofing systems Registration and BBA<br />
Roads and Bridges<br />
Agreement certification<br />
apply<br />
Additional bituminous protection Tests specified in<br />
BS 594 : Part 1<br />
1 per 15 tonnes Sampling to comply with<br />
BS 594 : Part 1<br />
Stability value<br />
Test specified in<br />
BS 596 : Part 107<br />
2004 Tar Tests specified in<br />
BS 76<br />
Cut back bitumen<br />
Tests specified in<br />
BS 3690 : Part 1<br />
1 per 15 tonnes<br />
1 per source Sampling to comply with<br />
BS 76<br />
1 per source Sampling to comply with<br />
BS 3690 : Part 1<br />
147
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 2400<br />
2401 Masonry cement Required<br />
(BS EN 413-1)<br />
Quality management<br />
scheme applies<br />
Chloride content Monthly Required Test to be carried out by<br />
2402 Sand Required per<br />
2403 Water Tests specified in<br />
consignment<br />
(BS EN 13139)<br />
the manufacturer and<br />
results included on the<br />
test certificate<br />
Chloride content Monthly Test to be carried out by<br />
BS EN 1008<br />
2404 Mortar admixtures Required<br />
(BS EN 934-3)<br />
2405 Lime Required<br />
(BS EN 459-1)<br />
2406 Bricks<br />
the manufacturer and<br />
results included on the<br />
test certificate<br />
Clay<br />
(Soluble salt content<br />
Efflorescence<br />
Compressive strength<br />
Water absorption Initial<br />
rate of suction )<br />
(BS 3921/TRL Report<br />
447)<br />
Calcium silicate Required (BS 187)<br />
2407 Blocks<br />
Concrete<br />
Required<br />
(BS 6073-1/BS EN<br />
772-2)<br />
2410<br />
2411<br />
Concrete<br />
Stainless steel<br />
Wire/fabric<br />
Bars<br />
Ready mixed mortars<br />
Mortars<br />
Tests specified in<br />
Appendix A1 of<br />
BS EN 10521-1<br />
1 set of tests per mix<br />
Required<br />
(BS 6073 :Part 1)<br />
Required<br />
(BS EN 10088-1)<br />
Required<br />
(BS 6744)<br />
Required<br />
(BS 4721)<br />
148
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 2500<br />
2501<br />
Materials for corrugated steel<br />
buried structures exceeding<br />
900 mm clear span or internal<br />
diameter<br />
Type approval applies<br />
Steel components<br />
Zinc coating<br />
Protective coating<br />
Paved invert system<br />
2502 Materials for reinforcing<br />
elements, prefabricated facing<br />
and capping units, and<br />
washers<br />
Carbon steel strip<br />
Required as<br />
appropriate to the<br />
standard or<br />
specification listed<br />
in the type<br />
approval<br />
Certificate<br />
Required<br />
(BS 1449: Part 1.1<br />
or BS EN 10025-1<br />
and<br />
BS EN 10025-2)<br />
BBA Roads and Bridges<br />
Certification applies<br />
BBA Roads and Bridges<br />
Certification applies<br />
Silicon content and<br />
mechanical properties to<br />
be stated on the<br />
certificate<br />
Stainless steel strip<br />
Required<br />
(BS EN 10029,<br />
10048, 10051,<br />
10258 and 10259)<br />
Mechanical properties to<br />
be stated on the<br />
certificate<br />
Reinforcing bar for anchor<br />
elements<br />
Required<br />
(BS 4449)<br />
Tests scheduled under<br />
Clauses 1717 and 1909<br />
are required for welding<br />
and galvanizing of<br />
anchor<br />
elements<br />
Materials for fasteners<br />
Stainless steel<br />
Required<br />
(BS EN 10088-1)<br />
(BS EN ISO<br />
3506-1 and 3506-<br />
2)<br />
Bolts, screws and nuts<br />
Required<br />
(BS EN ISO 898,<br />
4016, 4018, 4034)<br />
Tests scheduled under<br />
Clause 1909 are required<br />
for hot dip galvanizing<br />
149
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 2500<br />
2503 Materials for pocket type<br />
reinforced brickwork<br />
retaining wall structures<br />
Clay bricks<br />
(Soluble salt content<br />
Efflorescence<br />
Compressive strength<br />
Water absorption<br />
Initial rate of suction)<br />
(BS 3921/TRL<br />
Report 447) (N)<br />
1 set of tests pertype<br />
of brick<br />
2504<br />
Environmental barriers<br />
Timber<br />
Quality management<br />
scheme applies<br />
Concrete<br />
Brickwork<br />
Other Materials<br />
Barriers Sound absorption As required in<br />
Appendix 25/4<br />
Sound insulation<br />
2505<br />
2506<br />
Post foundations Loading test on site As required in<br />
Appendix 25/4<br />
Drainage structures/buried rigid pipes for drainage structures<br />
Pipes for drains and culverts having diameters or clear span exceeding 900 mm<br />
Vitrified clay<br />
Product certification<br />
scheme<br />
Concrete PC/SRC (Manufacturer’s test) See sub-Clause 2506.28<br />
Iron<br />
Corrugated steel (Manufacturer’s test) Type Approval Certificate<br />
and BBA Roads and<br />
Bridges Certificate apply<br />
150
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 2600<br />
2601 Bedding mortar<br />
materials<br />
Required for each<br />
batch<br />
Certification in<br />
accordance with Clause<br />
2601 is required<br />
Bedding mortar Flow cone test Each batch †<br />
Flow between glass plates<br />
Laboratory tests<br />
Compressive strength<br />
Expansion test<br />
Water absorption<br />
Elastic stability<br />
Flow cone test<br />
Compressive strength<br />
1 per source<br />
Each load<br />
Site control tests<br />
2604 Plastic coating to<br />
fencing<br />
posts, gates and<br />
ancillaries<br />
Required<br />
(BS 1722: Part 16)<br />
applicator is<br />
required<br />
Certification by powder<br />
manufacturer and coating<br />
2607 Granolithic concrete Testing to be in<br />
accordance with Clauses<br />
1702, 1703, 1707 and<br />
1710<br />
151
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />
Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />
Series 3000<br />
3001 General Inspection Reports as<br />
required in Appendix 30/1<br />
3005 Grass seeding,<br />
Rate of spread of fertilizer<br />
1 per 1000 square<br />
Wildflower seeding and<br />
metres<br />
turfing<br />
Rate of spread of seeding<br />
1 per 1000 square<br />
††<br />
metres<br />
Chemical analysis of fertilizer<br />
1 per source<br />
Grass seed germination and purity<br />
1 per source and mix<br />
Required prior to<br />
†<br />
(Official Seed Testing Station<br />
variety<br />
sowing<br />
tests)<br />
1 Unless otherwise stated above, all sampling and testing in this Appendix shall be by the<br />
Contractor.<br />
2 Tests comparable to those specified in this Appendix will be necessary for any equivalent work,<br />
goods or materials proposed by the Contractor (See sub-Clause 105.4).<br />
3 (11/03) (N) indicates that a UKAS or equivalent accredited laboratory sampling and test report or<br />
certificate is required.<br />
4 Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix tests for work, goods or materials as scheduled under<br />
any one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.<br />
5 Cube strength tests are not required for concrete complying with Clause 2602.<br />
6 Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix test certificates for work, goods or materials as<br />
scheduled under any one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.<br />
152
APPENDIX 1/6: SUPPLY AND DELIVERY OF SAMPLES TO THE PROJECT MANAGER<br />
Clause<br />
Sample Description<br />
Frequency of<br />
Delivery Location Comments<br />
No. or<br />
Sampling<br />
Series<br />
300<br />
Stained Timber Boarding<br />
One sample, at<br />
Project<br />
Provide all relevant<br />
commencement of<br />
Manager’s Site<br />
technical data sheets<br />
contract.<br />
Office<br />
associated with<br />
products.<br />
300<br />
Powder coated, galvanised<br />
One sample<br />
On site<br />
Sample length of fence<br />
steel railings panel<br />
1.85m high Semi Temporary<br />
Fencing to Japanese<br />
Knotweed areas<br />
400 Galvanised steel guard rail One sample On site Sample length of<br />
completed guard rail<br />
500 Various types of pipe One sample, at Project Site Office<br />
bedding,<br />
commencement of<br />
surround and backfill contract.<br />
600 Imported Fill Class 2 and 6 On site<br />
1100 Sample length of concrete One sample On site Sample length of path<br />
path<br />
2500 Reinforced Earth Retaining<br />
wall modular blockwork units<br />
and reinforcement grid.<br />
Gabions Retaining wall cage<br />
and facing stone<br />
One sample On site Sample of filled gabion<br />
with<br />
Cage, with<br />
facing<br />
2400 Rendered blockwork One sample On site Sample panel of<br />
rendered blockwork<br />
Notes:<br />
1 Samples comparable to those specified in this Appendix will be necessary for any equivalent work,<br />
goods or materials proposed by the Contractor (See sub-Clause 105.6).<br />
2 Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix samples of work, goods or materials as scheduled under any<br />
one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.<br />
3 Unless otherwise scheduled under Clause 2602 samples of concrete complying with that Clause are not<br />
required.<br />
4 (N) indicates UKAS or equivalent laboratory accreditation required for sampling.<br />
153
APPENDIX 1/7: SITE EXTENT AND LIMITATIONS ON USE<br />
1.7.1 Extent of the Site<br />
The extent of the site is detailed on the drawings, in addition to the site boundary, the site will<br />
have areas where Japanese knotweed is present. Areas outside the boundaries indicated that are<br />
needed for the Contractor to comply with the requirements of Appendix 1/17, including advance<br />
warning signs, shall not be used by the Contractor without the prior written approval of the owner<br />
and/or tenant and the Project Manager. A copy of any agreement with owner and/or tenant is to<br />
be given to the Project Manager & <strong>Council</strong> prior to the use of such an area.<br />
1.7.2 Japanese Knotweed On site<br />
A Japanese knotweed survey and management plan have been completed for the site.<br />
The Japanese knotweed has been identified on the site and its location marked on the<br />
drawings.<br />
Under Schedule 9 of the Wildlife Order (NI) 1985, it is an offence to plant or cause it to grow in the<br />
wild. It places a duty of care to prevent the further spread to adjacent land, for example, if the<br />
canes or rhizomes where cut / excavated and removed from the site, resulting in its further<br />
spread, which could happen in the proposed phase development of this site.<br />
It is currently subject to a control programme, to eradicate it from the site. If the<br />
Japanese knotweed spreads, as a result of the Phase 3 construction stage, by the<br />
contractor or their subcontractors, the appointed contractor will be liable for the costs<br />
associated with controlling any new infestations on the site, until it is eradicated.<br />
1.7.3 Japanese Knotweed management plan<br />
Fence off Japanese knotweed<br />
All identified Japanese knotweed stands, should be fenced off immediately (refer to<br />
Drawing GA/03), to reduce the risk of vehicles spreading the plant. As the rhizomes can<br />
extend up to 7 m from the parent plant, the fencing should incorporate a 10 m buffer<br />
zone. Signage should be erected along the length of the buffer zone fence, informing<br />
the public and contractors that this is an exclusion zone.<br />
Use of wheel wash<br />
All plant and machinery used on site during the restoration works, or which comes into<br />
contact with soils on site, should go through a wheel wash on entering and exiting the<br />
site.<br />
154
1.7.4 Excavation and sealing of isolated Japanese Knotweed Areas<br />
Isolated areas of Japanese knotweed shall be excavated out at the start of the works to<br />
facilitate construction of the works. All excavated materials from these areas will be<br />
disposed of on site within the fenced off areas of Japanese Knotweed.<br />
1.7.5 Limitations on the Use of Site<br />
1.7.5.1 The Contractor shall comply with all statutory regulations with regard to:<br />
• Bunding of oil storage.<br />
• Bunded area for fuelling of plant.<br />
• Run-off from compound<br />
• Chemical toilets<br />
• Collecting and disposal of waste from site (i.e. netted skips, no burning of any materials on<br />
site, etc)<br />
1.7.5.2 In addition, the Contractor shall make provision for carrying out work, outside the site as required<br />
under the Contract, for example Temporary Traffic Management (Appendix 1/17), including<br />
internal roads within cemetery necessary for the installation, maintenance and removal of<br />
advance signs, cones and road markings, surface street lighting and the like.<br />
1.7.5.3 The site should be used solely for the construction and maintenance of the Works.<br />
1.7.5.4 The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the Special Requirements in relation to Statutory Bodies and<br />
others listed in the Conditions of Contract.<br />
1.7.5.5 The Contractor shall not use an area of land with a temporary access for any purpose other than that<br />
for which the right was granted.<br />
1.7.5.6 Prior to the commencement of the Works the Contractor together with the Project Manager and<br />
<strong>Council</strong> Staff shall carry out a joint inspection of the site and existing cemetery access roads and<br />
paths and all actionable defects shall be recorded.<br />
155
APPENDIX 1/7: SITE EXTENT AND LIMITATIONS ON USE (CONTINUED)<br />
1.7.5.7 The Contractor shall ensure that all areas of land, which have been temporarily occupied, are<br />
reinstated to the satisfaction of the affected landowner, occupier and the relevant Authorities. The<br />
Contractor shall supply a written confirmation from each landowner to his office.<br />
1.7.5.8 Vehicular and pedestrian access must be maintained at all times to all areas of the cemetery<br />
outside the Contract site area.<br />
1.7.5.9 The Contractor shall make provision for carrying out work around areas where Japanese<br />
knotweed is present , as shown on drawings as per extent of site details, as access in the<br />
proximately to these areas will be limited.<br />
156
APPENDIX 1/8: OPERATIVES FOR THE PROJECT MANAGER<br />
1.8.1 The Contractor shall allow for an unskilled labourer to be available for the use of the Engineer to<br />
allow him to carry out his duties.<br />
157
APPENDIX 1/9: CONTROL OF NOISE AND VIBRATION<br />
1.9.1 The Contractor's attention is drawn to the Special Requirements in relation to noise control as appended<br />
to the Conditions of Contract and to item 1.9.4 and to ‘Quiet Times’ referred to Appendix 1/13 below.<br />
1.9.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for deciding whether to seek the Local Authorities formal consent to<br />
his proposed methods of work and the steps he proposes in order to minimise noise.<br />
1.9.3 The Contractor shall also comply with the general recommendations set out in BS 5228 Code of Practice<br />
for Noise Control on Construction and Open Sites.<br />
1.9.4 The normal working hours shall be Monday to Friday between 0800 hours and 1800 hours, with no<br />
working on Sundays, public and/or bank holidays. Exceptionally, consent for work outside normal<br />
working hours may be given after any necessary consultation. Seven days notice is required from the<br />
Contractor when seeking such consent.<br />
1.9.5 Mitigation Measures for Construction Works<br />
BS5228 includes a number of guidelines and recommendation, which are considered appropriate, and of<br />
good working practice for all construction contracts. These are summarised below.<br />
General Measures<br />
The contractor should take note of the control measures for relevant plant listed in BS5228 and apply the<br />
appropriate measures where practicable, including temporary screening or enclosure of noisy plant,<br />
control of “on times” for noisy plant, and positioning of plant as far as possible from noise sensitive<br />
locations and properties. Also:<br />
• use of good, well maintained plant and where possible new plant manufactured under recent EC<br />
guidelines for manufacturers.<br />
• Substitution of unsuitable plant.<br />
• Maintenance of silencers and moving components.<br />
Screening<br />
At locations where extensive earthworks, for example, might result in an exceeding of EHO limits, the<br />
contractor should endeavour to sequence operations such that spoil mounds are located in positions<br />
where near sited dwellings are adequately screened from ongoing excavations. Some static machinery<br />
may require occasional screening. Such measures can be best assessed during the contract by<br />
monitoring.<br />
158
APPENDIX 1/9:<br />
CONTROL OF NOISE AND VIBRATION (Continued)<br />
Monitoring<br />
Given the limited impact it would not be appropriate to require regular noise monitoring of the site.<br />
However occasional measurement of noise levels generated using a Type 2 or better sound level meter<br />
should be conducted to check on the continuing impact of the works.<br />
Responsible Person<br />
It is often recommended that the appropriate party should appoint or delegate a responsible person who<br />
will be present on site and who will be willing to answer an act upon queries from the local public.<br />
159
APPENDIX 1/10(A): STRUCTURES TO BE DESIGNED BY THE CONTRACTOR<br />
The earth retaining structures shown in outline in the drawings 073030/GA/14 to 21 and in elevation on<br />
drawings 073030/GA/22 and 23 shall be designed and constructed by the contractor.<br />
The retaining walls shall have a natural looking grey colour finish such as Acheson and Glover Anchor<br />
Landmark Basalt blocks or equal and approved.<br />
The gabion cages shall be faced with Donegal Sandstone, in dry random rubble coursing.<br />
The front face of the crib walls shall be designed and constructed to contain pockets of top soil in which<br />
plants can take root over the whole front face of the wall.<br />
The retaining wall system selected for each section shall not take up an extent of land take that will<br />
cause a reduction in the area and dimensions shown on the drawings for any of the other facilities that<br />
make up the works shown on the drawings including roads, graveplots, paths, headstone foundations,<br />
buildings, access areas, planting areas and landscape areas and existing areas that are to be<br />
maintained. Where the selected retaining wall system is located adjacent to a graveplot or planting aarea<br />
the contractor must demonstrate that graves can be dug adjacent to the wall without compromising the<br />
stability and safety of the wall or the excavation.<br />
(1) Gabion Retaining Wall<br />
Gabion Retaining Wall - see Drawing No. 073030/GA/12, to 23 and 33, layout and details of gabion<br />
retaining wall structure and associated works encompassed by the “Designated Outline”<br />
The Contractor’s designer for the gabion retaining wall will be required to provide a certificate from his<br />
insurer indicating that he has a minimum of £3,000,000.00 Professional Indemnity Insurance cover in<br />
respect of the design of this gabion retaining wall.<br />
The Contractor and his designer will be required to enter into a collateral warranty of the Employer’s<br />
choosing) with the Employer in regard to the design of the works.<br />
Further details of design requirements and specifications are given in Appendix 6/10.<br />
(2) Reinforced Earth Retaining Walls<br />
Reinforced Earth Retaining Block Walls - see Drawing No. 073030/GA/12, to 23 and 33 for location,<br />
layout and details of reinforced earth retaining walls and associated works encompassed by the<br />
“Designated Outline”<br />
The Contractor’s designer for the reinforced earth retaining walls will be required to provide a certificate<br />
from his insurer indicating that he has a minimum of £3,000,000.00 Professional Indemnity Insurance<br />
cover in respect of the design of the reinforced slopes.<br />
160
The Contractor and his designer will be required to enter into a collateral warranty (of the Employer’s<br />
choosing) with the Employer in regard to the design of the works.<br />
Further details of design requirements and specifications are given in Appendix 25/2<br />
(3) Crib Retaining Walls<br />
Crib Retaining Wall - see Drawing No. 073030/GA/12, to 23 and 33. for location, layout and details of<br />
Crib retaining wall structure and associated works encompassed by the “Designated Outline”<br />
The front face of the crib walls shall be designed and constructed to contain pockets of top soil in which<br />
plants can take root over the whole front face of the wall.<br />
The Contractor’s designer for the crib walls wall will be required to provide a certificate from his insurer<br />
indicating that he has a minimum of £3,000,000.00 professional indemnity insurance cover in respect of<br />
the design of this gabion retaining wall.<br />
The Contractor and his designer will be required to enter into a collateral warranty (of the Employer’s<br />
choosing) with the Employer in regard to the design of the works.<br />
Further details of design requirements and specifications are given in Appendix 6/10<br />
161
APPENDIX 1/11: STRUCTURES TO BE DESIGNED BY THE CONTRACTOR<br />
The structural elements and other features to be designed by the Contractor are as listed below<br />
Concrete Stairs and Steps<br />
The stairs shall be of cast in situ or precast concrete construction. The contractor shall be responsible for<br />
the design of the steps including the foundations.<br />
The steps shall be designed and constructed to comply with BS 5395-1:2010 Code of Practice for the<br />
design of Stairs with Straight Stairs and Winders.<br />
Minimum requirements for the stairs are shown in drawing no. 073030/GA/34.<br />
Ramps<br />
Ramps shall comply with the requirements fo BS 8300:2009 Design of Buildings and their approaches to<br />
meet the needs of disabled people. The ramps shall be of cast in situ or precast concrete construction.<br />
The contractor shall be responsible for the design of the ramps including the foundations.<br />
Minimum requirements for the ramps are shown in drawing no. 073030/GA/34.<br />
162
APPENDIX 1/12: SETTING OUT AND EXISTING GROUND LEVELS<br />
1.12.1 The locations of known points to be used for setting out purposes will be identified on site.<br />
1.12.2 The Contractor should note that the levels indicated on the Drawings are to Belfast Ordnance Datum. The<br />
Contractor shall set up a bench mark on site in agreement with the Project Manager.<br />
1.12.3 All contractors are advised to visit the site during the tender period (i.e. by appointment with the Employer)<br />
to fully acquaint themselves with the layout/topography of the site, and any restrictions with regard to<br />
ingress/egress to the site and restrictions within working area of the site.<br />
1.12.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for setting out all work and no kerbs, concrete, or bituminous material<br />
shall be laid until the Contractor has satisfied himself that the finished surface shall have sufficient falls to<br />
prevent water from ponding. The setting out may be checked by the Project Manager and any defect shall<br />
be rectified at the Contractor’s expense.<br />
163
APPENDIX 1/13: PROGRAMME OF WORKS<br />
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager three copies of a Construction Programme in<br />
the form of a bar chart approved by the Project Manager after the acceptance of the Tender and<br />
before he commences work on Site. It shall show the level of detail appropriate to each stage of the<br />
Works and all activities and restraints each of which shall be given a short title. All events shall be<br />
numbered and annotated with earliest and latest event dates.<br />
At the time of submission of the programme the contractor shall also provide a mass-haul diagram<br />
showing his intended earthworks movements and locations<br />
2 It shall cover all activities and delivery to Site of materials. No work shall start until the programme<br />
has been approved by the Project Manager.<br />
2 The Contractor shall record progress on the programme fortnightly in a manner approved by the<br />
Project Manager and submit the marked up programme to the Project managers representative<br />
for approval prior to site progress meeting along with a detailed site progress report.<br />
4 The programme shall be re-drawn on the instructions of the Project Manager should any<br />
circumstances arise which substantially alter the existing programme. Three copies of any<br />
revised programme shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval.<br />
5 The approval of any programme by the Project Manager will neither effect the Contract Date of<br />
completion nor relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities to complete the Works by this date.<br />
6 The Contractor’s programme shall take into account the following constraints:<br />
• Constructing 1.85m high fencing around areas with Japanese knotweed as shown on the<br />
drawings before any other works can start.<br />
• Excavating out the area of Japanese knotweed indicated on the drawing and its disposal in<br />
a hoarded area<br />
• Keeping all existing cemetery footpaths and roads outside the site extent open at all times.<br />
• Maintaining access within the existing cemetery site at all times for <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong><br />
staff, as necessary<br />
• All public, bank and trade holidays.<br />
• Restrictions on site working hours, including ‘Quite Times’ on site during burials, see 7<br />
below for further details.<br />
• Traffic safety and management including notice requirements.<br />
• All other statutory notification periods<br />
• Work to privately and publicly owned services and supplies<br />
• Trials, tests and demonstrations prior to work items.<br />
• Compliance with technical approval procedures in relation to structures designed by the<br />
164
Contractor,<br />
• including awaiting approvals, resubmissions and modifications.<br />
• Restrictions on site access in the proximately of areas with Japanese Knotweed as<br />
detailed in Appendix 1/7.<br />
• Submission by the Contractor of Road Restraint Systems for acceptance, including<br />
awaiting acceptance and resubmission.<br />
7 The Contractor may be require to cease all noisy operations while burials are being undertaken at<br />
the cemetery (i.e. operations generating noise levels in excess of 60dB). The Contractor shall<br />
keep accurate records of any such ‘Quite Times’ and have these countered signed by <strong>Council</strong><br />
staff who are attendant at the burials. Payment for any such ‘Quite Times’ will not be paid without<br />
evidence of such countered signed records.<br />
8 The level of detail shown on the programme should be not less than the following:<br />
LEVEL 1: Within 21 days after acceptance of Tender and any subsequent revision.<br />
- Site Setup<br />
- Bulk Earthworks<br />
- Foundations<br />
- Roads Works<br />
- Concrete Paths<br />
- Fencing, guard rails<br />
- Production of all fabrication drawings<br />
- Retaining Structures<br />
- Reinforced concrete structures<br />
- Masonry works<br />
- Safety Fences<br />
- Topsoiling & Seeding<br />
- Finishes<br />
- Site drainage<br />
- M&E Services<br />
- Traffic Management Measures<br />
LEVEL 2: At least four weeks before the commencement of any item of work:<br />
For each structure:<br />
- Earthworks<br />
• Foundations<br />
• Concrete works<br />
• Masonry<br />
- Road works<br />
165
• As for Level 1 but intervals not exceeding 200 m and including lighting, signing,<br />
soiling and seeding, road marking, cabling, etc.<br />
- All public alterations or additions to privately and publicly owned services and supplies.<br />
LEVEL 3:<br />
Any further breakdown of items and other details as may be required.<br />
166
APPENDIX 1/14: MONTHLY STATEMENTS<br />
The payment applications submitted to the <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> in accordance with the Conditions of<br />
Contract by the Contractor shall, whenever dealing with matters covered by the Bills of Quantities, be set<br />
out under Part and Section headings similar to those in the Bills of Quantities and shall separately<br />
identify each item and specify quantity, unit, rate and value. Items not described in Bills of Quantities but<br />
appropriate for inclusion as measured work shall be shown at the end of the relevant section or under<br />
section headings as appropriate indicating quantity, unit rate and value. In respect of all other matters<br />
referred to in the Conditions of Contract the Contractor shall separately show in the statement quantities,<br />
units and rates of goods and/or materials and also details of any other matters to which he considers<br />
himself entitled. The Contractor shall allow the <strong>Council</strong> to inspect<br />
invoices for goods or materials included in the statement as may be required.<br />
167
APPENDIX 1/16: PRIVATELY AND PUBLICLY OWNED SERVICES AND SUPPLIES<br />
1 The Contractor shall, before commencing operations on the site give notice to the <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong><br />
<strong>Council</strong>, NIE, DOE and BT, Virgin Media, Water Service, Roads Service – Street lighting, etc and<br />
obtain information as to any electric power cables, water mains, sewers, and telephone cables<br />
which may be under, or over, or adjacent to the site. The Contractor shall also, before<br />
commencing operations on site, obtain any further information that the Employer may have in this<br />
connection. He shall observe such regulations and precautions as are required to avoid damage<br />
to the services and injury to workmen, members of the public or <strong>Council</strong> staff.<br />
2 The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Statutory Undertakers and others concerned,<br />
for the co-ordination of his work with all work which needs to be done by them or their Contractors<br />
concurrently with the Works. Compliance with the statutory periods of notice does not relieve the<br />
Contractor of his obligations<br />
3 Private services to individual properties, buildings, offices, etc have not been shown on the<br />
Drawings. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Statutory Undertakers, <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong><br />
<strong>Council</strong> and others concerned for the phasing of all necessary disconnections and diversion of<br />
private services affected by the Works.<br />
4 Disconnected services shall be removed by the Contractor only with the prior consent of the<br />
Authority concerned.<br />
5 The names and addresses of the authorities serving in the locality are listed below.<br />
BT<br />
NI Water<br />
(Water Mains, Sewers)<br />
DOE(NI), Roads<br />
Service(Road Drainage<br />
& Street Lighting)<br />
NIE<br />
BT Exchange, Irish Street,<br />
T 02871 34 8623<br />
Waterside, Londonderry, BT47 F 028 7134 1087<br />
3SH<br />
1a Belt Road, Altnagelvin,<br />
T 02871 312221<br />
Londonderry<br />
F 02871310330<br />
Londonderry Section Office T 02871321600<br />
NIE Local Office<br />
168
APPENDIX 1/16: PRIVATELY AND PUBLICLY OWNED SERVICES AND SUPPLIES (CONTINUED)<br />
6 Services and Supplies Affected by the Works<br />
Service<br />
Authority/Owner<br />
NI Water<br />
Description Requirements Group<br />
Foul & Connection of new foul and storm drainage A<br />
storm system to existing combined sewers.<br />
drainage<br />
Protection during the works.<br />
A<br />
NI Water Water mains Connection of new water main to existing<br />
water main.<br />
A<br />
Protection during the works.<br />
A<br />
NIE<br />
Electricity<br />
Connection of new buildings to existing<br />
A<br />
supply<br />
electricity supply.<br />
Protection during the works.<br />
A<br />
Key :-<br />
A<br />
B<br />
C<br />
D<br />
E<br />
Work expected to be completed before the commencement of the Works.<br />
Work required after commencement of the Works which does not require prior work by<br />
the Contractor.<br />
Work required after commencement of the Works which does require prior work by the<br />
Contractor.<br />
Work expected to be in progress at the commencement of the Works.<br />
Work to be wholly undertaken by the Contractor<br />
169
APPENDIX 1/17:<br />
TRAFFIC SAFETY AND MANAGEMENT<br />
1. Traffic safety and management requirements<br />
1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for traffic safety and management and associated work both<br />
within and beyond the site extents, as described in Clause 117NI and Clause 104NI (Appendix A:<br />
Scheme 12A), of the Specification for Highway Works and Chapter 8 of the Traffic Signs Manual,<br />
and Code of Practice for ‘Safety at Street Works and Road Works’ and the following: -<br />
1.2 The Contractor shall submit his proposals, inclusive of risk assessment and method statements<br />
for traffic safety and management to the Project Manager & <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> not less than 4<br />
weeks before the Contractor wishes to implement them. The Contractor shall organise a meeting<br />
with the Project Manager & <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> to discuss his proposals; this meeting shall take<br />
place not less than 2 weeks before the Contractor wishes to implement his proposals. The<br />
Contractor shall take all comments of the Project Manager & <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> on board and<br />
amend his plans, as appropriate. No works on site shall commence until the traffic<br />
management proposals have been submitted and discussed with the Project Manager &<br />
<strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong>. The agreed proposals shall then be fully implemented.<br />
1.3 The Contractor shall ensure that delays to the Cemetery users are kept to a minimum at all times.<br />
1.4 The Project Manager or the Supervisor may stop any works not properly signed in accordance<br />
with Chapter 8 of the Traffic Signs Manual or Code of Practice for ‘Safety at Street Works and<br />
Road Works’ and all the costs and expense thereby incurred shall be borne by the Contractor.<br />
1.5 The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager & <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> with an After Hours<br />
Emergency contact telephone number.<br />
1.6 The Contractor is responsible for traffic safety and management and associated work including<br />
design and the following:<br />
(i.)<br />
Details of phasing of the works.<br />
(ii.)<br />
Drawings showing traffic management details including as appropriate:-<br />
a. Position of traffic signs, maintenance and inspection cones etc.<br />
b. Width of lanes.<br />
c. Working area.<br />
d. Safety zones.<br />
e. Advance traffic signing of approaches to work.<br />
f. Crossover(s)<br />
g. Running lanes for emergency vehicles.<br />
h. Pedestrian facilities<br />
i. Site access/egress and haul routes if required (See Appendix 1/19)<br />
k. Any further information, which is considered appropriate.<br />
170
1.7 The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the need to assess the risks and develop and operate safe<br />
working practices when vehicles and plant are reversing on Site, whether or not they are on part<br />
of the highway. Rule 129 of The Highway Code 1993 is relevant but the Contractor’s practices<br />
and procedures should take account of the different conditions, which will obtain on Site.<br />
The responsibilities of the Traffic Safety and Control Officer and of his nominated deputy shall<br />
also include the following matters:<br />
(1) Monitoring, with the assistance of sufficient mobile personnel and of sufficient other<br />
suitable and appropriate aids, the flow of traffic within the area and within the period<br />
defined for the operation of the vehicle recovery service;<br />
(2) (11/08) Ensuring that, within 5 minutes of notification of the occurrence of an incident,<br />
as defined below, resulting in stationary vehicle(s) on a highway open to the public,<br />
the incident is reported to the vehicle recovery service;<br />
(3) Recording and logging all incidents and all movements of recovery vehicles and,<br />
when called, all movements of the emergency services. For the purposes of this<br />
Appendix, an “incident” is defined as a shed load, vehicle breakdown, vehicle<br />
abandonment or traffic accident, whether or not the latter involves personal injury.<br />
2. Maintenance requirements<br />
2.1 The Contractor will be responsible for the maintenance of all roads (including crossovers) both<br />
within and beyond the site extents as described in Appendix 1/7.The Contractor will be required to<br />
give access to the <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> to carry out any necessary duties.<br />
3. Notice requirements<br />
3.1 Notice required by the <strong>Council</strong> in order to arrange for:<br />
(i) amending or making traffic orders: 4 weeks<br />
(ii) authorising of non-prescribed signs: 4 weeks<br />
(iii) authorising temporary traffic arrangements: 2 weeks<br />
(iv) moving signs to be compatible with the state of the Works: 1 week<br />
171
4. Highways, Private Roads and other ways affected by the Works<br />
Description Predicted<br />
24 hr<br />
AADT<br />
Speed<br />
Limit<br />
(mph)<br />
Type(s) of<br />
Traffic<br />
Control<br />
Special<br />
Facilities<br />
Whether to be kept<br />
open or closed<br />
Cemetery<br />
NA<br />
5 Mph<br />
None<br />
To Be Kept Open At<br />
Roads<br />
All Times<br />
To Be Kept Open At<br />
Public<br />
Unknown<br />
30mph<br />
All Times<br />
Roads<br />
Highways including footpaths, cycle tracks and bridleways, described above are one responsible :<br />
Authority Department of the Regional Development for (NI), Roads Service, Northern<br />
Division<br />
Address County Hall, Castlerock Road, COLERAINE, BT42 1QG<br />
Tel No 028 70341300<br />
5. Driver information signs at roadworks<br />
5.1 The Contractor shall provide adequate advance warning information signs prior to the<br />
implementation or amendment of any traffic management arrangements. All signing proposals<br />
shall be subject to approval by the RSTS, Coleraine.<br />
6. Additional requirements<br />
General<br />
6.1 Cones to be used at tapers and longitudinally on the Lonemoor Road should have a minimum<br />
height of 1000 mm.<br />
6.2 All signs, which will be required to remain in place overnight, shall have retro-reflective faces in<br />
accordance with BS EN 1463-2:2000.<br />
6.3 Road danger lamps (Steady State) shall comply with BS 3143 and shall be used throughout the<br />
scheme. Where the Contractor chooses to use flashing lamps they shall comply with BS 3143<br />
except that the flashing rate for these lamps shall be within the range 120 -150 flashes per<br />
minute. The minimum luminous intensity of the lamps shall be 0.5 candela for steady lamps, 1.0<br />
candela for ripple lamps at their peak and 1.5 candela for flashing lamps at their peak<br />
6.4 The Contractor shall keep clean and legible at all times all traffic signs, road markings, lamps,<br />
barriers and traffic control signals and he shall position, reposition, cover or remove them as<br />
necessitated by the progress of the Works. The Contractor shall inspect the Site Traffic TM<br />
172
(signage and coning) a minimum of 3 times a day to ensure legible and a written record of the<br />
daily inspection route shall be mentioned throughout the duration of the Contract.<br />
6.5 The delivery, erection and removal of signs, lamps, cones etc shall be undertaken by trained<br />
competent operatives who shall wear approved reflective clothing. Details of relevant<br />
qualifications and training received by the Contractor’s Traffic Management Staff must be<br />
submitted for review at the time of submission (refer to Section 1.2 above).<br />
7.6 All site vehicles shall be fitted with roof mounted flashing or rotating lamps. Hazard-warning lights<br />
will not be a permitted alternative.<br />
7.7 All Employees and Sub-Contractors shall at all times whilst on the site wear approved reflective<br />
or fluorescent clothing.<br />
7.9 The Contractor shall not commence any work, which affects the public, or cemetery, roads until all<br />
traffic safety measures necessitated by the work are fully operational.<br />
7.12 The Contractor shall when preparing his traffic management submission, consider the information<br />
contained in the following documents:<br />
• TA 23/99 Short Duration stops on Trunk Roads (including motorways) for Inspection<br />
purposes – traffic hazards,<br />
• TA 6/80 Traffic Signs and Safety Measures for Minor Works on Minor Roads,<br />
• TD 14/83 Amd No 1July 1984 Signing for Traffic Management at Certain Major Road<br />
Work Sites,<br />
• TRMM/9/85 Trunk Road Management and Maintenance Notices & Traffic Management if<br />
Roadworks (other than Contraflow) on the Departments Motorways and all purpose<br />
Trunk Roads.<br />
173
APPENDIX 1/18: TEMPORARY DIVERSIONS OF TRAFFIC<br />
1 Short term temporary traffic diversions will not be permitted on the Lonemoor Road but may be<br />
acceptable within the Cemetery subject to <strong>Council</strong> approval, normal notice period outlined above<br />
will apply.<br />
APPENDIX 1/21: INFORMATION BOARDS<br />
174
APPENDIX 1/23: RISKS TO HEALTH & SAFETY FROM MATERIALS AND SUBSTANCES<br />
1 Restrictions In Relation To Traffic Management Measures<br />
a. Refer to Appendix 1/17.<br />
2 Restrictions In Relation To Working Practices<br />
a. Refer to Appendix 1/9 and 1/17.<br />
3 Measures To Be Taken To Protect Members Of The Public<br />
a. Refer to Appendix 1/17 and Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note HSG151 -<br />
Protecting the public.<br />
4 Monitoring to be undertaken by Contractor<br />
Substances Hazardous To Health<br />
In this Clause “substance hazardous to health” has the same meaning as in:<br />
a. Regulation 2 of the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations (Northern<br />
Ireland) 2003 (COSHH(NI)).<br />
b. Regulation 2 of the Control of Lead at Work Regulations (Northern Ireland) 2003<br />
(CLAW(NI)).<br />
c. Regulation 2 of the Control of Asbestos at Work Regulations (Northern Ireland) 2007<br />
(CAW(NI)).<br />
d. A substance hazardous to health shall only be used or generated in or about the Works<br />
where specified in the Contract or with the consent of the Project Manager.<br />
e. Where any substance hazardous to health is so used or generated the Contractor shall<br />
provide the Project Manager:<br />
i<br />
a copy of the assessment of the risks created by the use of that substance as<br />
required by Regulation 6 of the COSHH(NI) Regulations, Regulation 4 of the<br />
CLAW(NI) Regulations or Regulation 5 of the CAW(NI) Regulations as appropriate;<br />
and<br />
ii<br />
details of the measures to be taken to prevent or adequately control the exposure<br />
of those working with or those who may be affected by the substance as required<br />
by Regulation 7 of the COSHH(NI) Regulations, Regulations 5-16 of the CLAW(NI)<br />
Regulations or Regulations 7-18 of the CAW(NI) Regulations as appropriate.<br />
175
iii<br />
the information required in (i) and (ii) above shall be provided to the Project<br />
Manager at least 14 days prior to the use of or incorporation into the Works of<br />
substances hazardous to health or where appropriate at the<br />
commencement of the Works where this is less than 14 days.<br />
iv<br />
In addition to anything required to be done by the Contractor by or under the<br />
Conditions of Contract or any relevant legislation, the Contractor shall implement<br />
the requirements described in Appendix 1/23 to prevent, control or monitor<br />
exposure of members of the public to any substance hazardous to health used or<br />
generated in or about the Works.<br />
f. If the Contractor proposes to use or generate any substance hazardous to health which has not<br />
been specified in the Contract, or proposes under the Clause 104 to substitute for goods or<br />
material so specified equivalent alternative goods or material which is classified as a substance<br />
hazardous to health then. The Contractor shall inform the Project Manager of the measures he<br />
proposes to take to assess the risks to the health of members of the public and to monitor and<br />
prevent or control any such risk.<br />
g. The Contractor shall, in relation to work with any substance hazardous to health, advise the<br />
Project Manager the information, instruction, training and supervision to be provided for the<br />
Contractor’s employees and any other person with reason to enter the area in which the hazard<br />
exists, and the provisions to be made for monitoring their health.<br />
h. Where the measures referred to in sub-Clause e(ii) of this Clause necessitate the use of<br />
protective clothing or other safety apparatus the Contractor shall:<br />
i. provide the Project Manager and his staff with sufficient suitable items of such protective clothing<br />
and other safety apparatus so far as they are not otherwise supplied under Appendix 1/1;<br />
ii<br />
arrange for the proper storage, maintenance and, if necessary, regular testing and<br />
replacement of the items provided to the Project Manager and his staff; and<br />
iii<br />
arrange for appropriate training or instruction for the Project Manager and his staff in the<br />
use of such items.<br />
176
APPENDIX 1/24 : QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM<br />
1. QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM<br />
The Contractor shall institute a quality management system generally complying with BE EN ISO 9002<br />
1994 incorporating as a minimum the following aspects:<br />
a. Objectives<br />
b. Organisation & Staff Responsibilities Organisation Chart<br />
Staff profiles and responsibilities Delegation<br />
Lines of Command and Communication<br />
b. Works Procedures Administrative Procedures<br />
Control of Documents<br />
Control of subContractors<br />
Lists of Methods Statements<br />
Ordering and monitoring materials<br />
Control of Temporary Works<br />
Control of Temporary Traffic Management<br />
Liaison with third parties including police<br />
Liaison with service authorities<br />
Liaison with Landowners and Local Communities<br />
Dealing with complaints<br />
QA audits and responsibilities<br />
Non-Conformances<br />
Pollution Control<br />
Environmental Management (Refer to Section 2)<br />
Supervision of construction<br />
c. Method Statements For every construction procedure<br />
d. Check Lists For every construction procedure<br />
e. Inspection and Testing Materials Records<br />
Materials Testing<br />
Inspection Plans<br />
f. Quality review Quality Review<br />
Quality Audits<br />
Quality Records<br />
g. Health and Safety Control<br />
Audits<br />
The quality management system shall be described in a Quality Plan that shall be submitted to the<br />
Engineer (refer to Section 3 of this Appendix).<br />
177
Method Statements and Check Lists must be prepared for every construction operation and submitted to<br />
the Engineer for comment no later than 10 days prior to commencement of any associated work or activity.<br />
Hold points must be identified to allow for checking and material testing at appropriate points. Where<br />
required hold points must be inserted to allow the Engineers representative to check materials and the<br />
Works. Work may not proceed until the Engineers Representative has given his consent to proceed.<br />
The Contractor must identify an individual to act as resident Quality Manager on site. This need not be a<br />
full time appointment but adequate time must be allowed for his activities. Independent Audits covering<br />
Quality and Health and Safety from their office based staff are to take place at monthly intervals as a<br />
minimum.<br />
2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM<br />
The Contractor shall institute and maintain, during the construction of the Works and environmental<br />
management system. This shall define the responsibilities, practices and procedures provided for<br />
environmental management and shall form part of the Quality Management Plan as detailed in this<br />
Appendix 1/24 of the Specification.<br />
It shall be developed to avoid wherever possible environmental accidents and pollution to encourage<br />
reduced consumption of resources, to restrict the production of waste and to promote good relationships<br />
with the relevant authorities. Commitments made regarding mitigation, their implementation and<br />
subsequent monitoring shall be recorded.<br />
Notwithstanding any other requirements of the Contract, the Environmental Management System shall:<br />
a. Include site specific Method Statements for all operations where there is a risk of<br />
environmental damage. These shall show how the proposed methods of construction<br />
shall restrict impacts on the environment, and how contingency plans and emergency<br />
procedures shall limit damage caused by accidents, spillage or any other unforeseen<br />
events. The Method Statements shall include notification procedures to the relevant<br />
authorities;<br />
b. Ensure that the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer details of the Environmental<br />
Management System and Method Statements for approval in advance of the<br />
construction of the Works. The Works shall not be commenced without such approval<br />
having being obtained in writing from the Engineer.<br />
c. The Contractor will liaise with the local community during the Contract. This shall<br />
include providing information about activities likely to give rise to nuisance, and a<br />
telephone number for complaints to be registered. A log of all complaints and follow up<br />
actions shall be kept and made available for inspection by the Engineer.<br />
3 SUBMISSION OF INFORMATION TO PROJECT MANAGER<br />
178
The Quality Plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval not later than 21 days after the<br />
Contract date.<br />
179
APPENDIX 2/1: LIST OF BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES TO BE DEMOLISHED<br />
LOCATION DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. REQUIREMENTS<br />
Hard<br />
Standing<br />
Areas on<br />
Site<br />
Demolition of existing hard standing<br />
area and associated access i.e<br />
access step and concrete wall<br />
See Drawing No.<br />
073030/GA/02<br />
Removal structures,<br />
including sub-structure<br />
walls, concrete floor slabs<br />
and foundations. All debris<br />
to be taken to tip off site.<br />
2.1.1 All tenderers are advised to visit the site during the tender period (i.e. by appointment with the<br />
Employer) to fully acquaint themselves with the layout/topography of the site, the form and<br />
content of the existing structures to be demolished and any restrictions with regard to<br />
ingress/egress to the site and restrictions within working areas.<br />
2.1.2 All existing structures are to be examined prior to demolition to establish their structural form. The<br />
contractor shall ensure that demolition of the existing structures is carried out in a planned and<br />
controlled sequence to avoid any uncontrolled collapse of the structures.<br />
2.1.3 Consideration must be given to <strong>Council</strong> personnel and members of the public working/living<br />
adjacent to structures to be demolished.<br />
2.1.4 A carefully planned method of removing existing masonry, concrete, etc must be enforced on site.<br />
2.1.5 The Principal Contractor is required to ensure that large sections of concrete, masonry, cladding,<br />
etc will not fall freely to the ground by employing a safe system of work.<br />
2.1.6 Damping down of structures to be demolished should be undertaken during demolition<br />
operations. Controlled demolition operations and dust monitoring to be carried out.<br />
2.1.7 Prior to works commencing; the Contractor is to carry out a careful survey to ensure that the<br />
demolition/site clearance operations will not cause harm to persons, or property, from harmful<br />
materials being spilled, or dispersed.<br />
2.1.8 The ground conditions and the presence of any contaminated soil has not been established. The<br />
Principal Contractor will be responsible for ensuring that contaminated ground is identified and<br />
treated in an appropriate manner to safeguard site operatives, members of the public and <strong>Council</strong><br />
staff. The Project Manager shall be notified should any contaminated ground, or suspected<br />
contaminated ground, be uncovered on site. No suspected contaminated material will removed off<br />
site until permission to do so has been given by the Project Manager.<br />
180
APPENDIX 2/2: FILLING OF TRENCHES AND PIPES.<br />
1. EXISTING TRENCHES MORE THAN ONE METRE FROM EXISTING BOUNDARY WALLS:<br />
Where the bottom of an existing drainage trench is below a critical level, (defined below) remove<br />
existing trench fill and backfill with grade 15 N/mm 2 concrete surround, the top of the concrete<br />
being not lower than the critical level. For the purpose of this clause the critical level is D mm<br />
lower than level of foundation bottom, D mm being equal to the horizontal distance of the near<br />
side of the trench from the wall, minus 150 mm. The Project Manager is to be informed by the<br />
Contractor in advance of trench excavation if this situation arises. The Contractor to allow in his<br />
rates for all temporary works and sequencing of the works to ensure that new, or any adjacent<br />
exiting foundation, are not undermined by these works (see also contract drawings for further<br />
details).<br />
2. EXISTING ABANDONED PIPES:<br />
Where existing pipes are uncovered on site or are abandoned due to the new works, existing<br />
pipes should be removed entirely back to their nearest manhole still in use unless noted otherwise<br />
by the Project Manager on site. The Project Manager shall be notified about any uncovered pipes<br />
prior to any works being carried out to them.<br />
APPENDIX 2/4 EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING<br />
1. The use of explosives and/or blasting shall not be allowed on site under any circumstances.<br />
APPENDIX 2/5: HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.<br />
1. See appendix 1/23, special requirements in relation to hazards and other relevant sections of<br />
contract documents.<br />
181
APPENDIX 3/1: FENCING, GATES AND STILES<br />
1. General<br />
All permanent and temporary fencing shall comply with Series 300 of the Specification for<br />
Highways Works unless otherwise stated in this Appendix.<br />
2. Temporary Fencing<br />
At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall erect Temporary Fencing around the<br />
full site boundary, as indicated on the Contract Drawings and shall mainatain the fencing in place<br />
for the duration of the contract. The type of fencing to be used is weldmesh panel fencing. Posts<br />
shall be 38mm od steel tubing 2000mm long set in precast concrete feet 720*230*150 high at<br />
3500mm centres or embedded in the ground as required for stability. Panels shall be weldmesh<br />
75x300 appertures with 4.8mm dia wire and shall be 3500mm long and 2000mm high above<br />
ground level. The panels shall be securely welded to the posts and the posts shall be interlinked<br />
by two number fencing couplers. Gates shall be of the same specification and shall be integral<br />
with the fencing. All metal sections of the fence shall be hot dipped galvanised.<br />
3. Semi Permanent Fencing Around Japanese Knotweed Areas<br />
At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall erect Semi Temporary Fencing<br />
around all the areas where Japanese Knotweed has been identified, as indicated on the Contract<br />
Drawings. The type of fencing shall be NK Fencing Ibex Eco Weldmesh panel system or<br />
approved equivalent. It shall have an installed height of 1.85m using 1850mm high x 3006mm<br />
wide, 4 No reinforcing beams, 200 x 50mm mesh size, 5mm diameter horizontal wires, 5mm<br />
diameter vertical wires having 22mm protruding panels. The posts shall be 60 x 40mm RHS<br />
intermediate fence posts. Maximum centres of posts: 3.050m. Set posts in hole 300 x 300 x 700<br />
deep completely filled with 20N concrete. The panels shall be fixed to the posts with 4 No NK<br />
Clamp Type 009 using twin M8 tamper-resistant bolts. The posts and fence shall be galvanized to<br />
BS EN ISO1461:2009<br />
4. Permanent Fencing<br />
Details of the locations and extent of the permanent fencing to be provided in this Contract are<br />
shown on the drawings.<br />
4.1 Railings<br />
Manufacturer: To be confirmed/manufactured by Main Contractor<br />
Drawing References: 83473 - 01, 02, 03, 04 & 05<br />
Railing Height above ground level: 1400 mm (although with a 50mm curved top to<br />
each post makes the overall height 1450mm)<br />
Material: Galvanised Mild Steel. All materials to be polyester powder coated Colour<br />
Black RAL 9005.<br />
182
Posts: 60 x10mm thick at top reaching 125 x 10mm thick at the base 1900mm long<br />
approximately – as shown on the drawings, solid galvanised mild steel posts complete<br />
with rounded top and welded base plate 50 x 200 x 10mm thick to key into concrete<br />
foundation. Posts pre-drilled to accommodate 6 Nr. 20mm diameter solid horizontal<br />
bars. Posts set in 450 x 450 x 610mm deep mass concrete surround (although there<br />
will be an element of Contractor Designed solution for the foundations of posts linked to<br />
the Contractor Designed Retaining Walls. Posts at 1.0m centres.<br />
Straining posts: Posts as above, but complete with a 6 Nr double sets of circular<br />
receiving lugs welded to each post to receive 6 Nr 20mm diameter horizontals each<br />
side. Straining Posts set in an additional concrete foundation of 550 x 550 x 610 mm<br />
deep mass concrete surround. Posts at 4.0m centres.<br />
End Posts: As above with only 6 Nr single circular receiving lugs as shown on the<br />
drawings<br />
Horizontal Rails: 6 Nr 20 mm diameter solid galvanised mild steel rails.<br />
Method of setting posts: In concrete as described above and as shown on the drawings<br />
or as Contractor Designed i.e. set in concrete pipe work set in concrete as the retaining<br />
wall is constructed to accommodate posts after site measurements.<br />
Other requirements: No sharp edges on either posts or rails. Rails to be parallel to<br />
ground level and not stepped. Allow for all radii and curves on site.<br />
4. Timber Panel Fencing<br />
All as per Contract Drawings and relevant British Standards for Fencing.<br />
183
APPENDIX 4/1 ROAD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (VEHICLE AND PEDESTRIAN)<br />
1 Location<br />
1.1 Road Restraint Systems – Safety Barriers<br />
New road restraint systems – safety barriers and their associated terminal sections and<br />
anchorages - are required for this project. Details of the location of all new safety barriers to be<br />
installed on site as part of the permanent works are shown on the Contract Drawings. Details of<br />
the performance containment class and working width requirements are detailed in Schedule to<br />
this Appendix. All new road restraint systems installed on site shall conform to the requirements<br />
of DEM 55/03, the IRRRS (Interim Requirements for Road Restraint Systems, Revision 1)<br />
document and BS EN 1317. Only systems that have current Systems Approval with the<br />
Highways Agency will be permitted to be used on this Contract.<br />
1.2 Pedestrian Restraint Systems<br />
The location for pedestrian parapets and pedestrian guardrails are shown on the Contract<br />
Drawings<br />
2 Other Details:<br />
2.1 Safety Barriers, Terminals, Transitions and Crash Cushions<br />
• Requirements for safety barriers, terminals and transitions are as per the requirements of<br />
Clauses 401, 402 and 403.<br />
• Requirements for crash cushions are as per the requirements of Clauses 401 and 403.<br />
2.2 Vehicle Parapets Including Anchorages and Attachment Systems<br />
• Requirements for vehicle parapets are as per the requirements of Clauses 401 and 406.<br />
2.3 Pedestrian Restraint Systems<br />
• Requirements for pedestrian parapets and pedestrian guardrails - see also Table C.1 of<br />
BS 7818<br />
184
APPENDIX 4/1 ROAD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (VEHICLE AND PEDESTRIAN)(Continued)<br />
3 Testing<br />
All testing of restraint systems to be as per required with reference to Appendix 1/5, and comply<br />
with clauses within Series 400 of the SHW<br />
3.1 Destructive Testing<br />
• Provision of copies of certified reports of destructive tests and for supply of test<br />
Components should be forwarded to the Project Manager.<br />
3.2 Site Testing on Post Foundations<br />
• Requirements for site load tests on safety barrier, terminal, transition and crash cushion<br />
postfoundations are per the requirement of Clause 404.<br />
3.3 Inspection and Testing of Vehicle Parapet Posts<br />
• Requirements for inspection are as per the requirements of Clause 409.<br />
• Requirements for static testing of posts are as per the requirements of Clause 409.<br />
3.4 Site Testing on Anchorages in Drilled Holes<br />
• On site testing of anchorages in drilled hole to be as per clause 404 and 410 is the SHW.<br />
4 Schedule of Road Restraint Systems (Vehicle)<br />
See the tables on the following pages.<br />
For details of the Pedestrian Restraint System please see the Contract Drawings.<br />
185
APPENDIX 4/1 ROAD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (VEHICLE AND PEDESTRIAN) (Cont’d)<br />
Schedule of Road Restraint Systems (Vehicle and Pedestrian):<br />
Location<br />
Type of Road<br />
Restraint System<br />
(Preferred)<br />
Containment<br />
Performance<br />
Class<br />
Drawing<br />
Reference<br />
Road 1 verges Single Sided N2 GA/12 & GA/13<br />
(precise alignment<br />
t.b.c. on site)<br />
Minimum<br />
Set-back (m)<br />
Maximum Working<br />
Width<br />
Other<br />
Requirements<br />
or Comments<br />
0.6 W2; 0.8 m ASI A<br />
186
APPENDIX 4/2: INFORMATION REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE OF ROAD<br />
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS TO BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD<br />
ENV 1317-4 : 2002<br />
The Contractor shall submit the following supporting information demonstrating compliance with BS EN<br />
1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 and DD ENV 1317-4:2002 to the Project Manager for acceptance:<br />
EUROPEAN COMMITTEE FOR STANDARDISATION (CEN) COMPLIANCE<br />
Initial submission documents to be supplied for consideration of initial type test are as follows:<br />
1. Test report in accordance with BS EN 1317-1, clause 8 (and including any additional test data<br />
required under BS EN 1317-3, clauses 7.3 and 7.4 and DD ENV 1317-4:2002, clauses 7.3 and 7.4)<br />
2. Video/high speed film of test annotated showing date, test number and performance class.<br />
3. Still photographs of complete installation including anchorage points.<br />
4. Still photographs of vehicle before and after impact.<br />
5. Full drawings of tested items.<br />
6. Certification from the manufacturer that the item tested complies with drawings supplied.<br />
7. Certificate from test house accredited in accordance with the requirements of Series 400 (MCHW<br />
1.400).<br />
Additional information, which will be required on acceptance of initial type test prior to installation.<br />
8. Manufacturer’s specification.<br />
9. Installation drawings.<br />
10. Manufacturer’s installation instructions including foundation requirements and test methods to verify<br />
their performance.<br />
11. Manufacturer’s repair and maintenance manual.<br />
12. Certificate of compliance with the Quality Management Scheme 1 for the Manufacture of Fencing<br />
Components. 2<br />
13. Compliance with the Quality Management Sector Scheme 2 – Supply and Installation of Fences:<br />
(i) Section Scheme 2B for Vehicle Restraint Systems. 2<br />
14. Certificate of compliance for the Quality Managements Section Scheme 5 for the Fabrication and<br />
Installation of Bridge Parapets and Cradle Anchorages. 3 :<br />
(i) Section Scheme 5A for The Manufacture of Parapets for Road Restraint Systems; and<br />
(ii) Sector Scheme 5B for The Installation of Parapets for Road Restraint Systems.<br />
15. Nominal loads (direct forces, moments and co-existent shears) to be transferred from the parapet<br />
to the structure or foundation. 2&3<br />
Notes:<br />
1. All documents, which are not in English, will have to be translated. If they are in a language other<br />
than French or German the promoter will be required to supply a full translation.<br />
2. Items 12 and 13 are required for safety barrier systems and transitions.<br />
3. Items 14 and 15 are required for vehicle parapets.<br />
187
APPENDIX 4/2: INFORMATION REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE OF ROAD RESTRAINT<br />
SYSTEMS TO BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4 : 2002<br />
(CONTINUED)<br />
Sheet 1 of 4<br />
SUBMISSION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4:2002<br />
TYPE OF VEHICLE RESTRAINT SYSTEM:<br />
CONTAINMENT PERFORMANCE CLASS/PERFORMANCE LEVEL/PERFORMANCE CLASS (*):<br />
TEST REPORT NUMBER: (Test of )<br />
TEST NUMBER: TEST DATE: (*) delete as appropriate<br />
COMPANY NAME:<br />
CONTACT:<br />
ADDRESS:<br />
Tel:/Fax:/E-mail:<br />
PRODUCT NAME:<br />
Initial submission documents to be supplied for consideration of Initial Type Test (ITT)<br />
Item Comment Item Received<br />
(Y or N) Date requested<br />
1 Test report In accordance with BS EN 1317-1, clause 8 (and including any additional test data -<br />
required under BS EN 1317-3, clause 7.3 and 7.4 and DD ENV 1317-4:2002, clause<br />
7.3 and 7.4)<br />
2 Video/high speed film Of test coverage as specified in relevant part of BS EN 1317 or DD ENV 1317-<br />
4:2002.<br />
Annotated showing date, test number and performance class.<br />
3 Still photographs Of complete installation including anchorage points.<br />
4 Still photographs Of vehicle before and after impact.<br />
5 Drawings Fully detailed drawings of tested item.<br />
6 Certification from the Confirming that the item tested complies with drawings supplied.<br />
manufacturer<br />
7 Confirmation from test<br />
house<br />
That the test conforms to the relevant requirements of BS EN 1317-1 (and including<br />
any additional test data required under BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 and DD ENV<br />
1317-4:2002)<br />
Additional information, which will be required on acceptance of initial type test prior to installation<br />
8 System specification Manufacturer’s specification<br />
9 Installation details Manufacturer’s drawings<br />
10 Installation procedures Manufacturer’s installation instructions<br />
11 Maintenance Manual Manufacturer’s inspection, repair and maintenance instructions<br />
12 Certificate of compliance With the Quality Management Scheme 1 for Manufacture of Fencing Components. 2<br />
13 Certificate of compliance With the Sector Scheme 2B for the Supply and Installation of Fences Vehicle<br />
Restraint Systems. 2<br />
14 Certificate of compliance With the Quality Management Schemes 5 for the Fabrication and Installation of<br />
Bridge Parapets and Cradle Anchorages 3 .<br />
(i) Sector Scheme 5A for The Manufacture of Parapets for Road Restraint<br />
Systems; and<br />
(ii) Sector Scheme 5B for The Installation of Parapets for Road Restraint<br />
Systems.<br />
15 Support loads Nominal loads (direct loads, bending moments and shear forces) that have to be<br />
transferred from the vehicle restraint system to the support structure or foundation. 2<br />
Notes:<br />
1 All documents, which are not in English , will have to be translated. If they are in a language other than French or German the promoter will be require to supply a full<br />
translation.<br />
2 Items 12 and 13 are required for safety barrier systems and transition.<br />
3 Items 14 and 15 are required for vehicle parapets<br />
Signature:<br />
Name:<br />
Date:<br />
188
APPENDIX 4/2: INFORMATION REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE OF ROAD RESTRAINT<br />
SYSTEMS TO BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4 : 2002<br />
(CONTINUED)<br />
Sheet 2 of 4<br />
SUBMISSION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2 AND DD ENV 1317-4:2002<br />
TYPE OF VEHICLE RESTRAINT SYSTEM: Safety Barrier, Vehicle Parapet or Transition (*)<br />
CONTAINMENT PERFORMANCE CLASS/ LEVEL (*):<br />
TEST REPORT NUMBER: (Test of )<br />
Test Type: (Primary/Complementary Test) (*)<br />
TEST NUMBER: TEST DATE: (*) delete as appropriate<br />
COMPANY NAME:<br />
CONTACT:<br />
ADDRESS:<br />
Tel:/Fax:/E-mail:<br />
PRODUCT NAME:<br />
Specified Actual Satisfactory<br />
Compliance<br />
(Yes or No)<br />
BS EN 1317- Vehicle Details Impact Conditions<br />
1 Table 1<br />
Total vehicle mass (kg)<br />
Speed (kmh)<br />
Angle (degrees)<br />
………(±….)<br />
………(0, +7%)<br />
………(-1, +1.5)<br />
Centre of Gravity<br />
Vertical height (m)<br />
Longitudinal height (m)<br />
Lateral (m)<br />
………(± 10%)<br />
………(± 10%)<br />
± ………..<br />
Model<br />
N/A<br />
BS EN Vehicle Restraint<br />
1317-2 System (VRS)<br />
clause 4.2 Behaviour<br />
BS EN 1317- Vehicle<br />
2<br />
Behaviour<br />
clause 4.3<br />
BS EN 1317- Installation<br />
2,<br />
clause 5.3.2<br />
BS EN 1317-<br />
2.<br />
Severity<br />
clause 4.4 Indicies<br />
BS EN<br />
1317-2, Photographic<br />
clause 5.6 coverage<br />
Figure 3<br />
Drawings<br />
1) the VRS shall contain and redirect the vehicle without breakage of principal<br />
longitudinal elements of the system<br />
2) No major part of the VRS shall become totally detached or present an undue<br />
hazard to other traffic, pedestrians or personnel in a work zone.<br />
3) Elements of the VRS shall not penetrate the passenger compartment of the<br />
vehicle. Deformations of, or intrusions into the passenger compartment that can<br />
cause serious injuries are not permitted.<br />
4) Ground anchorages and fixings shall perform according to the design of the VRS<br />
1) The centre of gravity (CG) of the vehicle shall not cross the centreline of the<br />
deformed system.<br />
2) The vehicle shall remain upright during and after impact, although moderate rolling,<br />
pitching and yawing are acceptable.<br />
3) The vehicle shall leave the VRS after impact, so that the wheel track does not<br />
cross a line parallel to the initial traffic face of the VRS, at a distance A (2.2 m) plus<br />
vehicle width +16% of the length of the vehicle within a distance B (10 m) from the<br />
final intersection (break) of wheel track with the initial traffic face of the VRS.<br />
1) The length of the VRS shall be sufficient to demonstrate the full performance<br />
characteristics of the system.<br />
2) If the VRS has to develop tension, end anchorages shall be provided in<br />
accordance with the VRS specification. Post foundation shall meet the design<br />
specification.<br />
Specified<br />
Actual<br />
THIV Limit 33 km/h<br />
THIV ………. km/h<br />
PHD Limit 20 g<br />
PHD ………. g<br />
ASI Limit 1.4<br />
ASI ……….<br />
1) Photographic coverage shall be sufficient to clearly describe behaviour and vehicle<br />
motion during and after impact.<br />
2) High speed cameras shall be operated at a minimum of 200 frames per second<br />
and stills.<br />
3) As recommended in clause 5.6 and Figure 4<br />
Drawing included<br />
N/A = Not Applicable<br />
FULLY COMPLIES WITH STANDARD: BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, DD ENV 1317-4:2002<br />
Signature:<br />
Name:<br />
Date:<br />
189
APPENDIX 4/2: INFORMATION REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE OF ROAD RESTRAINT<br />
SYSTEMS TO BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4 : 2002<br />
(CONTINUED)<br />
Sheet 3 of 4<br />
SUBMISSION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH BS EN 1317-1 AND BS EN 1317-3<br />
TYPE OF VEHICLE RESTRAINT SYSTEM: Crush Cushion (R) or Non-redirective (NR) (*)<br />
TEST REPORT NUMBER: TEST TYPE: (Primary/Complementary Test) (*)<br />
PERFORMANCE LEVEL: VELOCITY CLASS: (Test of )<br />
TEST NUMBER: TEST DATE: (*) delete as appropriate<br />
COMPANY NAME:<br />
CONTACT:<br />
ADDRESS:<br />
Tel:/Fax:/E-mail:<br />
PRODUCT NAME:<br />
Specified Actual Satisfactory<br />
Compliance<br />
(Yes or No)<br />
BS EN 1317- Vehicle Details Impact Conditions<br />
1 Table 1<br />
Total vehicle mass (kg)<br />
Speed (kmh)<br />
Angle (degrees)<br />
………(±….)<br />
………(0, +7%)<br />
………(-1, +1.5)<br />
Centre of Gravity<br />
Vertical height (m)<br />
Longitudinal height (m)<br />
Lateral (m)<br />
………(± 10%)<br />
………(± 10%)<br />
± ………..<br />
Model<br />
N/A<br />
BS EN 1317-<br />
3, clause 6.2<br />
Crash Cushion<br />
Behaviour<br />
1) Elements of the crash cushion shall not penetrate the passenger compartment of<br />
the vehicle. Deformations of, or intrusions into, the passenger compartment that<br />
could cause serious injuries are not permitted.<br />
2) No major element of the crash cushion, having a solid mass greater than or equal<br />
to 2.0 kg, shall become totally detached, unless this is required by the working of the<br />
crash cushion. No major element of the crash cushion shall impede the path of<br />
adjacent traffic. The final position of the detached element shall be considered to<br />
determine the displacement classification.<br />
BS EN<br />
1317-3<br />
clause 6.3<br />
Vehicle<br />
Behaviour<br />
1) The vehicle shall remain upright during and after the collision although yawing and<br />
moderate rolling and pitching are acceptable. The post-impact trajectory of the test<br />
vehicle shall be controlled by means of the exit box shown in Figure 2 and specified<br />
as detailed in Tables 11 and 12.<br />
BS EN 1317-<br />
3<br />
Installation 1) The installation of the crash cushion for the test shall comply with the structural<br />
design details and the on-road system details as given in the design specification.<br />
Clause 7.3.2<br />
BS EN<br />
1317-3<br />
clause 5.4<br />
Table4<br />
Impact Severity<br />
Levels<br />
Specified<br />
Level A : THIV ≤ 44 km/h (Tests 1, 2 & 3)<br />
THIV ≤ 33 km/h (Tests 4 and 5)<br />
ASI ≤ 1.0<br />
Level B : THIV ≤ 44 km/h (Tests 1, 2 & 3)<br />
HIV ≤ 33 km/h (Tests 4 and 5)<br />
ASI ≤ 1.4<br />
Levels A & B : PHD ≤ 20g<br />
Actual<br />
BS EN 1317-<br />
3, clause<br />
7.4.7, Figure<br />
8<br />
Photographic<br />
coverage<br />
1) High speed cameras and/or high speed video cameras shall be operated at<br />
minimum of 200 frames per second.<br />
2) Stills<br />
3) As recommended in clause 7.4.7 and Figure 8.<br />
Drawings Drawing included<br />
FULLY COMPLIES WITH STANDARD: BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-3<br />
Signature:<br />
Date:<br />
Name:<br />
N/A = Not Applicable<br />
190
APPENDIX 4/2: INFORMATION REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE OF ROAD RESTRAINT<br />
SYSTEMS TO BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4 : 2002<br />
(CONTINUED)<br />
Sheet 4 of 4<br />
SUBMISSION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4:2002<br />
TYPE OF VEHICLE RESTRAINT SYSTEM:<br />
Terminal<br />
PERFORMANCE CLASS: (Test of )<br />
Test Type: (Primary/Complementary Test) (*)<br />
TEST TYPE NUMBERl<br />
TEST NUMBER: TEST DATE: (*) delete as appropriate<br />
COMPANY NAME:<br />
CONTACT:<br />
ADDRESS:<br />
Tel:/Fax:/E-mail:<br />
PRODUCT NAME:<br />
Specified Actual Satisfactory<br />
Compliance<br />
(Yes or No)<br />
BS EN 1317- Vehicle Details Impact Conditions<br />
1, Table 1,<br />
DD ENV<br />
1317-4:2002,<br />
Total vehicle mass (kg)<br />
Speed (kmh)<br />
Angle (degrees)<br />
………(±….)<br />
………(0, +7%)<br />
………(-1, +1.5)<br />
clauses 7.4<br />
and 7.5<br />
Centre of Gravity<br />
Vertical height (m)<br />
Longitudinal height (m)<br />
Lateral (m)<br />
………(± 10%)<br />
………(± 10%)<br />
± ………..<br />
Model<br />
N/A<br />
DD ENV<br />
1317-4:2002,<br />
clauses 5.4<br />
and 5.5.2<br />
Terminal<br />
Behaviour<br />
1) Elements of the terminal shall not penetrate the passenger compartment of the<br />
vehicle. Deformations of, or intrusions into, the passenger compartment that could<br />
cause serious injuries are not permitted.<br />
2) No major part of the terminal shall become totally detached and come to rest<br />
outside the permanent lateral displacement zones defined in clause 5.4.<br />
3) Anchorages and fixings shall perform to the terminal design specifications and<br />
other specified requirements as listed in the test report.<br />
DD ENV<br />
1317-4:2002,<br />
clause 5.5.3<br />
Vehicle<br />
Behaviour<br />
1) The vehicle shall not overturn, although rolling, yawing and moderate pitching may<br />
be accepted. For the performance class P1 rolling onto a side may be accepted.<br />
2) The exit box values for the specified test are as defined in Figures 5.6 and 7 (as<br />
appropriate)<br />
DD ENV<br />
1317-4:<br />
Installation 1) The terminal shall conform to the structural design details and with the system<br />
installation details as given in the design specification of the manufacturer.<br />
2002,<br />
clause 7.3.2<br />
DD ENV Impact Severity Specified<br />
Actual<br />
1317-4:<br />
2002, clause<br />
5.5.4 and<br />
Table 5<br />
Classes<br />
Level A : THIV ≤ 44 km/h (Tests 1, 2 & 3)<br />
THIV ≤ 33 km/h (Tests 4 and 5)<br />
ASI ≤ 1.0<br />
Level B : THIV ≤ 44 km/h (Tests 1, 2 & 3)<br />
HIV ≤ 33 km/h (Tests 4 and 5)<br />
ASI ≤ 1.4<br />
Levels A & B : PHD ≤ 20g<br />
DD ENV<br />
1317-4:<br />
2002, clause<br />
7.7 and<br />
Figure 7<br />
Photographic<br />
coverage<br />
1) Photographic coverage shall be sufficient to describe clearly terminal and vehicle<br />
motion during and after impact.<br />
2) High speed cameras and/or high speed video cameras at a minimum of 200 framer<br />
per second.<br />
3) Stills<br />
Drawings Drawing included<br />
`<br />
FULLY COMPLIES WITH STANDARD: BS EN 1317-1, DD ENV 1317-4:2002<br />
Signature:<br />
Date:<br />
Name:<br />
N/A = Not Applicable<br />
191
APPENDIX 5/1: DRAINAGE REQUIREMENTS<br />
1 Layout of drainage of amenities and roads shall be constructed as shown on contract drawings.<br />
The connection of new drainage systems to the existing combined drainage system to be agreed<br />
on site, with Project Manager.<br />
2 Drainage gullies and chambers shall be constructed and detailed as shown on the contract<br />
drawings.<br />
3 The bedding detail to foul and storm drainage is to be Type S as shown on Drawing No. F1,<br />
MCDHW, Volume 3, “Highway Construction Details”. All bedding materials to SHW Clause 503.3.<br />
Where the drain crosses under a carriageway, the backfill above the pipe bedding is to be well<br />
compacted Type 3 material, and comply with any other requirements set down by DRD Roads<br />
Service, or with C20/20 mass concrete as indicated on Drawing No. 073030/GA/35, pending on the<br />
depth of cover to the crown of the pipe.<br />
4 The bedding detail to filter drains to be Type L as shown on Drawing No. F2, MCDHW, Volume 3,<br />
“Highway Construction Details”. All filter material to be Type A. Were the filter drain crosses under a<br />
carriageway, the filter materials are to be substituted by well compacted Type 3 material.<br />
5 Joints to surface water and foul drains shall be watertight. Ridged joints shall not be used.<br />
6 Chamber sizes are indicated on the contract drawings and all in accordance with Standard<br />
Drawings Section 1, Series F of Volume 3 of the Manual for Contracts Documents for Highway<br />
Works.<br />
7 Gully gratings and frames shall be ductile iron to BS EN 124 Group 3.<br />
8 Saddles may be used for gully connections to the filter drains to Cause 508.7.<br />
9 All new road gully chambers shall be trapped, and shall comply with Highway Construction Detail<br />
Drawing No. F13 and Clause 508 of the Specification.<br />
10 Drainage to Structures<br />
The drainage to be provided behind the new contractor designed gabion walls, reinforced earth<br />
walls and crib walls will form part of the contractor’s design but should not comprise less than a 150<br />
mm diameter (minimum) uPVC rigid walled perforated pipes.<br />
11 Testing and cleaning of all foul and storm water drains to comply with clause 509 and as described<br />
listed in Appendix 1/5. Chambers on the foul and storm drainage shall be tested for water-tightness.<br />
All carriers, foul, storm drains to be surveyed by CCTV and copy of survey to be forwarded the<br />
Project manager for approval, before the drainage is brought into use<br />
192
APPENDIX 5/1: DRAINAGE REQUIREMENTS (Continued)<br />
12 Chamber covers and frames shall be to BS EN124 Group 4. Gully gratings and frames shall be<br />
ductile iron to BS EN 124 Group 3. Where existing chambers are being retained, the cover level<br />
and frame shall be raised or lowered to ensure the cover is flush with finished road or surrounding<br />
surface levels.<br />
193
APPENDIX 5/2:<br />
SERVICE DUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
1 Details of the typical duct construction are shown on Drawing No. I2, MCDHW, Volume 3, “Highway<br />
Construction Details”. Details for duct chamber as show on Contract drawings Drawing No.<br />
073030/GA/25.<br />
2 The location, size and type of the service ducts are detailed on the Contract Drawings.<br />
3 Bedding material should be Quarry dust in footways; In-situ concrete mix ST2 (Class E) in<br />
carriageway crossings.<br />
4 Backfilling of Service Ducts in proposed carriageway and footway, shall be Type 3 Clause 850NI<br />
from duct surround to formation level. Service Ducts in existing carriageway backfill shall be<br />
Concrete ST2 from duct surround to basecourse level; In-situ concrete mix ST2 (Class E) in<br />
carriageway crossings<br />
5. Colour coding of ducts is to be in accordance with Health and Safety Executive booklet HS(G)47<br />
6. Location of the existing public services, based on Statutory Bodies record information, is shown on<br />
the Services drawings<br />
194
APPENDIX 5/7 TERMOPLASTIC STRUCTURAL WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS<br />
The Contractor shall provide the following information, in accordance with sub-Clause 518.2 for the range<br />
of pipes and fittings (To be verified by the Certification body – see sub-Clause 518.15):<br />
a. Technical Drawings showing dimensions and tolerances including sealing rings and weight per<br />
metre, together with properties, as specified in sub-Clauses 518.3 and 518.5.<br />
b. material specification, as required in sub-Clause 518.2:<br />
Table 1: Un-plasticised Polyvinyl Chloride<br />
Property Test Method Reference Specification<br />
Tensile Properties BS EN ISO 6259<br />
BS EN ISO 527-1<br />
Vicat BS EN 727<br />
Longitudinal revision BS EN 743<br />
K-value BS EN 922<br />
PVC Content BS EN 1905<br />
Density<br />
BS EN ISO 1183-3, ISO<br />
4451<br />
Heat Revision ISO 12091<br />
Effects of heat<br />
(injection moulded<br />
fittings only)<br />
BS EN 763<br />
Table 2: Polyethylene (PE)<br />
Property Test Method Reference Specification<br />
Tensile Properties BS EN ISO 6259<br />
BS EN ISO 527-1<br />
Oxygen induction<br />
time<br />
BS EN 728<br />
Melt Flow Rate BS EN ISO 1133<br />
Density<br />
BS EN ISO 1183-3, ISO<br />
4451<br />
Heat Revision ISO 12091<br />
Effects of heat<br />
(injection moulded<br />
fittings only)<br />
BS EN 763<br />
195
APPENDIX 5/7 THERMOPLASTIC STRUCTURAL WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS (CONTINUED)<br />
Table 3: Polyethylene (PP)<br />
Property Test Method Reference Specification<br />
Tensile Properties BS EN ISO 6259<br />
BS EN ISO 527-1<br />
Oxygen induction<br />
time<br />
BS EN 728<br />
Melt Flow Rate BS EN ISO 1133<br />
Density<br />
BS EN ISO 1183-3, ISO<br />
4451<br />
Heat Revision ISO 12091<br />
Effects of heat<br />
(injection moulded<br />
fittings only)<br />
BS EN 763<br />
196
APPENDIX 6/1 : REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCEPTABILITY AND TESTING OF EARTHWORKS<br />
MATERIALS<br />
IF AT ANY STAGE DURING EARTHWORK OPERATIONS THE CONTRACTOR THINKS HE MAY HAVE<br />
DISTURBED A MARKED, OR UNMARKED GRAVE, HE SHALL CEASE WORK IN THAT AREA<br />
IMMEDIATELY AND NOTIFY THE COUNCIL & PROJECT MANAGER FOR FURTHER INSTRUCTION.<br />
Requirements for acceptability and testing of earthworks materials are set out below separately for site won<br />
excavated fill material and Imported Fill Materials<br />
Site Won Fill Material<br />
Fill materials shall be site excavated glacial till material.<br />
The acceptability of the material shall be determined by the Project Manager by way of inspection and based<br />
on the results of tests carried out in accordance with Appendix 5.1<br />
A copy of the site investigation is included in Section D.<br />
Imported Material<br />
1 Cohesive fill material for grave plot areas.<br />
The following fill materials, referenced to Table 6/1 of Series 600 of the Specification, shall be imported<br />
for use in the works in grave areas.<br />
Class 2A<br />
Class 2B<br />
Class 2C<br />
Class 2D<br />
Wet Cohesive Material<br />
Dry cohesive Material<br />
Stony cohesive material and<br />
Silty Cohesive material<br />
The acceptable limits for these material are given in Table A6/1.1 below<br />
2 Selected Granular Fill Material for Roads and Structures<br />
The following materials reference to Table 6/1 of Series 600 of the specification shall be imported for<br />
use in the works in areas below roads and adjacent to structures<br />
Class 6N<br />
Class 6F2<br />
Selected Granular Fill: To be used as fill to structures.<br />
Selected Granular Fill: Capping<br />
197
Table A6/1.1: Acceptable Material Properties Imported Cohesive Material<br />
Class<br />
General<br />
Typical Use<br />
Permitted Constituents (All Subject<br />
Material required for Acceptability (In Addition to Requirements on<br />
Compaction<br />
Class<br />
Material<br />
to Requirements of Clause 601 ad<br />
Use of Fill Materials in Clause 601 and testing in Clause 631)<br />
Requirements in<br />
Description<br />
Appendix 6/1)<br />
Clause 612<br />
Property (See<br />
exceptions in<br />
Previous Column)<br />
Defined and<br />
Tested in<br />
Accordance with:<br />
Acceptable Limits<br />
Within:<br />
Lower Upper<br />
2 A - Wet cohesive<br />
General Fill<br />
Any material, or combination of<br />
(i) grading BS 1377: Part 2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/4 Method 1<br />
2 A -<br />
material<br />
materials, other than chalk.<br />
(ii) plastic limit (PL) BS 1377: Part 2 - -<br />
except for materials<br />
with liquid limit<br />
greater than 50,<br />
(iii) mc BS 1377: Part 2 PL -4% 25<br />
determined by<br />
BS1377: Part 2, only<br />
(iv) MCV Clause 632 7.5 12<br />
deadweight tamping<br />
(v) Undrained shear<br />
strength of<br />
remoulded material<br />
Clause 633 30 35kpa<br />
or vibratory tamping<br />
rollers or grid rollers<br />
shall be used.<br />
2 B - Dry cohesive<br />
General Fill<br />
Any material, or combination of<br />
(i) grading BS 1377: Part 2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/4 Method 2 2 B -<br />
material<br />
materials, other than chalk.<br />
(ii) plastic limit (PL) BS 1377: Part 2 - -<br />
(iii) mc BS 1377: Part 2 15% PL -4%<br />
(iv) MCV Clause 632 7.5 12<br />
(v) Undrained shear<br />
strength of<br />
remoulded material<br />
Clause 633 30 35<br />
198
Table A6/1.1 (Continued): Acceptable Material Properties Imported Cohesive Material<br />
Class<br />
General<br />
Typical Use<br />
Permitted Constituents (All Subject<br />
Material required for Acceptability (In Addition to Requirements on<br />
Compaction<br />
Class<br />
Material<br />
to Requirements of Clause 601 ad<br />
Use of Fill Materials in Clause 601 and testing in Clause 631)<br />
Requirements in<br />
Description<br />
Appendix 6/1)<br />
Clause 612<br />
Property (See<br />
Defined and<br />
Acceptable Limits<br />
exceptions in Previous<br />
Tested in<br />
Within:<br />
Column)<br />
Accordance<br />
with:<br />
Lower<br />
Upper<br />
2 C - Stony<br />
General Fill<br />
Any material, or combination of<br />
(i) grading BS 1377: Part 2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/4 Method 1<br />
2 C -<br />
cohesive<br />
materials, other than chalk.<br />
except for materials<br />
material<br />
(ii) plastic limit (PL) BS 1377: Part 2 - -<br />
with liquid limit<br />
greater than 50,<br />
determined by<br />
(iii) mc BS 1377: Part 2 15 25<br />
BS1377: Part 2, only<br />
deadweight tamping<br />
(iv) MCV Clause 632 7.5 -<br />
or vibratory tamping<br />
rollers or grid rollers<br />
(v) Undrained shear<br />
Clause 633 30 -<br />
shall be used.<br />
strength of remoulded<br />
material<br />
2 D - Silty cohesive<br />
General Fill<br />
Any material, or combination of<br />
(i) grading BS 1377: Part 2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/4 Method 2 2 D -<br />
material<br />
materials, other than chalk.<br />
(iii) mc BS 1377: Part 2 15 25<br />
(iv) MCV Class 632 7.5 12<br />
(v) Undrained shear<br />
strength of remoulded<br />
material<br />
Class 633 30 35<br />
199
APPENDIX 6/2: REQUIREMENTS FOR DEALING WITH CLASS U1B AND CLASS U2<br />
UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS<br />
1 Class U1B and U2 materials are not expected to be present within the boundary of the scheme but any<br />
U2 material uncovered on site to be taken to approved tip off site.<br />
200
APPENDIX 6/3: REQUIREMENTS FOR EXCAVATION, DEPOSITION, COMPACTION (OTHER THAN<br />
DYNAMIC COMPACTION) ETC.<br />
1 The Contractor is to provide a detailed earth works management plan which will be submitted to the<br />
Department. The Management plan is to include method of run-off from the work areas and details of<br />
mitigation measures against pollution of watercourses before any work commences on site.<br />
2 Earthworks requirements are shown on the following drawings: 073030/GA/14 -21<br />
3 Blasting is not permitted as an alternative to normal excavation methods.<br />
4 Cutting Faces<br />
i. All fill material used to backfill behind the new contractor designed gabion wall and<br />
reinforced earth slopes to consist of clean well graded granular stone, to Designer’s<br />
specification.<br />
ii.<br />
Contractor shall take all necessary measures to ensure that excavations are kept stable and<br />
free from water. Contractor to include for these provisions in his rates as indicated in the<br />
preamble to Bill of Quantities.<br />
iii.<br />
Contractor to be responsible for all costs associated with excavating and back filling to any<br />
over dig due to battered excavations, etc being greater than the net volume required for the<br />
permanent works.<br />
iv.<br />
Slopes in rock cuttings where blocky material is present to be prepared by trimming to form<br />
a stepped, stable face. Closely jointed area to be carried out incrementally as the face is<br />
prepared. Widely jointed areas to be pressure tested with air to remove loose materials.<br />
v. Toe drains shall be installed at the base of the cuttings for collection of run off.<br />
vi.<br />
All cut off drains alongside cuttings shall be completed prior to commencement of any<br />
adjacent earthworks excavations.<br />
vii.<br />
All trimming shall be carried out incrementally.<br />
201
5 Embankment Construction<br />
I. Where the embankments are to be constructed against ground sloping at greater than 1<br />
vertical to 10 horizontal the natural ground shall be stripped of vegetation, topsoil, organic<br />
and very soft material and benched.<br />
II.<br />
Benching shall be carried out incrementally during construction of embankment to avoid<br />
deterioration of the formation. The individual bench height should be constructed to suit the<br />
layer thickness being used, but should not exceed 1000mm.<br />
ii.<br />
Cut bench surfaces shall be proof rolled before placement of any new material on the<br />
benched surface to method compaction.<br />
iii.<br />
Embankment faces shall be trimmed incrementally as construction proceeds.<br />
6 Compaction<br />
I. The degree and method of compaction of any general fill and selected granular fill material<br />
shall be as per table 6/1 and 6/4 of the Specification, Volume 1, Series 600<br />
II.<br />
Testing by means of in situ density tests to BS 1377: Part 9: 1990 shall be carried out as<br />
directed by the Project Manager.<br />
III.<br />
Slope and drainage in cuttings shall ensure that groundwater is depressed at a minimum of<br />
600 mm below formation level. In general the drainage shall consist of toe drains and cut off<br />
drains.<br />
IV.<br />
Counter fort drainage may be required if seepage occurs from the cutting faces.<br />
202
APPENDIX 6/5: GEOTEXTILES USED TO SEPARATE EARTHWORKS MATERIALS<br />
6.5.1 Geotextiles shall be placed as separation between filler materials for cut off drains, French drains and<br />
intercepting ditches and excavated fill areas.<br />
6.5.2 All geotextiles shall be thermally bonded, woven or non-woven synthetic fibres that comply with the<br />
required physical and mechanical properties.<br />
6.5.3 Design life shall be 120 years.<br />
6.5.4 Testing of samples of the geotextiles will be required as directed by the Project Manager.<br />
6.5.5 All testing shall comply with manufacturers recommendations.<br />
6.5.6 Laying, lapping and bonding of geotextiles shall be in accordance with manufacturers<br />
recommendations, a minimum lap of 500mm shall apply.<br />
6.5.7 The geotextiles used shall have the following physical properties.<br />
Geolon PP<br />
Tensile Strenght - 0.2kN minimum<br />
Static puncture resistance - 8kN<br />
Permeability - 25 l/m²/sec<br />
Pore Size (090) - 300 micron<br />
203
APPENDIX 6/6: FILL TO STRUCTURES & FILL ABOVE STRUCTURAL FOUNDATIONS.<br />
6.6.1 See Contract Drawings for details of fill to roads, structures and structural foundations.<br />
6.6.2 Only Class 6F2 material shall be used for fill to structures and structural foundations.<br />
204
APPENDIX 6/7: SUB-FORMATION & CAPPING AND PREPARATION AND SURFACE TREATMENT<br />
OF FORMATION<br />
1 The depth of capping to be provided in areas of new road construction is subject to in situ CBR<br />
testing. These tests shall be carried out by an independent and approved testing laboratory.<br />
2 Capping materials shall be 6F2 in accordance with Table 6/1. Naturally occurring gravels will not<br />
normally be permitted even if they comply with Specification requirements.<br />
3 Capping in cuttings and on embankments shall be constructed in accordance with SHW, Clause<br />
613, 11(i) and 613.12 (i) respectively.<br />
4 The use of Sub-formation or Formation by construction plant shall have a minimum protection layer<br />
of 400 mm.<br />
5 Sub-formation shall have the same shaping requirements as formation as shown on the cross<br />
section drawings.<br />
205
APPENDIX 6/8:<br />
TOPSOILING<br />
1 Height limit of topsoil stockpiles permitted: 2.0 metres.<br />
2 The requirements of Clause 618.3 are substituted by the following:<br />
TOPSOIL SPREAD<br />
The Contractor shall re-spread approved topsoil stripped from the site to the specified depths in the<br />
areas as indicated in the contract (i.e. minimum depth of 200mm). Topsoil shall be re-spread, as far as<br />
possible, in the same general area from where it was originally stripped.<br />
SOILING: METHOD OF WORKING<br />
i. Soil shall not be transported during periods of wet weather.<br />
ii. At no time should lorries/dump trucks importing soil travel over reinstated soil, however, in case where soil<br />
transportation, unavoidably involves crossing undisturbed or previously restored land, running is to be<br />
concentrated on clearly defined tracks and to be ripped and reinstated on completion. Soiling should<br />
proceed by depositing heaps of soil at the edge of the areas to be spread by a back-actor, working from<br />
adjacent areas to the specified depth. The soil shall be lightly consolidated but not compacted, in layers not<br />
exceeding 300mm. The Contractor must provide for the temporary construction and reinstatement of haul<br />
roads.<br />
iii. If, in the opinion of the Project Manager any soil has become unsuitable due to contamination or<br />
compaction during site operations, the Contractor will be requested to remove it at his own expense.<br />
All work shall be carried out at the appropriate season and under suitable weather and ground<br />
conditions. Soil movements will only be carried out when the soil is in a suitably dry condition, normally<br />
between the months of May and September.<br />
Accordingly, soil movements will be subject to the following conditions:<br />
a. Soil operations may only commence upon the approval of the Project Manager once soil<br />
conditions have been assessed.<br />
b. No soil operations will take place during rain or in the presence of standing water, unless the<br />
Project Manager permits in writing.<br />
c. Restarting work after a temporary suspension due to rain will normally depend on drying of the<br />
soil from the surface.<br />
3 All areas to be soiled are as shown on the drawings.<br />
4 Soiling depths are indicated on Drawings (i.e. minimum depth of 200mm).<br />
206
5 Rock cutting areas are to be left trimmed and cleared to the satisfaction of the Project Manager with<br />
natural bedding planes exposed if possible. No exposed clawed surfaces will be acceptable. Slopes of<br />
very blocky or cobbly nature are to be protected by geogrid mesh as agreed with the Project Manager.<br />
6 Topsoil Class 5A arising from site and subsoil arising from site which conforms with Economy Grade<br />
topsoil in accordance with BS 3882: 1994 shall be stockpiled for re-use in separate storage piles.<br />
Where possible, storage piles should be short and wide rather than long and thin in order to minimise<br />
repeated running over the soil. Soil storage piles should be on reasonable level, well drained land and<br />
should not be allowed to become waterlogged. Soil storage piles should be kept weed-free by<br />
applications of total, or appropriately selective, herbicides with particular emphasis given during the<br />
growing season to prevent weeds seeding.<br />
7 Existing soiling depths shall be agreed prior to and during excavation<br />
8 The topsoil stripping operations are subject to archaeological surveillance. These operations shall be<br />
carried out using backactor excavators with toothless buckets. Each machine shall be supervised by an<br />
archaeologist who shall confirm clearance or otherwise of the stripped area. No excavation, other then<br />
topsoil stripping, shall be carried out until the site has been cleared of archaeology and instructions to<br />
this effect issued by the Project Manager.<br />
207
APPENDIX 6/9: EARTHWORK ENVIRONMENTAL BUNDS, LANDSCAPE AREAS, STRENGTHENED<br />
EMBANKMENTS<br />
1 Details of earthwork environmental Bunds and strengthening of embankments to be included as part of<br />
contractors designed element of the works in relation to Gabion wall design. Drawings to be provided<br />
by contractor showing locations and details of construction to be approved by Project Manager. All<br />
details should comply with Clauses 619, 621 an 622 of Volume 1 of Specification for Highway Works<br />
208
APPENDIX 6/10: GROUND ANCHORAGES, CRIB WALLING AND GABIONS<br />
All earth retaining walls shall have a natural stone looking finish as Acheson and Glovers Anchor<br />
Landmark Basalt and gabion cages shall be faced with Donegal Sandstone, in dry random rubble<br />
coursing.<br />
The earth retaining structures shown in outline in the drawings 073030/GA/14 to 21 and GA/33 and in<br />
elevation on drawings 073030/GA/22 and 23 shall be designed and constructed by the contractor.<br />
The retaining wall system selected for each section shall not take up an extent of land take that will cause<br />
a reduction in the area and dimensions shown on the drawings for any of the other facilities that make up<br />
the works shown on the drawings including roads, graveplots, paths, headstone foundation, buildings,<br />
access areas, planting areas and landscape areas and existing areas that are to be maintained. Where the<br />
selected retaining wall system is located adjacent to a graveplot or planting area the contractor must<br />
demonstrate that graves can be dug immediately behind and in front of the wall without compromising the<br />
stability and safety of the wall or the excavation.<br />
Gabion Retaining Wall<br />
Gabion Retaining Wall - see Drawing Nos. 073030/GA/33 for location, details of gabion retaining wall<br />
structure and associated works encompassed by the “Designated Outline”<br />
Gabions shall comply with Clause 626 of the Specification and Appendix 6/10 of the Specification.<br />
Design for gabion retaining wall structure shall comply with all the relevant design guides and advice notes<br />
in the Highway Agency’s, Design Manual For Roads And Bridges DB2/05 Technical approval of Highway<br />
Structure, BD 30/87 - Backfilled Retaining Walls. Minimum unfactored design live load surcharge to the<br />
back of retaining wall is 15 kN/m 2 .<br />
Crib Retaining Walls<br />
Crib Retaining Wall - see Drawing Nos. 073030/GA/33 for details of crib retaining wall structure and<br />
associated works encompassed by the “Designated Outline”<br />
Crib walls shall comply with Clause 625 of the Specification and Appendix 6/10 of the Specification.<br />
Design for crib walls retaining wall structure shall comply with all the relevant design guides and advice<br />
notes in the Highway Agency’s, Design Manual For Roads And Bridges DB2/05 Technical approval of<br />
Highway Structure, BD 30/87 - Backfilled Retaining Walls and BD 68/97 Crib Retaing Walls and Guidance<br />
Note BA 68/97 Crib Retaing Walls. Minimum unfactored design live load surcharge to the back of retaining<br />
wall is 15 kN/m 2 .<br />
209
APPENDIX 7/1: PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS<br />
1. New Carriageway Construction<br />
All surfacing materials to be used in new access roads, car parks and resurfacing of existing roads<br />
shall comply with the details given in this Appendix.<br />
2. Permitted Pavement Options – Schedule 1<br />
Schedule 1: Permitted Pavement Options<br />
Drawing Ref. Area General<br />
Requirements<br />
Permitted Pavement<br />
Option<br />
073030/GA/01,<br />
All New Access Road and<br />
Schedule 2A<br />
A1<br />
02 & 04<br />
Car Park Construction<br />
incl. resurfacing of<br />
existing roads<br />
3. General Requirements – Schedule 2<br />
Schedule 2A: General Requirements – All New Road Construction<br />
Grid for checking surface levels of pavement courses (Clause Longitudinal<br />
702.4).<br />
dimensions<br />
10 m<br />
Transverse<br />
2 m<br />
dimension<br />
Surface regularity (Clause 702NI.5, Table 7/2NI) Road Category A<br />
Interval for measurement of longitudinal regularity (Clause 702.7)<br />
10 m<br />
Interval for measurement of transverse regularity (Clause 702.8)<br />
3 m<br />
Coated Chippings (Clause 915.2 & 915.3)<br />
Nominal Size:<br />
Minimum PSV<br />
Maximum AAV<br />
14/20 mm<br />
60<br />
16<br />
210
APPENDIX 7/1: PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS (CONTINUED)<br />
4. Permitted Construction Materials – Schedule 3<br />
Pavement Option A1<br />
Pavement<br />
Layer<br />
Surface<br />
Course<br />
Base<br />
Course<br />
Material Ref.<br />
Thickness (mm)<br />
SCA1 - Rolled Asphalt Surface Course or SMA 40<br />
BCA1 - Dense Macadam Base Course 60<br />
Sub- Base SBA1 - Granular Sub-base material Type 3 150<br />
Road-base SBA1 - Granular Road base material Type 3<br />
(Provisional, to be confirmed by Project Manager on site<br />
upon reduced dig for new roads and carparks)<br />
450<br />
Total<br />
700<br />
Thickness<br />
Capping If required To be confirmed<br />
5. General Requirements For Construction Materials– Schedule 4<br />
Schedule 4: (11/04) General requirements Construction Materials<br />
Clause Requirement<br />
801.2 unbound mixtures shall not be deposited as described as per sub-Clause 801.2<br />
801.3 unbound mixtures shall not be deposited as described as per sub-Clause 801.3<br />
801.7 Materials to comply with 801.7<br />
802.4 Unbound Materials up to 225 mm compacted thickness to be spread in two layers<br />
802.14 N/A<br />
901.2 and<br />
Requirement as per sub-Clause 901.2 and 942.5<br />
942.5<br />
901.19 Requirement as per sub-Clause 901.19<br />
901.28 Requirement as per sub-Clause 901.28<br />
1001.2 N/A<br />
1004.7 N/A<br />
1028 N/A<br />
1033.10 N/A<br />
211
APPENDIX 7/1: PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS (CONTINUED)<br />
6. Requirements For Construction Materials – Schedule 5<br />
(Details to be confirmed)<br />
Schedule 5: Requirements for Construction Materials<br />
Material<br />
Ref.<br />
Clause Description Requirement<br />
803 Type 1 mixture As per clause 803<br />
BA2,<br />
805<br />
BA3<br />
SBA1,<br />
805<br />
SBA2<br />
BA1 903<br />
BCA1,<br />
BCA2, 906<br />
BCA3<br />
SCA1 910<br />
Type 3 (Open Graded)<br />
Unbound Mixture<br />
Type 3 (Open Graded)<br />
Unbound Mixture<br />
Dense macadam Base<br />
Course<br />
Dense Macadam<br />
Binder course<br />
Rolled asphalt surface<br />
course (Recipe mix)<br />
As per Clause 805<br />
As per Clause 805<br />
Type: DBM50, to Clause 929<br />
Weather conditions: as per sub-Clauses<br />
945.1 and 945.2<br />
BS4987.2003: Clause 5.<br />
Binder Penetration: 50<br />
Type:<br />
DBM50<br />
Grading Range: 0/20<br />
Weather conditions: as per sub-Clauses<br />
945.1 and 945.2<br />
BS 4987.2005: Clause 6.5<br />
Minimum Delivery Temp: as per sub-Clauses<br />
945.3 and 945.4<br />
Thickness:<br />
45 mm<br />
Maximum wind speed: as per sub-Clauses<br />
945.3 and 945.4<br />
Minimum Air Temp: as per sub-Clauses<br />
945.3 and 945.4<br />
BS 594-1:2005, Table 6, Column 6/5, Schedule<br />
1B<br />
Binder:<br />
as per 50 Pen<br />
Coarse Aggregate %: 30%<br />
Aggregate Types: Crushed Rock<br />
Coated Chippings size: 14/20mm<br />
Minimum Declared PSV: 60<br />
Maximum AAV: 16<br />
212
BS 4987.2005: Clause 7.4<br />
SCA2,<br />
SCA3<br />
912<br />
Close Graded<br />
macadam surface<br />
Course<br />
Aggregate size: as per Table 26<br />
Traffic Category: B<br />
Minimum Declared PSV: 60<br />
Maximum AAV: 16<br />
Binder Penetration: as per Table 28<br />
213
APPENDIX 7/1: PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS (CONTINUED)<br />
7. Thin Surface Course Systems ; Information To Be Provided By The Contractor – Schedule 6<br />
[Note to the Contractor: Complete one sheet per system or variant of system that may be used]<br />
The Contractor shall provide the following information with his tender:<br />
(i)<br />
A copy of the British Board of Agreement HAPAS Roads and Bridges Certificate or<br />
Certificates for the thin surface course systems that are proposed for use in the works,<br />
together with a copy of the Installation Method Statement associated with each<br />
Certificate.<br />
(ii)<br />
For any Certificate that covers several variants of one thin surface course system,<br />
proposed variant or variants of the system to be used in the Works<br />
(iii)<br />
If requested, or if the thin surface course system is not produced under a Sector<br />
Scheme, the proposed component materials to be used in the thin surface course<br />
system and their proportions for each proposed system<br />
(iv)<br />
Proposed sources or sources of coarse aggregate together with statement of<br />
properties including polished stone value, ten per cent fines value, aggregate abrasion<br />
value and flakiness index<br />
(v)<br />
If regulating material is to used, evidence of its deformation resistance either<br />
independently or in combination with the thin surface course system<br />
214
APPENDIX 7/2: EXCAVATION AND REINSTATEMENT OF EXISTING SURFACES.<br />
1. Any existing surfaces disturbed by the works shall be reinstated to match existing to the<br />
satisfaction of the Project Manager. See also Contract Drawings.<br />
2. Any excavation and reinstatement of existing public roads shall comply with all requirements set<br />
down by <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> for the reinstatement of openings in roads.<br />
3. All excavations not permanently reinstated at the end of the working day and subject to<br />
trafficking shall be temporarily reinstated the same day in proprietary bituminous bound<br />
material. Details of proposed proprietary products to be forwarded to the Project Manager for<br />
approval.<br />
215
APPENDIX 7/4: BOND COATS, TACK COATS AND OTHER BITUMINOUS SPRAYS<br />
Sheet 1: Tack Coat (Clause 920) of the SHW<br />
1 Location<br />
The application of bond, tack or other bituminous sprays shall be as directed in the Contract<br />
drawings or where specified by the Supervisor on site.<br />
2 Site Specific Limitations<br />
The Contractor shall refer to Appendix 1/13 to assess site limitations<br />
3 Type of Material<br />
Tack Coat shall be bitumen emulsion complying with Class A1-40 or K1-40 of BS 434: Part 1and<br />
applied as specified in Section 4.5 of BS 5948: Part 2 1993.<br />
The Contractor must complete Binder Data Sheets as Contained in the Manual of Contract<br />
Documents for Highways Works, Volume 2 Notes for Guidance on Specifications for Highway<br />
Works NG 700, Appendix 7/4 (Sheet 2)<br />
4 Surface Preparation<br />
All areas to receive tack coat must be free from all loose material and standing water. All surfaces<br />
to receive Hot Roller Asphalt wearing course shall be prepared in accordance with the<br />
requirements of BS EN 13108-4: 2006. All surfaces to receive Macadam wearing course shall be<br />
prepared in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 13108-1: 2006.<br />
5 Masking of Street Furniture<br />
Street furniture, ironworks and drop kerbs shall be masked as per clause 920.6 of the SHW.<br />
6 Rate of Spread<br />
Rate of spread shall conform to the requirements of BS 434: Part 2: 2006 (0.45 – 0.55 lt/m2)<br />
7 Type of Blinding Material<br />
Blinding materials permitted in sub clause 13 of Clause 920, Series 900 shall not be used on site.<br />
216
APPENDIX 7/4 : BOND COATS, TACK COATS AND OTHER BITUMINOUS SPRAYS (CONTINUED)<br />
Sheet 2: Information to be provided by the contractor<br />
The Contractor shall provide the following information with his tender, or prior to the commencement of the<br />
work:<br />
1 The product or products he proposes to use together with their data sheets, product identification<br />
data, cohesivity data as specified. A suitable Sheet for the provision of binder data is attached to<br />
this Appendix, other layouts are permitted but all the required data should be supplied<br />
3 For each product, a copy of the BS EN ISO 9001 certificate showing the name of the manufacturer,<br />
the name of the certification body and the reference number and date of the certificate.<br />
4 The spraying equipment proposed, and a test certificate.<br />
5 The source or sources of blinding material proposed.<br />
6 Contingency plans in the event of any breakdown.<br />
7 The results of any other tests or other data the Contractor considers would assist the Project<br />
Manager in assessing the technical merit of the treatment such as:<br />
(i) Tackiness test and/or trafficability time and methods of test.<br />
(ii) Breaking time test results for different weather conditions and substrates.<br />
(iii) Test results for bond to newly laid concrete. The data supplied should not be more than 6<br />
months old.<br />
217
APPENDIX 7/9: COLD-MILLING (PLANNING) OF BITUMINOUS BOUND FLEXIBLE SURFACING<br />
1. Cold-milling (planning) or scarifying of the existing surfacing will be required to remove the<br />
exiting wearing course at the location of all tie-ins. The minimum depth of cold-milling required<br />
is the depth of the existing wearing course material.<br />
2. The edges of transverse and longitudinal joints in milled areas shall be cleared and made truly<br />
vertical. These edges shall be painted with hot bitumen conforming to BS EN 13108-4:2006<br />
prior to laying any bituminous material.<br />
3. All horizontal planed surfaces shall be treated with a bituminous tack coat as Appendix 7/4.<br />
4. The surfaces of any milled areas shall be thoroughly cleared by a sweeper unit to remove all<br />
loose material and dirt in advanced of surfacing works on the planed surface.<br />
5. At all tie ins between new or re-surfaced pavements, the existing surface shall be cold milled at<br />
a constant depth of 45mm over a distance of 10m.<br />
6. Surplus material can only be disposed off in an approved tip.<br />
7. When planning or milling existing roads, no vertical step greater than 40mm shall be formed in<br />
the existing carriageway left open to traffic. A temporary ramp (maximum gradient 20%) of<br />
Wearing Course material shall be laid across the step until the discontinuity is made up with<br />
resurfacing or regulating material as described in the contract, at which time the temporary<br />
ramp shall be taken out.<br />
8. Planning or milling shall not begin if the surface to be treated is to be left more than 14 days<br />
before the application of an overlying course of material.<br />
9. Road reinstatement shall be in accordance with Northern Ireland Road Authority and Utilities<br />
Committee (NIRAUC) Specification for the reinstatement of openings in roads.<br />
218
APPENDIX 11/1 : KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS<br />
300x 150 mm half battered Precast concrete kerbs bedded on a concrete foundation to be used unless<br />
otherwise noted on the drawings.<br />
150 x 75 mm square edging kerb bedded on a concrete foundation to be used unless otherwise noted on the<br />
drawings.<br />
The Footway Construction shall be as follows:-<br />
TYPE 1 - CONCRETE FOOTPATHS (see drawings for locations)<br />
BaysSlab<br />
Slab<br />
Max Spacing of<br />
Longitudinal Steel<br />
Special Requirements<br />
Type<br />
Thickness<br />
Transverse<br />
Reinf.<br />
Contraction Joints<br />
Jointed<br />
150 mm-<br />
Details and layout of<br />
1 No. Layer of A393<br />
Anti-slip ‘brushed’ finish<br />
reinforced<br />
250mm<br />
joints to be agreed on<br />
mesh<br />
to surface of concrete,<br />
concrete<br />
along<br />
site with Project<br />
with smooth 150mm<br />
surface<br />
edges<br />
Manager.<br />
wide band to edges of<br />
slab<br />
slab.<br />
Sub-Base Clause Material Thickness<br />
850NI Type 6F2 Stone 150 mm<br />
See also Contract<br />
Drawings<br />
Notes:<br />
1. Concrete to be grade 35/20/OP.<br />
2. Reinforcement to Clause 1008.<br />
TYPE 2 - CONCRETE HARDSTANDING COMPOUND AREAS (see drawings for locations)<br />
BaysSlab<br />
Type<br />
Jointed<br />
reinforce<br />
d<br />
concrete<br />
surface<br />
slab<br />
Sub-<br />
Base<br />
Slab<br />
Thickness<br />
Max Spacing of<br />
Transverse<br />
Contraction Joints<br />
Longitudinal Steel<br />
Reinf.<br />
220mm Details and layout of 1 No. Layer of A393<br />
joints to be in<br />
mesh<br />
accordance with<br />
contract drawings.<br />
Any variations from<br />
drawing to be<br />
approved by Project<br />
Manager.<br />
Clause Material Thickness<br />
850NI Type 6F2 Stone 150 mm<br />
Special Requirements<br />
Anti-slip ‘brushed’ finish<br />
to surface of concrete.<br />
See also Contract<br />
Drawings<br />
219
Notes:<br />
1. Concrete to be grade 35/20/OP.<br />
2. Reinforcement to Clause 1008.<br />
APPENDIX 12/1: TRAFFIC SIGNS: GENERAL<br />
All traffic signs, including supporting posts, brackets, fixing details and the like, shall be supplied and<br />
erected, including reinstatements, by the Contractor. The precise location of the signs and bollards shall<br />
be agreed with the Engineer.<br />
The Contractor shall supply and erect all the required illuminated bollards for the Works. The Contractor<br />
shall provide attendance to the Engineer and install ducting to be as per Appendix 5/2. The Contractor<br />
shall be responsible for all excavations, foundations and reinstatements.<br />
APPENDIX 12/3: TRAFFIC SIGNS - ROAD MARKINGS AND STUDS<br />
1 ROAD MARKINGS<br />
All permanent road markings shall be white and shall consist of continuous or intermittent lines, letters,<br />
figures, arrows or symbols laid in accordance with the Traffic Signs Regulations NI, including any<br />
subsequent amendments, Chapter 5 of Traffic Signs Manual or as directed by the Engineer.<br />
Road markings shall comply with Clause 1212 NIS contained in Appendix 0/5.<br />
The locations of road markings and studs will be as directed by the Engineer.<br />
220
APPENDIX 17/1 : CONCRETE – CLASSIFICATION OF MIXES<br />
1. All structural concrete shall comply with the following requirements and be supplied by a<br />
QSRMC accredited firm:<br />
Mix Reference<br />
Mix Reference<br />
C35<br />
C15<br />
Ordinary or Special Concrete (O or S) O O<br />
Class of Concrete (Grade/Max Agg.Size) 35/20 15/20<br />
Minimum Cement Content (kg/m3) 345 230<br />
Maximum Free Water/Cement Ratio 0.47 0.65<br />
Required Workability 50 75<br />
Max Cement Content {See NG 1704:3} 550 550<br />
Required Type and Class of Cement OPC to BS 12:1978 OPC to BS 12:1978<br />
Required Source/Special Type of Agg. Agg. To BS 882:1983 Agg. To BS 882:1983<br />
Required Admixture None None<br />
Air Entrainment Required {YES/NO}<br />
Yes, for Concrete Paths &<br />
Hardstanding Areas<br />
No<br />
Min or Max Temp of Fresh Concrete ºC - -<br />
Sampling and Testing App 1/5 App 1/5<br />
Other Requirements - -<br />
221
APPENDIX 17/3 : SURFACE FINISHES<br />
1. The required surface finish to the new concrete footways and hardstanding areas = brushed with<br />
smooth edges as detailed in Appendix 11/1.<br />
2. Permanently exposed concrete surfaces shall be to Class F3 finish to Clause 1708 and shall be<br />
protected from rust marks and stains of all kinds.<br />
3. Hidden concrete surfaces shall be to class F1 finish to Clause 1708.<br />
4. All formwork joints for exposed surfaces shall form a regular pattern agreed with the Client’s<br />
Representative with horizontal and vertical lines continuous throughout each structure and all<br />
construction joints shall coincide with these horizontal and vertical lines.<br />
5. Surface finish to the exposed soffit and internal sides of the precast concrete beams, and to the<br />
outside exposed elevation of the precast concrete edge beam, is to have a Class F3 finish. The<br />
hidden concrete face on the top surface of the precast concrete beams that will be cast into the deck<br />
shall be Class 2, “rough as cast”, to clause 1710 of the specification.<br />
222
APPENDIX 17/4 : CONCRETE – GENERAL<br />
1. Provide a minimum 50mm concrete cover to all reinforcement, with exception of salt silo which will<br />
have a minimum 75mm concrete cover to all reinforcement<br />
2. The use of admixtures shall not be permitted without the written approval of the Project Manager.<br />
3. See Appendix 1/5 for testing requirements for concrete.<br />
4. The location of all proposed construction joints must be as indicated on the relevant contract<br />
drawings.<br />
223
APPENDIX 23/2 SEALING OF GAPS SCHEDULE (OTHER THAN IN BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINTS)<br />
GENERAL<br />
1. Joints in concrete paths and concrete hardstanding are to be located and to be in accordance with<br />
details on Contract Drawings.<br />
2. Where cold poured sealants are indicated on the Drawings for sealing of gaps or joints, they shall<br />
consist of gun applied two part polysulphide complying with BS EN ISO 11600:2003.<br />
3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all gap joints sealers shall be backed with a<br />
suitable sized circular cross section rod of closed cell expanded polyethylene. Such rods shall be<br />
compressed and pushed into the joint prior to sealing.<br />
4. Unless otherwise indicate on the Drawings, all joint fillers in gap joints shall consist of closed cell<br />
expanded polyethylene board of appropriate width.<br />
5. Joint faces shall be prepared and joints installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s<br />
Instructions.<br />
224
APPENDIX 25/2: REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED SOIL AND ANCHORED EARTH<br />
STRUCTURES<br />
All earth retaining walls shall have a natural looking stone finish as Acheson and Glovers Anchor<br />
Landmark Basalt or equal and approved.<br />
The earth retaining structures shown in outline in the drawings 073030/GA/14 to 21 and in elevation on<br />
drawings 073030/GA/22 and 23 shall be designed and constructed by the contractor.<br />
The retaining wall system selected for each section shall not take up an extent of land take that will cause<br />
a reduction in the area and dimensions shown on the drawings for any of the other facilities that make up<br />
the works shown on the drawings including roads, graveplots, paths, headstone foundation, buildings,<br />
access areas, planting areas and landscape areas and existing areas that are to be maintained. Where the<br />
selected retaining wall system is located adjacent to a graveplot area the contractor must demonstrate that<br />
graves can be dug immediately behind the wall without compromising the stability and safety of the wall or<br />
the excavation.<br />
Reinforced Earth Retaining Walls<br />
Reinforced Earth Retaining Walls - see Drawing No. 073030/GA/12, 13, 22 & 23 for location, layout and<br />
details of reinforced earth slopes and associated works encompassed by the “Designated Outline”<br />
Reinforced earth Retaining Walls to comply with Clause 622 of the Specification and Appendix 6/10 of the<br />
Specification.<br />
Design for reinforced earth slopes shall comply with all the relevant design guides and advice notes in the<br />
Highway Agency’s, Design Manual For Roads And Bridges DB2/05 Technical approval of Highway<br />
Structure, HA68/94 - Design Methods for the Reinforcement of Highway Slopes by Reinforced Soil and<br />
Soil Nailing Techniques. Minimum unfactored design live load surcharge to the top of the slope is 10<br />
kN/m 2 .<br />
The design shall comply with BD70/03 Strengthened / Reinforced soils and other fills for Retaining Walls<br />
and Bridge Abutments<br />
The design of the retaining walls including the facing units and reinforcing elements shall comply with BS<br />
8006-1:2010 Code of Practice for strengthened / reinforced soils and other fills.<br />
The design of the retaining walls shall comply with BSEN 14475:2006 Execution of special Geotechnical<br />
works. Reinforced Fill.<br />
225
APPENDIX 25/5: REQUIREMENTS FOR BURIED RIGID PIPES FOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES<br />
1 Any requirements for drainage of structures are as per Appendix 5/1. Location of drainage is shown<br />
on Drawing No. 073030/GA/26.<br />
226